2022 CHEROKEE
OWNER’S MANUAL
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or o-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust,
do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area
and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more
information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this
vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on
this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the
right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc.
used in substitution therefore.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual,
Navigation/Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover.
U.S. Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty
Booklet by calling 1-877-426-5337 or by contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com.
Canadian Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the
Warranty Booklet or purchase a replacement kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1INTRODUCTION..............................................................................................................................8
2GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE .................................................................................14
3GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ........................................................72
4STARTING AND OPERATING ................................................................................................90
5MULTIMEDIA ...............................................................................................................................149
6SAFETY .........................................................................................................................................169
7IN CASE OF EMERGENCY ....................................................................................................224
8SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ......................................................................................247
9TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................299
10CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .....................................................................................................305
11INDEX.............................................................................................................................................309
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1
2
INTRODUCTION
SYMBOLS KEY...........................................................9
ROLLOVER WARNING .............................................9
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS ......... 10
SYMBOL GLOSSARY.............................................. 10
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS ....................................................................... 14
Key Fob .............................................................14
SENTRY KEY ........................................................... 17
IGNITION SWITCH .................................................. 17
Ignition Node Module (IGNM) —
If Equipped........................................................17
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition
(If Equipped) .....................................................18
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED .......................... 19
How To Use Remote Start................................19
To Exit Remote Start Mode..............................20
Remote Start Front Defrost Activation —
If Equipped........................................................21
Remote Start Comfort Systems —
If Equipped .......................................................21
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer
Activation — If Equipped ..................................21
Remote Start Cancel Message........................21
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .....22
To Arm The System .........................................22
To Disarm The System ....................................22
Rearming Of The System .................................22
Security System Manual Override...................22
DOORS ....................................................................23
Manual Door Locks ..........................................23
Power Door Locks ...........................................23
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry ...........24
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit......................26
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped .............26
Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors .......................................................26
STEERING WHEEL ..................................................27
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column...................27
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped ...........27
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION.........................28
Introducing Voice Recognition.........................28
Basic Voice Commands ...................................28
Get Started .......................................................28
Additional Information .....................................29
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED ....29
Programming The Memory Feature ................29
Linking And Unlinking The Key Fob To
Memory .............................................................29
Memory Position Recall ...................................30
SEATS ..................................................................... 30
Manual Adjustment (Front Seats) —
If Equipped .......................................................30
Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats)....................31
Power Adjustment (Front Seats) —
If Equipped .......................................................33
Heated Seats — If Equipped............................35
Ventilated Seats — If Equipped .......................35
Head Restraints ...............................................36
MIRRORS ............................................................... 38
Inside Rearview Mirror.....................................38
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors ...............................38
Outside Mirrors ................................................39
Power Mirrors ...................................................39
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ........................39
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED
b
...................... 39
Before You Begin Programming
HomeLink® ......................................................40
Erasing All The HomeLink® Channels............40
Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling
Code Or Non-Rolling Code Device...................40
Programming HomeLink® To A Garage
Door Opener .....................................................40
Programming HomeLink® To A
Miscellaneous Device......................................41
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink®
Button ...............................................................42
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming .........42
Security .............................................................43
Troubleshooting Tips........................................43
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 2
3
EXTERIOR LIGHTS.................................................. 43
Multifunction Lever .........................................43
Headlight Switch...............................................44
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) —
If Equipped........................................................44
High/Low Beam Switch....................................45
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control —
If Equipped .......................................................45
Flash-To-Pass....................................................45
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped ..............45
Parking Lights...................................................45
Automatic Headlights With Wipers —
If Equipped........................................................46
Headlight Time Delay .......................................46
Lights-On Reminder .........................................46
Fog Lights — If Equipped..................................46
Turn Signals......................................................47
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped..................47
Battery Saver ....................................................47
INTERIOR LIGHTS .................................................. 47
Interior Courtesy Lights....................................47
Illuminated Entry .............................................49
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS .............. 49
Windshield Wiper Operation............................49
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ...............50
Rear Window Wiper/Washer ...........................50
Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped.........51
CLIMATE CONTROLS..............................................51
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions And
Functions ..........................................................51
Manual Climate Control Descriptions And
Functions ..........................................................54
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped .......................................................56
Climate Voice Commands................................57
Operating Tips .................................................57
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT ...............58
Storage..............................................................58
Sun Visors ........................................................59
AUX/USB Control .............................................60
Power Outlets ...................................................60
Power Inverter — If Equipped .........................62
WINDOWS ..............................................................62
Power Window Controls ...................................62
Automatic Window Features ..........................63
Reset Auto-Up...................................................63
Window Lockout Switch...................................64
Wind Buffeting .................................................64
POWER SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE —
IF EQUIPPED ..........................................................64
Opening And Closing The Sunroof...................65
Opening And Closing The Power Shade..........65
Pinch Protect Feature ......................................66
Venting Sunroof................................................66
Ignition Off Operation.......................................66
Sunroof Maintenance ......................................66
HOOD ...................................................................... 66
Opening The Hood ...........................................66
Closing The Hood .............................................67
LIFTGATE................................................................. 67
To Unlock/Open The Liftgate ..........................67
To Lock/Close The Liftgate..............................68
Hands-Free Liftgate — If Equipped .................68
Cargo Area Features .......................................70
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED ............. 71
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ........................................ 72
Instrument Cluster Descriptions .....................74
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ........................ 74
Instrument Cluster Display Location And
Controls.............................................................74
Oil Life Reset — If Equipped ............................75
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items ........76
Instrument Cluster Display Selectable
Items .................................................................78
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode
Message — Electrical Load Reduction
Actions — If Equipped .....................................79
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 3
4
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ................... 80
Red Warning Lights ..........................................80
Yellow Warning Lights ......................................83
Yellow Indicator Lights .....................................86
Green Indicator Lights......................................87
White Indicator Lights ......................................87
Blue Indicator Lights ........................................88
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II ........ 88
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity ....................................................89
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ........................................................... 89
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE ........................................ 90
Normal Starting ................................................90
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or
−29°C) .............................................................91
Extended Park Starting ....................................91
If Engine Fails To Start ....................................91
After Starting.....................................................91
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED............ 91
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS........... 92
PARKING BRAKE ................................................... 92
Electric Park Brake (EPB) ................................92
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION................................95
Key Ignition Park Interlock...............................96
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI)
System ..............................................................96
9-Speed Automatic Transmission ..................96
Gear Ranges.....................................................97
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION ..................... 100
1-Speed Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) —
If Equipped..................................................... 100
2-Speed Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) —
If Equipped..................................................... 101
Shift Positions................................................ 101
Shifting Procedures....................................... 102
Rear Electronic Locker System —
If Equipped..................................................... 102
SELEC-TERRAIN................................................... 103
Description .................................................... 103
POWER STEERING .............................................. 104
STOP/START SYSTEM ........................................ 104
Autostop Mode .............................................. 105
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop......................................................... 105
To Start The Engine While In Autostop
Mode .............................................................. 106
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start
System ........................................................... 106
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start
System ........................................................... 106
System Malfunction ...................................... 106
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS —
IF EQUIPPED ........................................................107
Cruise Control................................................ 107
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)...................... 109
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .....................................117
ParkSense Sensors....................................... 118
ParkSense Display ........................................ 118
ParkSense Warning Display ......................... 121
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense.............. 121
Service The ParkSense Park Assist
System ........................................................... 121
Cleaning The ParkSense System ................. 122
ParkSense System Usage Precautions........ 122
Side Distance Warning System.................... 123
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED.........................................................124
Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense
Active Park Assist System............................. 125
Parallel/Perpendicular Parking Space
Assistance Operation.................................... 126
Exiting The Parking Space ............................ 128
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED .............................129
LaneSense Operation ................................... 129
Turning LaneSense On Or Off....................... 129
LaneSense Warning Message...................... 129
Changing LaneSense Status ........................ 133
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ...............133
REFUELING THE VEHICLE ..................................134
VEHICLE LOADING ..............................................135
Certification Label......................................... 135
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 4
5
TRAILER TOWING ................................................136
Common Towing Definitions......................... 136
Trailer Hitch Classification............................ 138
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) ............................................. 138
Trailer And Tongue Weight ........................... 139
Towing Requirements ................................... 139
Towing Tips ................................................... 141
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME) .....................................................142
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another
Vehicle............................................................ 142
Recreational Towing — Front-Wheel
Drive (FWD) Models ...................................... 143
Recreational Towing — 4x4 Models With
1-Speed Power Transfer Unit........................ 143
Recreational Towing — 4x4 Models With
2-Speed Power Transfer Unit........................ 143
DRIVING TIPS .......................................................146
On-Road Driving Tips..................................... 146
Off-Road Driving Tips..................................... 146
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS .........................................149
CYBERSECURITY .................................................149
UCONNECT SETTINGS .........................................150
Customer Programmable Features.............. 150
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES ..... 166
Regulatory And Safety Information .............. 166
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED.................... 166
Off-Road Pages Status Bar .......................... 167
Drivetrain ...................................................... 167
Pitch & Roll ................................................... 167
Accessory Gauges ........................................ 168
Selec-Terrain — If Equipped ......................... 168
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES.............................................. 169
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ..................... 169
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ....... 170
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS.......................... 178
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) —
If Equipped..................................................... 178
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation — If Equipped ............................... 182
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) .... 184
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ................... 188
Occupant Restraint Systems Features ....... 188
Important Safety Precautions ...................... 188
Seat Belt Systems ........................................ 189
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) ...... 197
Child Restraints............................................. 209
SAFETY TIPS.........................................................221
Transporting Passengers.............................. 221
Transporting Pets.......................................... 221
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle ................................................... 221
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle ...................................... 222
Exhaust Gas................................................... 223
Carbon Monoxide Warnings ......................... 223
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS .........................224
ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED .....224
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ........................227
Preparations For Jacking.............................. 228
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage .............. 228
Jacking Instructions ...................................... 229
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED.....................232
Tire Service Kit Storage ................................ 232
Tire Service Kit Components And
Operation....................................................... 233
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions ............. 233
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit.............. 235
JUMP STARTING ..................................................237
Preparations For Jump Start ........................ 238
Jump Starting Procedure.............................. 238
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 5
6
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY – IF EQUIPPED ...239
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ...........................240
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE ..............................241
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ..............................242
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE..........................243
Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models ................. 244
4x4 Models With 1–Speed Power Transfer
Unit ................................................................. 244
4x4 Models With 2–Speed Power Transfer
Unit ................................................................. 244
Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped ......... 245
Recovery Strap — If Equipped....................... 246
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) ..................................................................246
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR).........................246
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING ....................................247
Maintenance Plan ......................................... 248
ENGINE COMPARTMENT ....................................251
2.0L Engine ................................................... 251
2.4L Engine ................................................... 252
3.2L Engine ................................................... 253
Checking Oil Level ......................................... 254
Adding Washer Fluid .................................... 254
Maintenance-Free Battery ........................... 254
Pressure Washing ......................................... 255
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE..................................... 255
Engine Oil ...................................................... 255
Engine Oil Filter ............................................. 256
Engine Air Cleaner Filter ............................... 256
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection................... 257
Air Conditioner Maintenance........................ 258
Body Lubrication ........................................... 260
Windshield Wiper Blades ............................. 260
Exhaust System ............................................ 263
Cooling System.............................................. 264
Brake System ............................................... 267
Automatic Transmission ............................... 268
Fuses.............................................................. 269
Bulb Replacement ........................................ 278
TIRES ................................................................... 279
Tire Safety Information ................................. 279
Tires — General Information......................... 286
Tire Types....................................................... 289
Spare Tires — If Equipped ............................ 290
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care......................... 291
Snow Traction Devices ................................. 292
Tire Rotation Recommendations ................. 294
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES ................... 295
Treadwear...................................................... 295
Traction Grades............................................. 295
Temperature Grades..................................... 295
STORING THE VEHICLE....................................... 296
BODYWORK..........................................................296
Protection From Atmospheric Agents .......... 296
Body And Underbody Maintenance ............. 296
Preserving The Bodywork ............................. 297
INTERIORS ...........................................................297
Seats And Fabric Parts ................................. 297
Plastic And Coated Parts .............................. 298
Leather Surfaces........................................... 298
Glass Surfaces ............................................. 298
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) ........299
BRAKE SYSTEM ...................................................299
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS ..299
Torque Specifications ................................... 299
FUEL REQUIREMENTS.........................................300
2.0L Engine ................................................... 300
2.4L And 3.2L Engines ................................. 300
Reformulated Gasoline................................. 300
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends......................... 300
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel
Vehicles ......................................................... 301
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications...... 301
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese
Tricarbonyl (MMT) In Gasoline ..................... 301
Materials Added To Fuel............................... 301
Fuel System Cautions ................................... 302
FLUID CAPACITIES ..............................................302
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ...................303
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS.................304
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 6
7
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE ....................................................305
Prepare For The Appointment ...................... 305
Prepare A List ................................................ 305
Be Reasonable With Requests..................... 305
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ................................ 305
FCA US LLC Customer Center....................... 305
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center............... 305
Mexico............................................................ 305
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands................ 306
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)......................... 306
Service Contract............................................ 306
WARRANTY INFORMATION................................306
MOPAR® PARTS .................................................307
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ..........................307
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C............................................ 307
In Canada ...................................................... 307
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ..........................307
GENERAL INFORMATION....................................308
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 7
8
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on the purchase of your new Jeep®. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and perform tasks that are not intended for conventional passenger vehicles. It handles and maneuvers
differently from many passenger vehicles both on-road and off-road, so take time to become familiar with your vehicle. If equipped, the two-wheel drive version
of this vehicle was designed for on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a four-wheel drive vehicle.
Before you drive this vehicle, read the Owner’s Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls, particularly those used for braking, steering,
transmission, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces. Your driving skills will improve with experience. When driving
off-road, or working the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics. Always observe federal, state, provincial
and local laws wherever you drive. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision Ú page 146.
This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your
vehicle. It is supplemented by customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC offers to its
customers as well as the details of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before
driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help ensure safe and
enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated in the
text. Therefore, you should only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content introduced
throughout the Owner’s Information, which may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”. All data contained in
this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For
this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For further information, contact an authorized
dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your Jeep® best, have factory-trained technicians, genuine Mopar® parts, and care about
your satisfaction.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 8
9
SYMBOLS KEY
If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Cautions and Warnings.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of
vehicles. This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of
gravity than many passenger vehicles. It is capable of performing better in a
wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an unsafe manner, all vehicles
can go out of control. Because of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is
out of control it may roll over while some other vehicles may not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving actions
that can cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may
result in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury. Drive
carefully.
Rollover Warning Label
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of
severe or fatal injury. In fact, the US government notes that the universal use
of existing seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more each
year and could reduce disabling injuries by two million annually. In a rollover
crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person
wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
WARNING!
These statements are against operating
procedures that could result in a collision, bodily
injury and/or death.
CAUTION!
These statements are against procedures that
could result in damage to your vehicle.
NOTE:
A suggestion which will improve installation,
operation, and reliability. If not followed, may
result in damage.
TIP:
General ideas/solutions/suggestions on easier
use of the product or functionality.
PAGE REFERENCE
ARROW
Follow this reference for additional information on
a particular feature.
FOOTNOTE
Supplementary and relevant information
pertaining to the topic.
1
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 9
10
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating
precautions to be observed when using this component. It is important to
follow all warnings when operating your vehicle. See below for the definition of
each symbol Ú page 80.
NOTE:
Warning and Indicator lights are different based upon equipment options and
current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its
roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious
injury or death.
Red Warning Lights
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Ú page 80
Air Bag Warning Light
Ú page 80
Brake Warning Light
Ú page 80
Battery Charge Warning Light
Ú page 81
Door Open Warning Light
Ú page 81
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault Warning Light
Ú page 81
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Ú page 82
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 82
Hood Open Warning Light
Ú page 82
Liftgate Open Warning Light
Ú page 82
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Ú page 82
Red Warning Lights
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 10
11
Oil Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 83
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 83
Vehicle Security Warning Light
Ú page 83
Yellow Warning Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault Warning Light
Ú page 83
Electronic Park Brake Warning Light
Ú page 83
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
Ú page 83
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning Light
Ú page 83
Red Warning Lights
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light
Ú page 84
Low Fuel Warning Light
Ú page 84
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light
Ú page 84
Service LaneSense Warning Light
Ú page 84
LaneSense Warning Light
Ú page 84
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light (MIL)
Ú page 84
Service 4WD Warning Light
Ú page 85
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Light
Ú page 85
Yellow Warning Lights
1
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 11
12
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light
Ú page 85
Cruise Control Fault Warning Light
Ú page 85
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
Ú page 85
Yellow Indicator Lights
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Off Indicator Light
Ú page 86
4WD Low Indicator Light
Ú page 86
Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light
Ú page 86
Wait To Start Light
Ú page 86
Yellow Warning Lights
Water In Fuel Indicator Light
Ú page 86
Green Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Vehicle Light
Ú page 87
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set Without Target Vehicle Light
Ú page 87
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light
Ú page 87
Front Fog Indicator Light
Ú page 87
LaneSense Indicator Light
Ú page 87
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
Ú page 87
Yellow Indicator Lights
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 12
13
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light
Ú page 87
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Ú page 87
White Indicator Lights
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light
Ú page 87
LaneSense Indicator Light
Ú page 88
Speed Warning Indicator Light
Ú page 88
Green Indicator Lights
Selec-Speed Control Indicator Light
Ú page 88
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
Ú page 88
Blue Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Ú page 88
White Indicator Lights
1
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 13
14
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS
KEY FOB
Your vehicle may be equipped with a standard
ignition key fob or a keyless ignition key fob.
The standard ignition key fob operates the ignition
switch. Insert the square end of the key fob into the
ignition switch located on the instrument panel
and rotate to the desired position. The key fob also
contains an emergency key, which is stored in the
rear of the key fob.
Key Fob For Standard Ignition
Your vehicle may be equipped with a keyless
ignition key fob that supports Passive Entry,
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE), Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
(if equipped), Remote Start (if equipped), and
power liftgate operation. This type of key fob
operates a START/STOP ignition button system.
This feature allows the driver to operate the
ignition switch with the push of a button as long as
the key fob is in the passenger compartment.
NOTE:
The key fob’s wireless signal may be blocked if
the key fob is located next to a mobile phone,
laptop, or other electronic device. This may
result in poor performance.
The key fob allows you to lock or unlock the
doors and liftgate from distances up to approxi-
mately 66 ft (20 m). The key fob does not need
to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
system.
1 — PANIC Button
2 — Unlock Button
3 — Lock Button
4 — Remote Start Button
5 — Emergency Key Location
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 14
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
Key Fob For Keyless Ignition
NOTE:
In case the ignition switch does not change with
the push of a button, the key fob may have a low
or fully depleted battery. A low key fob battery
can be verified by referring to the instrument
cluster, which will display directions to follow.
Improper disposal of key fob batteries may be
harmful to the environment. Please see an
authorized dealer for proper battery disposal
Ú page 308.
To Lock/Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Push the interior door unlock button on the door
panel.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is unlocked using the interior door
panel, and no door is opened within 60 seconds,
the vehicle will relock and if equipped, the security
system will arm. You can change the current
setting within the Uconnect system Ú page 150.
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob
once to unlock the driver’s door, or twice within five
seconds to unlock all the doors and the liftgate. To
lock all the doors and the liftgate, push the lock
button once.
When the doors unlock, the turn signals will flash
and Illuminated Approach will be activated. When
the doors lock, the turn signals will flash and the
horn will chirp. This setting can be adjusted in the
Uconnect system Ú page 150.
Key Left Vehicle Feature
If a valid key fob is no longer detected inside the
vehicle while the vehicle’s ignition system is in the
ON/RUN or START position, the message “Key Left
Vehicle” will be shown in the instrument cluster
display along with an interior chime. An exterior
audible and visual alert will also be activated to
warn the driver.
The vehicle’s horn will rapidly chirp three times
along with a single flash of the vehicle’s exterior
lights.
NOTE:
The doors have to be open and then closed in
order for the vehicle to check for the presence of
a key fob; the Key Left Vehicle feature will not
activate until all of the doors are closed.
These alerts will not be activated in situations
where the vehicle’s engine is left running with
the key fob inside.
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob
The replacement battery is one CR2032 battery.
NOTE:
Customers are recommended to use a battery
obtained from Mopar®. Aftermarket coin
battery dimensions may not meet the original
OEM coin battery dimensions.
Perchlorate Material — special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate for further information.
Do not touch the battery terminals that are on
the back housing or the printed circuit board.
1 — Unlock Button
2 — Liftgate Button (If Equipped)
3 — Lock Button
4 — Remote Start Button (If Equipped)
5 — PANIC Button
6 — Emergency Key
2
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 15
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the
mechanical latch on the back of the key fob
sideways with your thumb and then pulling
the key out with your other hand.
Emergency Key Removal
Emergency Key Removal
2. Separating key fob halves requires screw
removal (if equipped), and gently prying the
two halves of the key fob apart. Make sure not
to damage the seal during removal.
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover
over (battery facing downward) and tapping it
lightly on a solid surface such as a table or
similar, then replace the battery. When
replacing the battery, match the (+) sign on the
battery to the (+) sign on the inside of the
battery clip, located on the back cover. Avoid
touching the new battery with your fingers.
Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If
you touch a battery, clean it with rubbing
alcohol.
4. To assemble the key fob case, snap the two
halves together, reposition and secure the
screw.
Programming And Requesting Additional
Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by an
authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be repurposed and reprogrammed to
another vehicle.
Only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is
programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
WARNING!
The integrated key fob contains a coin cell
battery. Do not ingest the battery; there is a
chemical burn hazard. If the coin cell battery is
swallowed, it can cause severe internal burns
in just two hours and can lead to death.
If you think a battery may have been swal-
lowed or placed inside any part of the body,
seek immediate medical attention.
Keep new and used batteries away from chil-
dren. If the battery compartment does not
close securely, stop using the product and
keep it away from children.
WARNING!
Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition, always remember to
place the ignition in the OFF position.
WARNING!
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 16
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of
programming a blank key fob to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key fob is one that has never
been programmed.
NOTE:
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
Keys must be ordered to the correct key cut to
match the vehicle locks.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the
engine. The system does not need to be armed or
activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of
whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button
ignition and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to
prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore,
only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The
system cannot reprogram a key fob obtained from
another vehicle.
After placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position,
the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three
seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on
after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a
problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light
begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates
that someone attempted to start the engine with
an invalid key fob. In the event that a valid key fob
is used to start the engine but there is an issue
with the vehicle electronics, the engine will start
and shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than
10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the
electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle
serviced as soon as possible by an authorized
dealer.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle
have been programmed to the vehicle electronics
Ú page 308.
IGNITION SWITCH
IGNITION NODE MODULE (IGNM) —
I
F EQUIPPED
The Ignition Node Module (IGNM) operates similar
to an ignition switch. It has four operating
positions, three with detents and one that is
spring-loaded. The detent positions are OFF, ACC,
and ON/RUN. The START position is a
spring-loaded momentary contact position. When
released from the START position, the switch
automatically returns to the ON/RUN position.
Ignition Switch
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not
compatible with some aftermarket Remote Start
systems. Use of these systems may result in
vehicle starting problems and loss of security
protection.
1 — OFF
2 — ACC (Accessory)
3 — ON/RUN
4 — START
2
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 17
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ IGNITION
(IF EQUIPPED)
This feature allows the driver to operate the
ignition switch with the push of a button as long as
the key fob is in the passenger compartment.
The START/STOP ignition button has several
operating modes that are labeled and will
illuminate when in position. These modes are OFF,
ACC, ON/RUN, and START.
Push Button Ignition
The push button ignition can be placed in the
following modes:
OFF
The engine is stopped
Some electrical devices (e.g. power locks,
alarm, etc.) are still available
ACC
Engine is not started
Some electrical devices are available (e.g.
power sunroof, power windows, etc.)
ON/RUN
Driving position
All electrical devices are available (e.g. climate
controls, heated seats, etc.)
START
The engine will start (when foot is on the brake)
NOTE:
If the ignition switch does not change with the push
of a button, the key fob may have a low battery. In
this situation, a backup method can be used to
operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side (side
opposite of the emergency key) of the key fob
against the START/STOP ignition button and push
to operate the ignition switch.
Starting The Ignition With Depleted Key Fob Battery
1 — OFF
2 — ACC
3 — ON/RUN
WARNING!
Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then shift the automatic trans-
mission into PARK, apply the parking brake,
place the engine in the OFF position, remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock your
vehicle. If equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™,
always make sure the keyless ignition is in OFF
position, remove the key fob from the vehicle
and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 18
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
NOTE:
For information on normal starting, see
Ú page 90.
When opening the driver's door and the ignition
is in the ON/RUN (engine not running) position,
a chime will sound to remind you to place the
ignition in the OFF position. In addition to the
chime, the message “Ignition or Accessory ON”
will display in the cluster.
The power window switches and power sunroof
(if equipped) will remain active for three
minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF
position. Opening either front door will cancel
this feature. The timing for this feature is
programmable.
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the key fob to start the
engine conveniently from outside the
vehicle while still maintaining security.
The system has a range of approximately
328 ft (100 m).
Remote Start is used to defrost windows in cold
weather, and to reach a comfortable climate in all
ambient conditions before the driver enters the
vehicle.
NOTE:
Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may
reduce this range Ú page 308.
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
Push and release the Remote Start button on the
key fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle
doors will lock, the parking lights will flash, and the
horn will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the
engine will start, and the vehicle will remain in the
Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle. Pushing
the Remote Start button a third time shuts the
engine off.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ in the ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup
may cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves.
Always remove key fob from the vehicle and lock
all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and
colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and
can cause serious injury or death when
inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation
of the Remote Start system, windows, door
locks or other controls could cause serious
injury or death.
2
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 19
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
With Remote Start, the engine will only run for
15 minutes.
Remote Start can only be used twice.
The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN posi-
tion before the Remote Start sequence can be
repeated for a third cycle.
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low,
the vehicle will start and then shut down in
10 seconds.
The parking lights will turn on and remain on
during Remote Start mode.
For security, power window and power sunroof
operation (if equipped) are disabled when the
vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN posi-
tion before the Remote Start sequence can be
repeated for a third cycle.
All of the following conditions must be met before
the engine will remote start:
Gear selector in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Liftgate closed
Hazard switch off
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
Battery at an acceptable charge level
System not disabled from previous Remote
Start event
Vehicle Security system indicator flashing
Ignition in OFF position
Fuel level meets minimum requirement
Vehicle Security system is not signaling an intru-
sion
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is not illumi-
nated
TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE
To drive the vehicle after starting the Remote Start
system, push and release the START/STOP ignition
button while pressing the brake pedal prior to the
end of the 15 minute cycle. If the vehicle is not
equipped with a START/STOP ignition button,
insert the key fob into the ignition switch and place
the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
The Remote Start system will turn the engine off if
the Remote Start button on the key fob is pushed
again, or if the engine is allowed to run for the
entire 15 minute cycle. Once the driver’s door is
opened, or the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position, the climate controls will resume
previously set operations (temperature, blower
control, etc.).
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with the Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry feature, the
message “Remote Start Active — Push Start
Button” will show in the instrument cluster
display until you push the START/STOP ignition
button.
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system
will disable for two seconds after receiving a
valid Remote Start request.
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and
colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and
can cause serious injury or death when
inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation
of the Remote Start system, windows, door
locks or other controls could cause serious
injury or death.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 20
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
REMOTE START FRONT DEFROST
A
CTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active, and the outside
ambient temperature is 40°F (4.5°C) or below, the
system will automatically activate front defrost for
15 minutes or less. The time is dependent on the
ambient temperature. Once the timer expires, the
system will automatically adjust the settings
depending on ambient conditions. See “Remote
Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped” in the next
section for detailed operation.
REMOTE START COMFORT SYSTEMS —
I
F EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is activated, the front and rear
defrost will automatically turn on in cold weather.
The heated steering wheel and driver heated seat
feature will turn on if selected in the comfort menu
screen within Uconnect Settings Ú page 150. In
warm weather, the driver vented seat feature will
automatically turn on when the Remote Start is
activated, if programmed in the comfort menu
screen. The vehicle will adjust the climate control
settings depending on the outside ambient
temperature.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped
The climate controls automatically adjust to the
optimal temperature and mode settings
dependent on the outside ambient temperature.
This will occur until the driver’s door is opened, or
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position,
where the climate controls will resume their
previous settings.
Manual Temperature Control (MTC) — If Equipped
In ambient temperatures at 40°F (4.5°C) or
below, the climate settings will default to
maximum heat, with fresh air entering the
cabin. If the front defrost timer expires, the
vehicle will enter Mix Mode.
In ambient temperatures from 40°F (4.5°C) to
78°F (26°C), the climate settings will be based
on the last settings selected by the driver.
In ambient temperatures at 78°F (26°C) or
above, the climate settings will default to MAX
A/C, Bi-Level Mode, and Recirculation on.
For more information on ATC, MTC, and climate
control settings, see Ú page 51.
NOTE:
These features will stay on through the duration of
Remote Start until the driver’s door is opened, or
until the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
The climate control settings will change if manually
adjusted by the driver while the vehicle is in
Remote Start mode, and exit automatic override.
This includes the OFF button on the climate
controls, which will turn the system off.
REMOTE START WINDSHIELD WIPER
D
E–ICER ACTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active and the outside
ambient temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C),
the Windshield Wiper De-Icer will activate. Exiting
Remote Start will resume its previous operation. If
the Windshield Wiper De-Icer was active, the timer
and operation will continue.
REMOTE START CANCEL MESSAGE
The following messages will display in the
instrument cluster display if the vehicle fails to
remote start, or exits Remote Start prematurely:
Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low
Remote Start Cancelled — Liftgate Open
Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
Remote Start Cancelled — Too Cold
Remote Start Cancelled — Time Expired
The message will stay active until the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position.
2
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 21
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security system monitors the vehicle
doors, hood, liftgate, and the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
Ignition for unauthorized operation. While the
Vehicle Security system is armed, interior switches
for door locks and liftgate release are disabled. If
something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security
system will provide the following audible and
visible signals:
The horn will pulse.
The turn signals will flash.
The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument
cluster will flash.
TO ARM THE SYSTEM
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security
system:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in
the OFF position.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Entry,
make sure the vehicle’s keyless ignition
system is OFF.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock
the vehicle:
Push the lock button on the interior power
door lock switch with the driver and/or
passenger door open.
Push the lock button on the exterior Passive
Entry door handle with a valid key fob avail-
able in the same exterior zone Ú page 24.
Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
TO DISARM THE SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed using
any of the following methods:
Push the unlock button on the key fob.
Grab the Passive Entry door handle to unlock
the door Ú page 24.
Cycle the ignition out of the OFF position to
disarm the system.
NOTE:
The driver's door key cylinder and the liftgate
button on the key fob cannot arm or disarm the
Vehicle Security system.
The Vehicle Security system remains armed
during power liftgate entry. Pushing the liftgate
button will not disarm the Vehicle Security
system. If someone enters the vehicle through
the liftgate and opens any door, the alarm will
sound.
When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the
interior power door lock switches will not unlock
the doors.
The Vehicle Security system is designed to protect
your vehicle. However, you can create conditions
where the system will give you a false alarm. If one
of the previously described arming sequences has
occurred, the Vehicle Security system will arm,
regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not.
If you remain in the vehicle and open a door, the
alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle
Security system.
If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the
battery becomes disconnected, the Vehicle
Security system will remain armed when the
battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will flash,
and the horn will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
Vehicle Security system.
REARMING OF THE SYSTEM
If something triggers the alarm and no action is
taken to disarm it, the Vehicle Security system will
turn the horn off after a 29 second cycle (with five
seconds between cycles and up to eight cycles if
the trigger remains active) and then rearm itself.
SECURITY SYSTEM MANUAL OVERRIDE
The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you lock
the doors using the manual door lock.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 22
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
DOORS
MANUAL DOOR LOCKS
To lock each door, rotate the door lock knob on
each door trim panel until the red area is hidden.
To unlock the front doors, pull the inside door
handle to the first detent or rotate the door lock
button until the red indicator is visible. To unlock
the rear doors, rotate the door lock button until the
red indicator is visible.
If the red indicator is hidden when you shut the
door, the door is locked. Therefore, make sure the
key fob is not inside the vehicle before closing the
door.
NOTE:
The manual door locks will not lock or unlock the
liftgate.
Lock Knob And Door Handle
POWER DOOR LOCKS
The power door lock switches are located on each
front door panel. Push the switch to lock or unlock
the doors.
NOTE:
The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ system if it is located next to
a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device;
these devices may block the key fob’s wireless
signal and prevent the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
system from starting the vehicle.
Power Door Lock Switches
The driver’s door will unlock automatically if the
keys are detected inside the vehicle when door
lock button on the front door panel is used to lock
the door. This will occur for two attempts. Upon the
third attempt, the doors will lock even if the key fob
is inside.
WARNING!
For personal security and safety in the event
of a collision, lock the vehicle doors before you
drive as well as when you park and exit the
vehicle.
When exiting the vehicle, always remove the
key fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
If equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition,
always make sure the keyless ignition is
placed in the OFF position, and remove the
key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause severe personal injuries or death.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the ACC
or ON/RUN position. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
2
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 23
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
If the door lock switch is pushed while the ignition
is in the ACC or ON/RUN position and the driver's
door is open, the doors will not lock.
If a rear door is locked, it cannot be opened from
inside the vehicle without first unlocking the door.
The door may be unlocked manually by rotating the
lock knob.
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ —
P
ASSIVE ENTRY
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to
the vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry system and a
feature of Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry.
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the
vehicle’s door(s) and fuel door without having to
push the key fob lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
Passive Entry may be programmed on/off within
the Uconnect system Ú page 150.
If wearing gloves, or if it has been raining/
snowing on the Passive Entry door handle, the
unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a
slower response time.
If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and
no door is opened within 60 seconds, the
vehicle will relock and if equipped will arm the
Vehicle Security system.
The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle
Passive Entry system if it is located next to a
mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device;
these devices may block the key fob's wireless
signal and prevent the Passive Entry handle
from locking/unlocking the vehicle.
Passive Entry activates illuminated approach for
the time set by the customer within the
Uconnect system (0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds),
and flashes the turn signal lights.
To Unlock From The Driver Or Passenger Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the door handle, grab the handle to
unlock the vehicle. Grabbing the driver’s door
handle will unlock the driver door automatically.
Grabbing the passenger door handle will unlock all
doors and the liftgate automatically.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE:
Either the driver door only or all doors will unlock
when you grab hold of the front driver’s door
handle, depending on the selected setting in the
Uconnect system Ú page 150.
All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the
driver’s door unlock preference setting.
Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key
(FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally
locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle,
the Passive Entry system is equipped with an
automatic door unlock feature which will function if
the ignition is OFF.
There are three situations that trigger a
FOBIK-Safe search in any Passive Entry vehicle:
A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry
key fob while a door is open.
A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door
handle while a door is open.
A lock request is made by the door panel switch
while the door is open.
When any of these situations occur, after all open
doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be
executed. If it detects a Passive Entry key fob
inside the car, the car will unlock and alert the
customer.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 24
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
NOTE:
The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a valid
Passive Entry key fob is detected inside the
vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock the doors when
any of the following conditions are true:
The doors are manually locked using the door
lock knobs.
If a paired key fob is found outside of the
vehicle, FOBIK-Safe will not activate.
Three attempts are made to lock the doors
using the door panel switch and then the doors
are closed.
If the liftgate is opened and then all four doors
are locked, the key fob will become locked in the
vehicle if the liftgate is closed and will not alert
the owner.
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, grab the liftgate release
handle to open the liftgate.
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the Passive Entry
button located to the left of the liftgate release
handle.
NOTE:
The liftgate Passive Entry lock button will lock all
doors and the liftgate.
Liftgate Passive Entry / Release Handle Location
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either front door handle, push
the Passive Entry lock button located on the
outside door handle.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
NOTE:
DO NOT grab the door handle when pushing the
door handle lock button. This could unlock the
door(s).
DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
1 — Passive Entry Button
2 — Liftgate Release Handle
2
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 25
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
After pushing the door handle button, you must
wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock
the doors, using either Passive Entry door
handle. This is done to allow you to check if the
vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle
without the vehicle unlocking.
If Passive Entry is disabled using the Uconnect
Settings, the key protection described in
"Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key
(FOBIK-Safe)" remains active/functional.
The Passive Entry system will not operate if the
key fob battery is depleted Ú page 308.
AUTOMATIC UNLOCK DOORS ON EXIT
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles
with power door locks if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is
enabled within Uconnect Settings
Ú
page 150.
2. All doors are closed.
3. The gear selector was not in PARK, then is
placed in PARK.
4. Any door is opened.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS —
I
F EQUIPPED
The auto door lock feature default condition is
enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock
automatically when the vehicle's speed exceeds
15 mph (24 km/h). The auto door lock feature is
enabled/disabled in the Uconnect Settings.
CHILD-PROTECTION DOOR LOCK
S
YSTEM — REAR DOORS
To provide a safer environment for small children
riding in the rear seats, the rear doors are
equipped with a Child-Protection Door Lock
system.
To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat
blade screwdriver (or emergency key) and rotate
the dial to the lock or unlock position. When the
system on a door is engaged, that door can only be
opened by using the outside door handle even if
the inside door lock is in the unlocked position.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
NOTE:
When the Child-Protection Door Lock system is
engaged, the door can be opened only by using
the outside door handle even though the inside
door lock is in the unlocked position.
After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock
system, always test the door from the inside to
make certain it is in the locked position.
For emergency exit with the system engaged,
rotate the door lock button until the lock indi-
cator is hidden (unlocked position), roll down
the window, and open the door with the outside
door handle.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 26
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
NOTE:
Always use this device when carrying children.
After engaging the child lock on both rear doors,
check for effective engagement by trying to open a
door with the internal handle. Once the
Child-Protection Door Lock system is engaged, it is
impossible to open the doors from inside the
vehicle. Before getting out of the vehicle, be sure to
check that there is no one left inside.
STEERING WHEEL
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen
or shorten the steering column. The tilt/
telescoping lever is located below the steering
wheel at the end of the steering column.
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
To unlock the steering column, push the control
handle downward (toward the floor). To tilt the
steering column, move the steering wheel upward
or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten
the steering column, pull the steering wheel
outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the
steering column in position, push the control
handle upward until fully engaged.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL —
I
F EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating
element that helps warm your hands in
cold weather. The heated steering wheel
has only one temperature setting. Once
the heated steering wheel has been turned on, a
sensor will monitor the temperature of the steering
wheel and adjust the power level to maintain an
optimum heat level.
The heated steering wheel control button is
located within the Uconnect system. You can gain
access to the control button through the climate
screen or the controls screen.
Press the heated steering wheel button once to
turn the heating element on.
Press the heated steering wheel button a
second time to turn the heating element off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start
system, see Ú page 21.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be
opened from the outside when the Child-Protec-
tion Door Lock system is engaged (locked).
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or
driving with the steering column unlocked, could
cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
2
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 27
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION
INTRODUCING VOICE RECOGNITION
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these
helpful quick tips. This section provides Voice
Commands and tips you need to know to control
your vehicle’s Voice Recognition (VR) system.
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at
any point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button . After the beep, say:
“
Cancel” to stop a current voice session.
“
Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice
Commands.
“
Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again.
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your Voice
Recognition system’s status.
GET STARTED
The VR button is used to activate/deactivate
your Voice Recognition system.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
Reduce background noise. Wind noise and
passenger conversations are examples of noise
that may impact recognition.
Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume
while facing straight ahead.
Each time you give a Voice Command, first push
the VR button, wait until after the beep, then say
your Voice Command.
You can interrupt the help message or system
prompts by pushing the VR button and saying a
Voice Command from the current category.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic illness,
diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication,
alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical
conditions must exercise care when using the
heated steering wheel. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods.
Do not place anything on the steering wheel
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket
or steering wheel covers of any type and mate-
rial. This may cause the heated steering wheel
to overheat.
1 — Push To Start Or Answer A Phone Call And
Send Or Receive A Text
2 — Push The Voice Recognition Button To Begin
Radio, Media, And Climate Functions
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 28
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
© 2021 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar
Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC.
Android™ is a trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM®
and all related marks and logos are trademarks of
SiriusXM® Radio Inc. Ú page 308.
For Uconnect system support, call
1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a week)
or visit DriveUconnect.com (US) or
DriveUconnect.ca (Canada).
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to save up to two
different memory profiles for easy recall through a
memory switch. Each memory profile saves
desired position settings for the following features:
Driver seat
Easy Entry/Exit seat (if equipped)
Side mirrors
A set of desired radio station presets
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs, each
can be linked to either memory position 1 or 2.
Be sure to program the radio presets prior to
programming the memory settings.
The memory settings switch is located on the
driver’s door trim panel. The switch consists of
three buttons:
The set (S) button, which is used to activate the
memory save function.
The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to recall
either of two saved memory profiles.
Driver Memory Switch
PROGRAMMING THE MEMORY FEATURE
To create a new memory profile, perform the
following:
NOTE:
Saving a new memory profile will erase the
selected profile from memory.
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the ON/RUN
position.
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired
preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror and radio
station presets).
3. Push the set (S) button on the memory switch,
and then push the desired memory button (1
or 2) within five seconds. The instrument
cluster display will display which memory
position is being set.
NOTE:
Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in
PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a
memory profile.
LINKING AND UNLINKING THE KEY FOB
T
O MEMORY
Your remote keyless entry key fob can be
programmed to recall one of two saved memory
profiles.
NOTE:
Before programming your key fob you must select
the “Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob” feature
through the Uconnect system Ú page 150.
To program your key fob, perform the following:
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF
position.
2. Select the desired memory profile 1 or 2.
2
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 29
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
3. Push and release the set (S) button on the
memory switch, then within five seconds push
and release the button (1) or (2) accordingly.
“Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display in the
instrument cluster display.
4. Push and release the lock button on the key
fob within 10 seconds.
NOTE:
Your key fob can be unlinked from your memory
settings by pushing the set (S) button, followed by
pushing the unlock button on the key fob within 10
seconds.
MEMORY POSITION RECALL
NOTE:
If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in
PARK, a message will display in the instrument
cluster display.
To recall the memory settings for driver one or two,
push the desired memory button number (1 or 2)
or the unlock button on the key fob linked to the
desired memory position.
A recall can be canceled by pushing any of the
memory buttons (S, 1, or 2) during a recall. When
a recall is canceled, the driver seat will stop
moving. A delay of one second will occur before
another recall can be selected.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint system
of the vehicle.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT (FRONT
S
EATS) — IF EQUIPPED
Some models may be equipped with front driver
and passenger side manual seats. The forward/
rearward adjustment bar is located at the front of
the seat, near the floor. Height and recline levers
are located on the outboard side of the seat.
Manual Seat Adjustments
NOTE:
Do not place objects beneath the adjustable seat
or impede proper seat adjustment.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside
or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
1 — Forward/Rearward Adjustment Bar
2 — Height Adjustment Lever
3 — Recline Lever
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat
could cause you to lose control. The seat belt
might not be adjusted properly and you could
be injured. Adjust the seat only while the
vehicle is parked.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 30
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
(Continued)
Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward
Adjustment
On models equipped with manual seats, the
adjustment bar is located at the front of the seats,
near the floor.
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move
the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once
you have reached the desired position. Then, using
body pressure, move forward and rearward on the
seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have
latched.
Manual Seat Height Adjustment
The driver’s and passenger’s seat height can be
raised or lowered by using a lever, located on the
outboard side of the seat. Pull upward on the lever
to raise the seat height or push downward on the
lever to lower the seat height.
Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired
position and release the lever. To return the
seatback, lift the lever, lean forward and release
the lever.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT (REAR SEATS)
Rear Seat Forward/Rearward
Adjustment — If Equipped
Lift up on the adjusting bar located at the front of
the seat near the floor and release it when the seat
is at the desired position. Then, using body
pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat
to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
Rear Seat Adjustment Bar
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally
injured. Use the recliner only when the vehicle
is parked.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could
result in loss of control which could cause a
collision and serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked.
Serious injury or death could result from a
poorly adjusted seat belt.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious injury
or death.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top
of the seatback. This could impair visibility or
become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop
or collision.
2
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 31
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Seat Recline Adjustment
The rear seatback also reclines for additional
passenger comfort. On vehicles equipped with a
sliding rear seat, pull on the pull strap while sitting
in the rear seat to recline the seatback.
Rear Sliding Seat Recliner Pull Straps
On vehicles equipped with a fixed rear seat, pull on
the handle located on the upper outboard side of
the seatback.
Rear Fixed Seat Recline Lever
60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat With
Fold-Flat Feature
To provide additional storage area, each rear seat
can be folded flat. This allows for extended cargo
space and still maintains some rear seating room.
NOTE:
Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be necessary
to position the front seat to its mid-track position.
Also, be sure that the front seats are fully upright
and positioned forward. This will allow the rear seat
to fold down easily.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious injury
or death.
WARNING!
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a colli-
sion, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 32
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
TO LOWER THE REAR SEAT
1. Lift the seatback release lever located on the
upper outer edge of the seat. If your vehicle is
equipped with a sliding rear seat, you can also
pull the pull strap located on the middle outer
edge of the seat.
Rear Sliding Seat Release Lever And Pull Strap
Rear Fixed Seat Release Lever
2. Fold the rear seatback completely forward.
NOTE:
You may experience deformation in the seat
cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are
left folded for an extended period of time. This is
normal and by simply placing the seats to the open
position, over time the seat cushion will return to
its normal shape.
TO RAISE THE REAR SEAT
NOTE:
If interference from the cargo area prevents the
seatback from fully locking, you will have difficulty
returning the seat to its proper position.
Raise the seatback and lock it into place.
POWER ADJUSTMENT (FRONT SEATS) —
I
F EQUIPPED
Some models may be equipped with a power
driver's seat and/or power passenger seat. The
power seat switches are located on the outboard
side of the seat near the floor, and control the
movement of the seat cushion and seatback.
Power Seat Switches
NOTE:
Do not place objects beneath the adjustable seat
or impede proper seat adjustment.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked
into position. If the seatback is not securely
locked into position the seat will not provide the
proper stability for child seats and/or
passengers. An improperly latched seat could
cause serious injury.
1 — Seat Switch
2 — Seatback Switch
2
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 33
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and
rearward by pushing the seat switch in the desired
direction. Release the switch when the desired
position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the seat
switch, the seat will move in the direction of the
switch. Release the switch when the desired
position is reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in
two directions. Pull upward or push downward on
the front of the seat switch, the front of the seat
cushion will move in the direction of the switch.
Release the switch when the desired position has
been reached.
Reclining The Seatback Forward Or
Rearward
The seatback can be reclined both forward and
rearward by using the seatback recline switch. The
seatback will move in the direction of the switch.
Release the switch when the desired position has
been reached.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger
seats may be equipped with power lumbar. The
power lumbar switch is located on the outboard
side of the power seat. Push the switch forward or
rearward to increase or decrease the lumbar
support.
Power Lumbar Switch
Easy Entry/Exit Seat — If Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat
positioning to enhance driver mobility when
entering and exiting the vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on
where you have the driver seat positioned when
you place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF position.
When you place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF
position, the driver seat will move about
2.4 inches (60 mm) rearward if the driver seat
position is greater than or equal to 2.7 inches
(67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat will
return to its previously set position when you
place the vehicle’s ignition in the ACC or RUN
position.
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not available
when the driver seat position is less than
0.9 inches (22.7 mm) forward of the rear stop.
At this position, there is no benefit to the driver
by moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry.
When enabled in Uconnect Settings, Easy Entry
and Easy Exit positions are stored in each memory
setting profile Ú page 29.
NOTE:
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is enabled or disabled
through the programmable features in the
Uconnect system Ú page 150.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious injury
or death.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 34
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
HEATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
Front Heated Seats — If Equipped
The front heated seats control buttons
are located within the Uconnect system.
You can gain access to the control
buttons through the climate screen and
the controls screen.
You can choose from HI, LO, or OFF heat settings.
The indicator arrows in the touchscreen buttons
indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator
arrows will illuminate for HI, and one for LO.
Turning the heating elements off will return the
user to the radio screen.
Press the heated seat button once to turn the HI
setting on.
Press the heated seat button a second time to
turn the LO setting on.
Press the heated seat button a third time to turn
the heating elements off.
NOTE:
Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
The engine must be running for the heated
seats to operate.
The level of heat selected will stay on until the
operator changes it.
For information on use with the Remote Start
system, see Ú page 21.
Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the two outboard rear
seats are equipped with heated seats. The
heated seat switches for these seats are
located on the rear of the center console.
There are two heated seat switches that allow the
rear passengers to operate the seats
independently. Indicator lights in each switch
indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator
lights will illuminate for HI, one for LO and none for
off.
Push the heated seat button once to turn the HI
setting on.
Push the heated seat button a second time to
turn the LO setting on.
Push the heated seat button a third time to turn
the heating elements off.
NOTE:
The level of heat selected will stay on until the
operator changes it.
VENTILATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
Located in the seat cushion and seatback are fans
that draw the air from the passenger compartment
and move air through fine perforations in the seat
cover to help keep the occupant cooler in higher
ambient temperatures.
Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
The front ventilated seat controls are
located within the climate and control
screen in the Uconnect system. The fans
operate at two speeds, HI and LO.
Press the ventilated seat button once to choose
HI.
Press the ventilated seat button a second time
to choose LO.
Press the ventilated seat button a third time to
turn the ventilated seat off.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic illness,
diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication,
alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical
condition must exercise care when using the
seat heater. It may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or seatback
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket
or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to
overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been over-
heated could cause serious burns due to the
increased surface temperature of the seat.
2
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 35
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start
system, see Ú page 21.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of
injury by restricting head movement in the event of
a rear impact. Head restraints should be adjusted
so that the top of the head restraint is located
above the top of your ear.
NOTE:
Do not reverse the head restraints (making the rear
of the head restraint face forward) in an attempt to
gain additional clearance to the back of your head.
Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped
with Reactive Head Restraints (RHR). In the event
of a rear impact, the RHRs will automatically
extend forward minimizing the gap between the
back of the occupant’s head and the RHR.
The RHRs will automatically return to their normal
position following a rear impact. If the RHRs do not
return to their normal position, see an authorized
dealer immediately.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push
the adjustment button, located at the base of the
head restraint, and push downward on the head
restraint.
NOTE:
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it
can go. Then, push the release button and the
adjustment button at the base of each post while
pulling the head restraint up. Seatback angle may
need to be adjusted to fully remove the head
restraint. To reinstall the head restraint, put the
head restraint posts into the holes and push
downward. Then adjust the head restraint to the
appropriate height.
Front Head Restraint
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until
the head restraints are placed in their proper
positions in order to minimize the risk of neck
injury in the event of a crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle
with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or
death in the event of a collision.
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head restraints
in a location outside the occupant compart-
ment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in
the vehicle to properly protect the occupants.
Follow the reinstallation instructions above
prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a
seat.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 36
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
Rear Head Restraints
The rear outboard head restraints have two
positions: up and down. The center head restraint
has three positions: up, mid, and down. When the
center seat is being occupied the head restraint
should be adjusted to the occupant. When there is
no occupant in the center seat, the head restraint
can be lowered for maximum visibility for the
driver.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push
the adjustment button, located at the base of the
head restraint, and push downward on the head
restraint.
NOTE:
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it
can go. Then, push the release button and the
adjustment button at the base of each post
while pulling the head restraint up. To reinstall
the head restraint, put the head restraint posts
into the holes and push downward. Then, adjust
the head restraint to the appropriate height.
The seatback may need to be reclined in order
to fully remove the outboard head restraints.
Outboard Head Restraint
Center Head Restraint
Do not place items over the top of the Reac-
tive Head Restraint, such as coats, seat
covers or portable DVD players. These items
may interfere with the operation of the Reac-
tive Head Restraint in the event of a collision
and could result in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
1 — Adjustment Button
2 — Release Button
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in
the vehicle to properly protect the occupants.
Follow the reinstallation instructions above prior
to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
2
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 37
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
Manual Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left,
and right. The mirror should be adjusted to center
on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be
reduced by moving the small control under the
mirror to the night position (toward the rear of the
vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while set in
the day position (toward the windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
NOTE:
The vehicle is equipped with either a single ball
joint mirror or a two ball adjustable prism mirror.
The single ball joint is a twist-on mirror that has
a fixed position at the windshield. The mirror
installs on the windshield button with a counter-
clockwise rotation and requires no tools for
mounting.
The two ball joint is mounted to a tombstone
button on the windshield with a set screw. Tools
are required for mounting and dismounting.
Auto Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle.
It is a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the
windshield. The mirror installs on the windshield
button with a counterclockwise rotation and
requires no tools for mounting. The rearview mirror
can be adjusted up, down, left, and right. The
mirror should be adjusted to center on the view
through the rear window.
Automatic Dimming Button
NOTE:
The automatic dimming feature is disabled when
the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve rear view
viewing.
The automatic dimming feature can be turned on
or off through the touchscreen, or using the power
button on the base of the mirror.
Press the mirror dimmer button once to turn the
feature on.
Press the mirror dimmer button a second time
to turn the feature off.
NOTE:
In some cases, there may not be a button. If there
is no power button, the mirror will be in default
auto dimming mode.
ILLUMINATED VANITY MIRRORS
An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor. To
use the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing
the mirror cover upward. The lights will turn on
automatically. Closing the mirror cover will turn off
the light.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning,
never spray any cleaning solution directly onto
the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth
and wipe the mirror clean.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 38
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature
The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for
additional flexibility in positioning the sun visor to
block out the sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the corner clip.
3. Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview
mirror to extend it.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside
mirror(s) to center on the adjacent lane of traffic
with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the
inside mirror.
NOTE:
The passenger side convex outside mirror will give
a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the
lane next to your vehicle.
POWER MIRRORS
The power mirror control switch is located on the
driver's side door trim panel.
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select
buttons and a four-way mirror control switch. To
adjust a mirror, push the mirror select button for
the mirror that you want to adjust. Using the mirror
control switch, push on any of the four arrows for
the direction that you want the mirror to move.
Power Mirror Switches
Power mirror position can be saved as part of the
Driver Memory Settings (if equipped) Ú page 29.
HEATED MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or
ice. This feature will be activated
whenever you turn on the rear window
defroster (if equipped) Ú page 51.
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® Buttons On Sun Visor
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
HomeLink® replaces up to
three hand-held transmitters
that operate devices such as
garage door openers, motor-
ized gates, lighting, or home
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on side
convex mirrors could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside
mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in a side convex mirror.
1 — Left Mirror Selection
2 — Right Mirror Selection
3 — Mirror Direction Control
2
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 39
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
security systems. The HomeLink® unit is
powered by your vehicle’s 12 Volt battery.
The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the
overhead console or sunvisor designate the
three different HomeLink® channels.
To operate HomeLink®, push and release any
of the programmed HomeLink® buttons. These
buttons will activate the devices they are
programmed to with each press of the corre-
sponding HomeLink® button.
The HomeLink® indicator light is located above
the center button.
NOTE:
HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security
system is active Ú page 308.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN PROGRAMMING
H
OMELINK®
For efficient programming and accurate
transmission of the Radio Frequency (RF) signal, it
is recommended that a new battery be placed in
the hand-held transmitter of the device that is
being programmed to the HomeLink® system.
Make sure your hand-held transmitter is
programmed to activate the device you are trying
to program your HomeLink® button to.
Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the
garage before you begin programming.
It is recommended that you erase all the channels
of your HomeLink® before you use it for the first
time.
ERASING ALL THE HOMELINK®
C
HANNELS
To erase the channels, follow this procedure:
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN
position.
2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink®
buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or until
the HomeLink® indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be performed
when programming HomeLink® for the first time.
Do not erase channels when programming addi-
tional buttons.
IDENTIFYING WHETHER YOU HAVE A
R
OLLING CODE OR NON-ROLLING CODE
D
EVICE
Before programming a device to one of your
HomeLink® buttons, you must determine whether
the device has a rolling code or non-rolling code.
Rolling Code Devices
To determine if your device has a rolling code, a
good indicator is its manufacturing date. Typically,
devices manufactured after 1995 have rolling
codes. A device with a rolling code will also have a
“LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where the
antenna is attached to the device. The button may
not be immediately visible when looking at the
device. The name and color of the button may vary
slightly by manufacturer.
NOTE:
The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the button
you normally use to operate the device.
Non-rolling Code Devices
Most devices manufactured before 1995 will not
have a rolling code. These devices will also not
have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
G
ARAGE DOOR OPENER
To program any of the HomeLink® buttons to
activate your garage door opener motor, follow the
steps below:
NOTE:
All HomeLink® buttons are programmed using this
procedure. You do not need to erase all channels
when programming additional buttons.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 40
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
(Continued)
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN
position.
2. Place the garage door opener transmitter
1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
HomeLink® button you wish to program, while
keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you
want to program while you push and hold the
garage door opener transmitter button you are
trying to replicate.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the
HomeLink® indicator light. The HomeLink®
indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly.
Once this happens, release both buttons.
NOTE:
Make sure the garage door opener motor is
plugged in before moving on to the rolling code/
non-rolling code final steps.
Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate rolling
code final step 2, after completing rolling code
final step 1.
1. At the garage door opener motor (in the
garage), locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN”
button. This can usually be found where the
hanging antenna wire is attached to the
garage door opener motor. Firmly push and
release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
2. Return to the vehicle and push the
programmed HomeLink® button three times
(holding the button for two seconds each
time). If the garage door opener motor
operates, programming is complete.
3. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to
confirm that the garage door opener motor
operates. If the garage door opener motor
does not operate, repeat the final steps for the
rolling code procedure.
Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
1. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink®
button and observe the HomeLink® indicator
light. If the HomeLink® indicator light stays
on constantly, programming is complete.
2. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to
confirm that the garage door opener motor
operates. If the garage door opener motor
does not operate, repeat the steps from the
beginning.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
M
ISCELLANEOUS DEVICE
The procedure on how to program HomeLink® to a
miscellaneous device follows the same procedure
as programming to a garage door opener
Ú page 40. Be sure to determine if the device has
a rolling code, or non-rolling code before beginning
the programming process.
NOTE:
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require trans-
mitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several
seconds of transmission, which may not be long
enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal during
programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some
U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in the
same manner. The procedure may need to be
performed multiple times to successfully pair the
device to your HomeLink® buttons.
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and
close while you are programming the universal
transmitter. Do not program the transmitter if
people or pets are in the path of the door or
gate.
Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage or
confined area while programming the trans-
mitter. Exhaust gas from your vehicle contains
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and
colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous
when inhaled and can cause you and others to
be severely injured or killed.
WARNING!
2
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 41
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
H
OMELINK® BUTTON
To reprogram a single HomeLink® button that has
been previously trained, without erasing all the
channels, follow the procedure below. Be sure to
determine whether the new device you want to
program the HomeLink® button to has a rolling
code, or non-rolling code.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position,
without starting the engine.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button
until the HomeLink® indicator light begins to
flash after 20 seconds.
Do not release the
button.
3.
Without releasing the button, proceed with
Step 2 in “Programming HomeLink® To A
Garage Door Opener” and follow all remaining
steps.
CANADIAN/GATE OPERATOR
P
ROGRAMMING
For programming transmitters in Canada/United
States that require the transmitter signals to
“time-out” after several seconds of transmission:
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require
transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after
several seconds of transmission, which may not be
long enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal
during programming. Similar to this Canadian law,
some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out
in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the
cycling process to prevent possible overheating of
the garage door or gate motor.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™,
place the ignition in the RUN position with the
engine on. Make sure while programming
HomeLink® with the engine on that your vehicle is
outside of your garage, or that the garage door
remains open at all times.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches
(3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button
you wish to program while keeping the
HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink®
button while you push and release (cycle) your
hand-held transmitter every two seconds until
HomeLink® has successfully accepted the
frequency signal. The indicator light will flash
slowly and then rapidly when fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change
flash rates. When it changes, it is
programmed. It may take up to 30 seconds or
longer in rare cases. The garage door may
open and close while you are programming.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink®
button and observe the indicator light.
NOTE:
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and the garage
door/device should activate when the
HomeLink® button is pushed.
To program the two remaining HomeLink®
buttons, repeat each step for each
remaining button. DO NOT erase the chan-
nels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device
for programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button
until the indicator light begins to flash after
20 seconds. Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” Step
2 and follow all remaining steps.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 42
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
SECURITY
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or
turn in your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons
for 20 seconds until the indicator flashes. Note
that all channels will be erased. Individual
channels cannot be erased.
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled
when the Vehicle Security system is active.
TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS
If you are having trouble programming
HomeLink®, here are some of the most common
solutions:
Replace the battery in the garage door opener
hand-held transmitter.
Push the LEARN button on the garage door
opener to complete the training for a rolling
code.
Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance,
please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the
Internet at HomeLink.com for information or
assistance.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
MULTIFUNCTION LEVER
The multifunction lever controls the operation of
the turn signals, headlight beam selection and
passing lights. The multifunction lever is located on
the left side of the steering column.
Multifunction Lever
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a
dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the
garage while programming the transceiver.
Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death.
Your motorized door or gate will open and
close while you are programming the universal
transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if
people, pets or other objects are in the path of
the door or gate. Only use this transceiver with
a garage door opener that has a “stop and
reverse” feature as required by Federal safety
standards. This includes most garage door
opener models manufactured after 1982. Do
not use a garage door opener without these
safety features.
2
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 43
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
The headlight switch is located on the left side of
the instrument panel. This switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights,
automatic headlights (if equipped), instrument
panel lights, and fog lights (if equipped).
Headlight Switch
Headlight Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
NOTE:
Vehicles sold in Canada are equipped with a head-
light switch without the OFF position. In order to
turn the exterior lights off, the headlight switch
must be rotated to AUTO position.
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first
detent for parking lights and instrument panel
lights operation. Rotate the headlight switch to the
second detent for headlights, parking lights and
instrument panel lights operation.
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, rotate the headlight
switch clockwise from the parking lights and
instrument panel lights position to the first detent
to turn the headlight switch to the AUTO position.
Rotate to the second detent to turn on headlights,
parking lights, and instrument panel lights oper-
ation.
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRLS) —
I
F EQUIPPED
The Daytime Running Lights will turn on when the
engine is started and remain on unless the
headlamps are turned on, the parking brake is
applied, or the ignition is placed in the OFF
position.
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime
Running Lights will automatically deactivate
when the front fog lights are turned on.
If allowed by law in the country in which the
vehicle was purchased, the Daytime Running
Lights can be turned on and off using the
Uconnect system Ú page 150.
On some vehicles, the Daytime Running Lights
may deactivate, or reduce intensity, on one side
of the vehicle (when a turn signal is activated on
that side), or on both sides of the vehicle (when
the hazard warning lights are activated).
1 — Rotate Headlight Control
2 — Push Fog Light Control
3 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
4 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
1 — Rotate Headlight Control
2 — Push Fog Light Control
3 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
4 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 44
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
HIGH/LOW BEAM SWITCH
After the low beam headlights are turned on, push
the multifunction lever, located on the left side of
the steering wheel, away from you to switch the
headlights to high beam. Pulling the multifunction
lever back will turn the low beams on.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLAMP
C
ONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
system provides increased forward lighting at night
by automatically controlling the high beams
through the use of a camera mounted on the
windshield. This camera detects vehicle specific
light and automatically switches from high beams
to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of
view.
NOTE:
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control is
enabled through the Uconnect system
Ú page 150.
The multifunction lever must be in the high
beam position and the low beams must be
turned on in order to activate the Automatic
High Beams.
Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and
taillights of vehicles in the field of view will
cause headlights to remain on longer (closer to
the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other obstruc-
tions on the windshield or camera lens will
cause the system to function improperly.
When set to AUTO, and the low beams are on
and the multifunction lever is in the high beam
position, the system automatically turns the
high beams on or off based on light levels of the
approaching vehicles.
Vehicle speed must be greater than 22 mph
(35 km/h) to activate Automatic High Beams.
Once activated, Automatic High Beams will
remain on until the speed falls below 15 mph
(25 km/h).
FLASH-TO-PASS
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights
by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you.
This will cause the high beam headlights to turn on,
and remain on, until the lever is released.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
This system automatically turns the headlights on
or off according to ambient light levels. To turn the
system on, rotate the headlight switch to the AUTO
position for automatic headlight operation. When
the system is on, the headlight time delay feature
is also on. This means the headlights will stay on
for up to 90 seconds (depending on customer
programmable time of 30, 60, or 90 seconds) after
you place the ignition in the OFF position. To turn
the automatic system off, move the headlight
switch out of the AUTO position.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the headlights
will come on in the automatic mode.
PARKING LIGHTS
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first
detent for parking lights and instrument panel
lights operation. Rotate the headlight switch to the
second detent for headlights, parking lights and
instrument panel lights operation.
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, the first headlight
switch position is the parking lights and instrument
panel lights position (instead of the OFF position).
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the
second detent to turn on headlights, parking lights,
and instrument panel lights operation.
2
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 45
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS WITH
W
IPERS — IF EQUIPPED
When this feature is programmed on and the
headlight switch is set to AUTO, the headlights will
turn on after the wipers are turned on. This feature
will also turn the headlights off when the wipers
are turned off.
NOTE:
This feature can be turned on or off using the
Uconnect system Ú page 150.
HEADLIGHT TIME DELAY
This feature provides the safety of headlight
illumination for up to 90 seconds (programmable)
when leaving your vehicle in an unlit area.
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in
the OFF position while the headlights are still on.
Then, turn off the headlights within 45 seconds of
placing the ignition in the OFF position. The delay
interval begins when the headlight switch is turned
off.
NOTE:
The headlight delay feature is automatically acti-
vated if the customer leaves the headlight switch
in the AUTO position while the ignition is placed in
the OFF position.
If you turn the headlights or parking lights on, or
place the ignition in ACC or RUN, the system will
cancel the delay.
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition,
they will turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE:
The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds
of placing the ignition in the OFF position to acti-
vate this feature.
The headlight delay time is programmable using
the Uconnect system Ú page 150.
LIGHTS-ON REMINDER
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the
ignition is placed in the OFF position, the vehicle
will chime to alert the driver when the driver's door
is opened.
FOG LIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
The front fog light switch is built into the headlight
switch.
Fog Light Switch
Fog Light Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
lights or the low beam headlights and push the
headlight switch. To turn off the front fog lights,
either push the headlight switch a second time or
turn off the headlight switch.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 46
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
An indicator light in the instrument cluster
illuminates when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE:
The fog lights will operate with the low beam head-
lights or parking lights on. However, selecting the
high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
TURN SIGNALS
Lightly push the multifunction lever up or down to
activate the turn signals. The arrows on each side
of the instrument cluster display will flash to show
proper operation.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defec-
tive LED turn signal. Please see an authorized
dealer for service.
A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the
instrument cluster display and a continuous
chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more
than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
LANE CHANGE ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
Lightly push the multifunction lever up or down,
without moving beyond the detent, and the turn
signal will flash three times then automatically turn
off.
BATTERY SAVER
Timers are set to both the interior and exterior
lights to protect the life of your vehicle’s battery.
After 10 minutes, if the ignition is in the OFF
position and any door is left open or the dimmer
control is rotated all the way up to the dome light
on position, the interior lights will automatically
turn off.
NOTE:
Battery saver mode is canceled if the ignition is
placed in the ON position.
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is
placed in the OFF position, the exterior lights will
automatically turn off after eight minutes. If the
headlights are turned on and left on for eight
minutes while the ignition is OFF, the exterior lights
will automatically turn off.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is
placed in the OFF position. This will occur if the
interior lights were turned on manually or are on
because a door is open. The Battery Protection
also includes the glove compartment light and the
cargo light. To restore interior light operation after
automatic battery protection is enabled (lights off),
either place the ignition in the ON/RUN position or
cycle the light switch.
INTERIOR COURTESY LIGHTS
Front Map/Reading Lights
The front map/reading lights are mounted in the
overhead console. Each light can be turned on by
pushing a switch on either side of the console. To
turn the lights off, push the switch a second time.
These lights also turn on when a door is opened, or
when the unlock button on the key fob is pushed,
or when the dimmer control is turned completely
upward to the second detent.
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
2
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 47
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
The instrument panel dimmer control is part of the
headlight switch and is located on the driver’s side
of the instrument panel.
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating
the instrument panel dimmer control upward to
the first detent will increase the brightness of text
displays such as the odometer, instrument cluster
display, and radio.
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control
completely upward to the second detent to turn on
the interior lights. The interior lights will remain on
when the instrument panel dimmer control is in
this position.
Instrument Panel Dimmer
Instrument Panel Dimmer (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control
downward to the O (off) position, and the interior
lights will remain off when the doors are open.
Ambient Light Control — If Equipped
Rotate the ambient dimmer control upward or
downward to increase or decrease the brightness
of the ambient light located in the overhead
console, door handle lights, and door map pocket
lights.
Ambient Light/Door Handle Light Dimmer
Ambient Light/Door Handle Light Dimmer
(Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 48
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
key fob to unlock the doors or open any door.
The lights will fade to off after approximately
30 seconds, or they will immediately fade to off
once the ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN
position from the OFF position.
The courtesy lights will not turn off if the instrument
panel dimmer control is rotated upward to the
second detent. The courtesy lights will turn off after
10 minutes when the ignition is placed in the OFF
position to protect the battery.
The illuminated entry system will not operate if the
instrument panel dimmer control is rotated all the
way down to the O (off) position.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located
on the windshield wiper/washer lever on the right
side of the steering column. The front wipers are
operated by rotating a switch, located on the end of
the lever.
WINDSHIELD WIPER OPERATION
Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first four
detent positions for intermittent settings, the fifth
detent for low wiper operation and the sixth detent
for high wiper operation.
Windshield Wiper Operation
NOTE:
Do not operate the windshield wipers with the
blades lifted from the windshield.
Intermittent Wipers
Use one of the four intermittent wiper settings
when weather conditions make a single wiping
cycle, with a variable delay between cycles,
desirable. At driving speeds above 10 mph
(16 km/h), the delay can be regulated from a
maximum of approximately 18 seconds between
cycles (first detent), to a cycle every one second
(fourth detent). If the vehicle is moving less than
10 mph (16 km/h), delay times will be doubled.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the lever rearward toward
you and hold. If the lever is pulled while in the
intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on and
operate for several wipe cycles after the lever is
released, and then resume the intermittent
interval previously selected.
If the lever is pulled while the wipers are in the off
position, the wipers will operate for several wipe
cycles, then turn off.
1 — Push Forward For Rear Washer
2 — Rotate For Front Wiper Operation
3 — Pull For Front Washer
4 — Rotate For Rear Wiper Operation
5 — Push Up For Mist
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that
prevents the windshield wiper blades from
returning to the “park” position. If the windshield
wiper switch is turned off, and the blades cannot
return to the “park” position, damage to the
wiper motor may occur.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden
icing of the windshield during freezing weather,
warm the windshield with the defroster before
and during windshield washer use.
2
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 49
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Mist
Push the lever upward to the MIST position and
release for a single wiping cycle.
NOTE:
The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on
the windshield. The wash function must be used in
order to spray the windshield with washer fluid.
For information on wiper care and replacement,
see Ú page 260.
RAIN SENSING WIPERS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature senses rain or snowfall on the
windshield and automatically activates the wipers.
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one of
four detent positions to activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with
the multifunction lever. Wiper delay detent one is
the least sensitive, and wiper delay position four is
the most sensitive.
Setting three is preferred by the average driver
during normal rain conditions.
NOTE:
The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
The Rain Sensing feature may not function prop-
erly when ice or dried salt water is present on
the windshield.
Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or sili-
cone may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and
off using the Uconnect system Ú page 150.
The Rain Sensing system has protection features
for the wiper blades and arms, and will not operate
under the following conditions:
Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition
is first placed in the ON position, the Rain
Sensing system will not operate until the wiper
switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater than
3 mph (5 km/h) or the outside temperature is
greater than 32°F (0°C).
Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the
ignition is ON, and the transmission is in
NEUTRAL, the Rain Sensing system will not
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle
speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h) or the
gear selector is moved out of the NEUTRAL posi-
tion.
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles
equipped with the Remote Start system, Rain
Sensing wipers are not operational when the
vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
REAR WINDOW WIPER/WASHER
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on the
windshield wiper/washer lever on the right side of
the steering column. The rear wiper/washer is
operated by rotating a switch, located at the
middle of the lever.
Rotate the center portion of the lever
upward to the first detent for intermittent
operation and to the second detent for
continuous rear wiper operation.
To use the washer, push the lever
forward and hold while spray is desired. If
the lever is pushed while in the
intermittent setting, the wiper will turn on
and operate for several wipe cycles after the end of
the lever is released, and then resume the
intermittent interval previously selected.
If the lever is pushed while the wiper is in the off
position, the wiper will operate for several wipe
cycles, then turn off.
NOTE:
As a protective measure, the pump will stop if the
switch is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the
lever is released the pump will resume normal
operation.
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is
placed in the OFF position, the wiper will
automatically return to the “park” position.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 50
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
WINDSHIELD WIPER DE-ICER —
I
F EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Windshield
Wiper De-Icer feature that may be activated under
the following conditions:
Activation By Front Defrost — The Windshield
Wiper De-Icer shall be activated automatically in
the case of a cold weather manual start with full
front defrost, and when the ambient tempera-
ture is below 33°F (0.6°C).
Activation By Rear Defrost — The Windshield
Wiper De-Icer shall be activated automatically
when the rear defrost is turned on and when the
ambient temperature is below 33°F (0.6°C).
Activation By Remote Start Operation — When
Remote Start is active and the outside ambient
temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C), the
Windshield Wiper De-Icer will activate. Exiting
Remote Start will resume its previous operation.
If the Windshield Wiper De-Icer was active, the
timer and operation will continue.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control system allows you to regulate
the temperature, air flow, and direction of air
circulating throughout the vehicle. The controls are
located on the touchscreen (if equipped) and on
the instrument panel below the radio.
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
D
ESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display With
Automatic Temperature Controls
MAX A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C button on
the touchscreen to change the current
setting to the coldest output of air. The
MAX A/C indicator illuminates when MAX
A/C is on. Pressing the button again will cause the
MAX A/C operation to exit. In MAX A/C, the blower
level and mode position can be adjusted to the
desired user settings. Pressing other settings will
cancel MAX A/C.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C button is only available on the touch-
screen.
A/C Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on the
faceplate to change the current setting.
The A/C indicator illuminates when A/C is
on. When the A/C system is on, cool, dehumidified
air will flow through the outlets into the cabin.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on the
faceplate, to change the system between
Recirculation mode and outside air
mode. The Recirculation indicator and the A/C
indicator illuminate when the Recirculation button
is pressed. Recirculation can be used when
outside conditions, such as smoke, odors, dust, or
high humidity are present. Recirculation can be
used in all modes. Recirculation may be
unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed
out) if conditions exist that could create fogging on
the inside of the windshield. The A/C can be
deselected manually without disturbing the mode
control selection. Continuous use of the
Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy
and window fogging may occur. Extended use of
this mode is not recommended. Recirculation
mode may automatically adjust to optimize
customer experience for warming, cooling,
dehumidification, etc.
2
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 51
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The
Recirculation feature may be unavailable if
conditions exist that could create fogging on the
inside of the windshield.
Auto Button
Set your desired temperature and press
AUTO. AUTO will achieve and maintain
your desired temperature by
automatically adjusting the blower speed
and air distribution. Air Conditioning (A/C) may be
active during AUTO operation to improve
performance. AUTO mode is highly recommended
for efficiency.
You can turn AUTO on in one of two ways:
Press and release this button on the touch-
screen.
Push the button on the faceplate.
Toggling this function will cause the system to
switch between manual mode and automatic
mode Ú page 56.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release the Front Defrost
button on the touchscreen, or push and
release the button on the faceplate, to
change the current airflow setting to
Defrost mode. The Front Defrost indicator
illuminates when Front Defrost is on. Air comes
from the windshield and side window demist
outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the
blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with
maximum temperature settings for best
windshield and side window defrosting and
defogging. When toggling the front defrost mode
button, the climate system will return to the
previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Press and release the Rear Defrost
button on the touchscreen, or push and
release the button on the faceplate, to
turn on the rear window defroster and the
heated outside mirrors (if equipped). The Rear
Defrost indicator illuminates when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster
automatically turns off after 10 minutes.
Driver And Passenger Temperature Up And
Down Buttons
These buttons provide the driver and
passenger with independent
temperature control.
Push the red button on the faceplate or
touchscreen or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the red arrow
button on the touchscreen for warmer
temperature settings.
Push the blue button on the faceplate or
touchscreen or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the blue arrow
button on the touchscreen for cooler
temperature settings.
NOTE:
The numbers within the temperature display will
only appear if the system is equipped with an auto-
matic climate control system.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners
on the interior surface of the window. Use a
soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping
parallel to the heating elements. Labels can
be peeled off after soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
CAUTION!
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 52
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the
touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature
on/off. The SYNC indicator illuminates
when SYNC is on. SYNC synchronizes the
passenger temperature setting with the driver
temperature setting. Changing the passenger’s
temperature setting while in SYNC will
automatically exit this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC button is only available on the touch-
screen.
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount of
air forced through the climate control
system. There are seven blower speeds
available. Adjusting the blower will cause
automatic mode to switch to manual operation.
The speeds can be selected using either the
blower control knob on the faceplate or the
buttons on the touchscreen.
Faceplate
The blower speed increases as you turn the blower
control knob clockwise from the lowest blower
setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn
the blower control knob counterclockwise.
Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower
setting and the large blower icon to increase the
blower setting. Blower can also be selected by
pressing the blower bar area between the icons.
Mode Control
Select Mode by pressing one of the Mode
buttons on the touchscreen to change
the airflow distribution mode. The airflow
distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor
outlets, defrost outlets, and demist outlets.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the
instrument panel. Each of these outlets
can be individually adjusted to direct the
flow of air. The air vanes of the center
outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and
down or side to side to regulate airflow direction.
There is a shut off wheel located below the air
vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow
from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel
outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount
of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi-
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets
and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the
defrost and side window demister
outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost,
and side window demister outlets. This
setting works best in cold or snowy
conditions that require extra heat to the
windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort while reducing moisture on the
windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release the OFF button on the
touchscreen, or push the OFF button on
the faceplate to turn the Climate Control
ON/OFF.
2
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 53
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL
D
ESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display With Manual
Temperature Controls
MAX A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C button on
the touchscreen to change the current
setting to the coldest output of air. The
MAX A/C indicator illuminates when MAX
A/C is on. Pressing the button again will cause the
MAX A/C operation to exit.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C button is only available on the touch-
screen.
A/C Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on the
faceplate to change the current setting. The A/C
indicator illuminates when A/C is on.
NOTE:
For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in
Mix, Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be
turned off, but the A/C system shall remain
active to prevent fogging of the windows.
If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side
glass, select Defrost mode, and increase blower
speed if needed.
If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C
condenser (located in front of the radiator), for
an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a
gentle water spray from the front of the radiator
and through the condenser.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on the
faceplate, to change the system between
Recirculation mode and outside air
mode. The Recirculation indicator and the A/C
indicator illuminate when the Recirculation button
is pressed. Recirculation can be used when
outside conditions, such as smoke, odors, dust, or
high humidity are present. Recirculation can be
used in all modes except Defrost. Recirculation
may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen
greyed out) if conditions exist that could create
fogging on the inside of the windshield. The A/C
can be deselected manually without disturbing the
mode control selection. Continuous use of the
Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy
and window fogging may occur. Extended use of
this mode is not recommended.
On systems with Manual Climate Controls, if
equipped, the Recirculation mode is not allowed in
Defrost mode to improve window clearing
operation. Recirculation is disabled automatically
if this mode is selected. Attempting to use
Recirculation while in this mode causes the LED in
the control button to blink and then turns off.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release the Front Defrost
button on the touchscreen, or push and
release the button on the faceplate, to
change the current airflow setting to
Defrost mode. The Front Defrost indicator
illuminates when Front Defrost is on. Air comes
from the windshield and side window demist
outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the
blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with
maximum temperature settings for best
windshield and side window defrosting and
defogging. When toggling the front defrost mode
button, the climate system will return to the
previous setting.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 54
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
Rear Defrost Button
Press and release the Rear Defrost
button on the touchscreen, or push and
release the button on the faceplate, to
turn on the rear window defroster and the
heated outside mirrors (if equipped). The Rear
Defrost indicator illuminates when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster
automatically turns off after 10 minutes.
Driver And Passenger Temperature
Control Buttons
These buttons provide the driver and
passenger with independent
temperature control.
Push the red button on the faceplate or
touchscreen or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the red arrow
button on the touchscreen for warmer
temperature settings.
Push the blue button on the faceplate or
touchscreen or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the blue arrow
button on the touchscreen for cooler
temperature settings.
NOTE:
The numbers within the temperature display will
only appear if the system is equipped with an auto-
matic climate control system.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the
touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature
on/off. The SYNC indicator illuminates
when SYNC is on. SYNC synchronizes the
passenger temperature setting with the driver
temperature setting. Changing the passenger’s
temperature setting while in SYNC will
automatically exit this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC button is only available on the touch-
screen.
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount of
air forced through the climate control
system. There are seven blower speeds
available. Adjusting the blower will cause
automatic mode to switch to manual operation.
The speeds can be selected using either the
blower control knob on the faceplate or the
buttons on the touchscreen.
Faceplate
The blower speed increases as you turn the blower
control knob clockwise from the lowest blower
setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn
the blower control knob counterclockwise.
Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower
setting and the large blower icon to increase the
blower setting. Blower can also be selected by
pressing the blower bar area between the icons.
Mode Control
Select Mode by pressing one of the Mode
buttons on the touchscreen to change
the airflow distribution mode. The airflow
distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor
outlets, defrost outlets, and demist outlets.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners
on the interior surface of the window. Use a
soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping
parallel to the heating elements. Labels can
be peeled off after soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
2
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 55
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the
instrument panel. Each of these outlets
can be individually adjusted to direct the
flow of air. The air vanes of the center
outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and
down or side to side to regulate airflow direction.
There is a shut-off wheel located below the air
vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow
from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel
outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount
of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi-
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets
and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the
defrost and side window demister
outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost,
and side window demister outlets. This
setting works best in cold or snowy
conditions that require extra heat to the
windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort while reducing moisture on the
windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release the OFF button on the
touchscreen, or push the OFF button on
the faceplate to turn the Climate Control
ON/OFF.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
(ATC) — I
F EQUIPPED
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the
AUTO button on the touchscreen on the
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature that you would
like the system to maintain by adjusting the
driver and passenger temperature control
buttons. Once the desired temperature is
displayed, the system will achieve and
automatically maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the
settings. You will experience the greatest
efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to move the temperature
settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system
automatically adjusts the temperature, mode,
and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly
as possible.
The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or
Metric units by selecting the US/Metric
customer-programmable feature within the
Uconnect system Ú page 150.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the
Automatic mode during cold start-ups, the blower
fan will remain on low until the engine warms up.
The blower will increase in speed and transition
into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual
override features. The AUTO symbol in the front
ATC display will be turned off when the system is
being used in the manual mode.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 56
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
CLIMATE VOICE COMMANDS
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep
everyone comfortable while you keep moving
ahead.
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After the
beep, say one of the following commands:
“
Set the driver temperature to 70 degrees”
“Set the passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
Did You Know: Voice Command for Climate may
only be used to adjust the interior temperature of
your vehicle. Voice Command will not work to
adjust the heated seats or steering wheel if
equipped.
OPERATING TIPS
NOTE:
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather
conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with
a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper
corrosion protection and to protect against engine
overheating. OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) is recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster
performance, make sure the engine cooling
system is functioning properly and the proper
amount, type, and concentration of coolant is
used. Use of the Air Recirculation mode during
Winter months is not recommended, because it
may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
For information on maintaining the Climate Control
system when the vehicle is being stored for an
extended period of time, see Ú page 296.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild,
rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear the
windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase
the front blower speed. Do not use the
Recirculation mode without A/C for long periods,
as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of
the windshield, is free of obstructions, such as
leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake may
reduce airflow, and if they enter the air distribution
box, they could plug the water drains. In Winter
months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The Climate Control system filters out dust and
pollen from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to
service your cabin air filter, and to have it replaced
when needed.
Stop/Start System — If Equipped
While in an Autostop, the Climate Control system
may automatically adjust airflow to maintain cabin
comfort. Customer settings will be maintained
upon return to an engine running condition.
Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped
The windshield wiper de-icer is a heating element
located at the base of the windshield.
It operates automatically once the following
conditions are met:
Activation By Front Defrost
The wiper de-icer activates automatically during
a cold weather manual start with
full defrost,
and when the
ambient temperature is below
33°F (0.6°C).
Activation By Rear Defrost
The wiper de-icer activates automatically when
the Rear Defrost is operating and the
ambient
temperature is below 33°F (0.6°C).
2
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 57
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Activation By Remote Start Operation
When the Remote Start is activated and the
outside ambient temperature is less than 33°F
(0.6°C) the windshield wiper de-icer will acti-
vate. Exiting Remote Start will resume its
previous operation. If the windshield wiper
de-icer was active, the timer and operation will
continue.
Operating Tips Chart
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the
passenger side of the instrument panel.
To open the glove compartment, pull the release
handle.
Glove Compartment
There is also an additional storage bin located
above the instrument panel in the center of the
dash.
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
Hot Weather And
Vehicle Interior Is Very
Hot
Set the mode control to
(Panel Mode),
(MAX A/C) on, and
blower on high. Roll
down the windows for a
minute to flush out the
hot air. Adjust the
controls as needed to
achieve comfort.
Warm Weather
Turn (A/C)
on, and set the mode
control to (Panel
Mode).
Cool Sunny
Operate in (Bi-Level
Mode).
Cool & Humid
Conditions
Set the mode control to
(Floor Mode) and
turn on (A/C) on to
keep windows clear.
Cold Weather
Set the mode control to
(Floor Mode). If
windshield fogging
starts to occur, move
the control to (Mix
Mode).
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a glove
compartment in the open position. Driving with
the glove compartment open may result in injury
in a collision.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 58
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
Console Storage Compartment
The center console has both an upper and lower
storage area which can hold cell phones, PDAs,
and other small items.
Front Center Console
To access the upper storage compartment, lift the
top latch. To access the lower storage
compartment, lift the bottom latch.
Instrument Panel Cubby
Your vehicle may be equipped with an instrument
panel cubby. The cubby is located on the top of the
instrument panel, above the radio.
To open the instrument panel cubby, pull the latch
toward you and the cubby door will pop open.
Instrument Panel Cubby Latch
Instrument Panel Cubby Opened
To close the instrument panel cubby, push down
on the door until it latches.
SUN VISORS
An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor. To
use the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing
the mirror cover upward. The lights will turn on
automatically. Closing the mirror cover will turn off
the light.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
1 — Upper Storage Latch
2 — Lower Storage Latch
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console
compartment lid in the open position. Driving
with the console compartment lid open may
result in injury in a collision.
2
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 59
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
AUX/USB CONTROL
Instrument Panel Media Hub
Located in the front storage area, this feature
allows an external USB device or AUX electronic
device to be plugged into the port or jack.
If equipped, there may also be a USB port in the
center console located to the left of the power
outlet.
Third and fourth USB ports are located behind the
center console, by the power inverter (if equipped).
Both are charge only USB ports.
Charge Only USB Ports
If equipped with a Uconnect 4C/4C NAV with
8.4-inch Display, refer to “Android Auto™” or
“Apple CarPlay®” in the Owner’s Manual
Supplement.
NOTE:
Charge unsupported devices with the Charge Only
USB ports. If an unsupported device is plugged into
a Media USB port, a message will display on the
touchscreen that the device is not supported by
the system.
POWER OUTLETS
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp)
power outlets that can be used to power cellular
phones, small electronics, and other low powered
electrical accessories. The power outlets are
labeled with either a “key” or a “battery” symbol to
indicate how the outlet is powered. Power outlets
labeled with a key are powered when the ignition
switch is in the ON or ACC position, while the
outlets labeled with a battery are connected
directly to the battery and powered at all times.
NOTE:
All accessories connected to the battery powered
outlets should be removed or turned off when the
vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against
discharge.
The front power outlet is located in front of the gear
selector.
Front Power Outlet
1 — USB Port
2 — AUX Port
1 — Charge Only Type C USB And Type A USB Port
2 — Charge Only Type C USB And Type A USB Port
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 60
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
(Continued)
A second fused 12 Volt power outlet is located on
the left quarter trim panel in the cargo area. This
power outlet has power available when the ignition
switch is in the ON or ACC position.
Rear Power Outlet
NOTE:
The rear cargo power outlet can be changed to
battery (powered at all times) by switching the rear
power outlet fuse in the Power Distribution Center
panel from fuse location F91 to F81.
Rear Cargo Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — F81 Fuse 20A Yellow Rear Power Outlet
(battery powered at all times)
2 — F91 Fuse 20A Yellow Rear Power Outlet
(powered when the ignition switch is in the ON or
ACC position)
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt
outlet.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
CAUTION!
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle's battery, even when
not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventu-
ally, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle's
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade
battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e.,
coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will
degrade the battery even more quickly. Only
use these intermittently and with greater
caution.
After the use of high power draw accessories,
or long periods of the vehicle not being started
(with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle
must be driven a sufficient length of time to
allow the generator to recharge the vehicle's
battery.
WARNING!
2
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 61
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
Rear Center Console Power Inverter
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet
located on the back of the center console to
convert DC current to AC current. This outlet can
power cellular phones, electronics and other low
power devices requiring power up to 150 Watts.
Certain game consoles exceed this power limit, as
will most power tools.
To turn on the power inverter outlet, simply plug in
the device. The outlet automatically turns off when
the device is unplugged.
The power inverter is designed with built-in
overload protection. If the power rating of
150 Watts is exceeded, the power inverter
automatically shuts down. Once the electrical
device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset. To avoid
overloading the circuit, check the power ratings on
electrical devices prior to using the inverter.
WINDOWS
POWER WINDOW CONTROLS
The power window switches on the driver's door
control all the door windows.
Power Window Switches
The passenger door windows can also be operated
by using the single window switch on each
passenger door trim panel. The window switches
will operate only when the ignition is in the ACC or
ON/RUN position.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 62
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
To open the window part way (manually), push the
window switch down briefly and release.
NOTE:
The power window switches will remain active for
up to 10 minutes after the ignition is placed in the
OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel
this feature. The timing is programmable in the
Uconnect system Ú page 150.
AUTOMATIC WINDOW FEATURES
Auto-Down Feature
The driver door power window switch and the front
and rear passenger doors window switches have
an Auto-Down feature.
Push the window switch down for half a second
and release. The window will go down
automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way down
during the Auto-Down operation, pull up or push
down on the switch briefly.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
Lift the window switch up, for a short period of
time, and release and the window will go up
automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up
during the Auto-Up operation, push down on the
switch briefly.
If the window runs into any obstacle during
auto-closure, it will reverse direction and then go
back down. Remove the obstacle and use the
window switch again to close the window.
NOTE:
Any impact due to rough road conditions may
trigger the auto-reverse function unexpectedly
during auto-closure. If this happens, pull the switch
lightly and hold to close the window manually.
RESET AUTO-UP
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the
window probably needs to be reset. To reset
Auto-Up:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up
for an additional two seconds after the
window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to open
the window completely and continue to hold
the switch down for an additional two seconds
after the window is fully open.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle,
and do not let children play with power windows.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
position. Occupants, particularly unattended
children, can become entrapped by the windows
while operating the power window switches.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or
death.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the
window is almost closed. To avoid personal
injury be sure to clear your arms, hands, fingers
and all objects from the window path before
closing.
2
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 63
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
WINDOW LOCKOUT SWITCH
The window lockout switch on the driver's door trim
panel allows you to disable the window controls on
the rear passenger doors. To disable the window
controls, push and release the window lockout
button (the indicator light on the button will turn
on). To enable the window controls, push and
release the window lockout button again (the
indicator light on the button will turn off).
Power Window Lockout Switch
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception
of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound
in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting
with the windows down, or the sunroof (if
equipped) in certain open or partially open
positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be
minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting
occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof
opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
POWER SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE —
IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switches are located to the left
between the sun visors on the overhead console.
Power Sunroof Switches
The power shade switches are located to the right
between the sun visors on the overhead console.
Power Shade Switches
1 — Vent Sunroof Switch
2 — Open Sunroof Switch
3 — Close Sunroof Switch
1 — Open Sunshade
2 — Close Sunshade
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
location accessible to children. Do not leave
the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
Occupants, particularly unattended children,
can become entrapped by the power sunroof
while operating the power sunroof switch.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury
or death.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 64
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
OPENING AND CLOSING THE SUNROOF
The sunroof has two programmed open positions:
comfort stop position and full open position. The
comfort stop position is set to minimize wind
buffeting when driving with side windows closed
and sunroof open. If the sunshade is closed when
initiating a sunroof open or vent command, the
sunshade will automatically open to the half open
position prior to the sunroof opening.
Express Open/Close
Push the switch rearward to open and release it
within one-half second, the sunroof will open to the
comfort stop position and automatically stop. Push
the switch rearward and release it again, the
sunroof will open to the full open position and
automatically stop. This is called Express Open.
Push the switch forward to close and release it
within one-half second and the sunroof will close
automatically from any position. The sunroof will
close fully and stop automatically. This is called
Express Close.
During Express Open or Express Close operation,
any movement of the sunshade switch will stop the
shade.
Manual Open/Close
Push and hold the switch rearward to open. The
sunroof will open to the comfort stop position and
automatically stop. Push the switch rearward and
hold it again, the sunroof will open to the full open
position and automatically stop.
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in
the forward position.
Any release of the switch during open or close
operation will stop the sunroof movement. The
sunroof will remain in a partially opened position
until the switch is operated and held again.
OPENING AND CLOSING THE POWER
S
HADE
The sunshade has two programmed open
positions: half open and full open. When opening
the sunshade from the closed position the
sunshade will always stop at the half open position
regardless of express or manual open operation.
The switch must be actuated again to continue on
to full open position.
If the sunroof is open or vented the sunshade
cannot be closed beyond the half open position.
Pushing the sunshade close switch when the
sunroof is open/vented and the sunshade is at half
open position will first automatically close sunroof
prior to the sunshade closing.
Express Open/Close
Push the sunshade switch rearward to open and
release it within one-half second, the sunshade will
open to the half open position and stop
automatically. Push and release the switch again
from the half open position and the sunshade will
open to the full open position and stop
automatically. This is called Express Open.
Push the sunshade switch forward to close and
release it within one-half second. If the sunroof is
in closed position the sunshade will full close
automatically from any position. If the sunroof is
open or vented the sunshade will close to the half
open position and stop; push and release the
sunshade switch forward again to automatically
close both the sunroof and sunshade completely.
This is called Express Close.
During Express Open or Express Close operation,
any movement of the sunshade switch will stop the
shade.
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof.
You could also be seriously injured or killed.
Always fasten your seat belt properly and
make sure all passengers are also properly
secured.
Do not allow small children to operate the
sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body
parts, or any object, to project through the
sunroof opening. Injury may result.
WARNING!
2
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 65
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Open/Close
Push and hold the sunshade switch rearward to
open. The shade will open to the half open position
and stop automatically. Push and hold the
sunshade switch rearward again and the shade
will open automatically to the full open position.
Push and hold the sunshade switch forward to
close. If the sunroof is in closed position the
sunshade will full close from any position. If the
sunroof is open or vented the sunshade will close
to the half open position and stop; pushing and
holding the sunshade switch forward again will
close both the sunroof and sunshade completely.
Any release of the switch will stop the movement
and the sunshade will remain in a partially opened
position until the switch is pushed again.
PINCH PROTECT FEATURE
This feature will detect an obstruction in the
closing of the sunroof during the Express Close
operation. If an obstruction in the path of the
sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automatically
retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs.
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result
in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will
disable and the sunroof must be closed in Manual
Mode.
VENTING SUNROOF
Push and release the Vent switch within one-half
second and the sunroof will open to the vent
position. This is called “Express Vent”, and it will
occur regardless of sunroof position. During
Express Vent operation, any movement of the
switch will stop the sunroof.
IGNITION OFF OPERATION
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up
to approximately 10 minutes after the ignition
switch is placed in the OFF position. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature.
NOTE:
Ignition Off timing is programmable through the
Uconnect system Ú page 150.
SUNROOF MAINTENANCE
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to
clean the glass panel. Periodically check for and
clear out any debris that may have collected in the
tracks.
HOOD
OPENING THE HOOD
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the
driver’s side of the instrument panel.
Hood Release
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and pull the
safety latch release lever forward (toward you).
The safety latch release lever is located behind
the front edge of the hood, slightly off-center to
the right.
Hood Safety Latch Release Lever Location
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 66
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
CLOSING THE HOOD
In one continuous motion, pull down on the front
edge of the hood with moderate force until the
angle is below the point where the gas props are no
longer resisting. Then let the hood continue to fall
into the closed position on its own.
LIFTGATE
TO UNLOCK/OPEN THE LIFTGATE
The power liftgate may be opened by pushing the
key fob liftgate button (if equipped) or by pushing
the electronic liftgate release handle Ú page 24.
Push the liftgate button on the key fob twice within
five seconds to open the power liftgate. Once the
liftgate is open, pushing the button twice within
five seconds a second time will close the liftgate.
The power liftgate may also be opened or closed by
pushing the liftgate button located on the
instrument panel to right of the headlight switch. If
the liftgate is fully open, the liftgate can be closed
by pushing the liftgate button located on the left
rear trim panel, near the liftgate opening. If the
liftgate is in motion, pushing the liftgate button
located on the left rear trim panel will reverse the
liftgate.
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the Passive Entry
button located to the left of liftgate release handle
to lock the liftgate and doors.
NOTE:
If all doors are programmed within Uconnect
Settings to unlock on first press, all doors will
unlock when you push the liftgate release handle.
If the driver door is programmed to unlock on first
press within Uconnect Settings Ú page 150, the
liftgate will unlock when you push the liftgate
release handle.
Liftgate Entry
NOTE:
Use the power door lock switch on either front
door trim panel or the key fob to lock and unlock
the liftgate.
The manual door locks on the doors and the
driver's door lock cylinder will not lock and
unlock the liftgate.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving
your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it
could open when the vehicle is in motion and
block your vision. Failure to follow this warning
could result in serious injury or death.
1 — Passive Entry Button
2 — Liftgate Release Handle
2
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 67
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Power Liftgate Malfunction Procedure:
1. In the event of a power malfunction to the
liftgate, the liftgate can be released by
accessing the service release feature in the
latch. This can be done using a 3 mm
diameter screwdriver.
2. From inside the gate, an eyelet can be seen.
Place the screwdriver in the eyelet.
3. Rotate the screwdriver handle to actuate the
lever and release the latch.
4. If liftgate is left open for an extended period of
time, the liftgate may need to be closed
manually to reset power liftgate functionality.
NOTE:
The liftgate can also be opened manually by
pushing the electronic liftgate release handle and
pulling upward in one fluid motion.
TO LOCK/CLOSE THE LIFTGATE
There are several different ways to close the
liftgate:
Manually by grabbing the liftgate closing handle
and pulling in a downward motion to close the
liftgate. Release the handle when the liftgate
takes over the closing effort.
Key fob liftgate button (if equipped)
Hands-Free (if equipped)
Liftgate instrument panel button (if equipped)
Power Liftgate button on the pillar in the cargo
area (if equipped)
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, pushing the Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry lock/push button
located to the left of the back-up camera will lock
the vehicle only.
The power liftgate may be closed by pushing the
rear power liftgate button, located in the upper left
trim in the liftgate opening. Pushing the button will
only close the liftgate. This button cannot be used
to open the liftgate.
Rear Power Liftgate Button
HANDS-FREE LIFTGATE — IF EQUIPPED
Hands-Free Liftgate Activation Zone
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow
poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You
and your passengers could be injured by these
fumes. Keep the liftgate closed when you are
operating the vehicle.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 68
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
To open or close the liftgate using hands-free
activation, use a straight in and out kicking motion
under the vehicle activation zone in the general
location below the rear license plate. Do not move
your foot sideways or in a sweeping motion or the
sensors may not detect the motion.
NOTE:
The activation zone is the same for vehicles
equipped with or without a trailer tow package.
When a valid kicking motion is completed, the
liftgate will chime, the hazard lights will flash and
the liftgate will open after approximately one
second, or close after approximately three
seconds. These settings can be enabled or
disabled through the Uconnect Settings
Ú page 150.
NOTE:
Opening or closing the Hands-Free Liftgate
requires a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the door handle. If a valid Passive
Entry key fob is not within 5 ft (1.5 m), the lift-
gate will not respond to any kicks.
The Hands-Free Liftgate feature may be turned
on or off through the Uconnect system
Ú page 150.
The Hands-Free Liftgate feature should be
turned off during jacking, tire changing, manual
car wash, and vehicle service.
The Hands-Free Liftgate feature can be acti-
vated by any metallic object making a similar
in-and-out motion under the rear fascia/
bumper, such as cleaning using a metal broom.
The Hands-Free Liftgate will only operate when
the transmission is in PARK.
If anything obstructs the Hands-Free Liftgate
while it is opening or closing, the liftgate will
automatically reverse to the closed/open posi-
tion, provided it meets sufficient resistance.
There are pinch sensors attached to the side of
the liftgate opening. Light pressure anywhere
along these strips will cause the liftgate to
return to the open position.
If the power liftgate encounters multiple
obstructions within the same cycle, the system
will automatically stop. If this occurs, the liftgate
must be operated manually.
The power liftgate will release, but not power
open, in temperatures below −12°F (−24°C).
Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice
from the liftgate before opening the liftgate.
If the liftgate is left open for an extended period
of time, the liftgate may need to be closed
manually to reset power liftgate functionality.
Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
However, because the gas pressure drops with
temperature, it may be necessary to assist the
props when opening the liftgate in cold weather.
NOTE:
Allow the power system to open the liftgate.
Manually pushing or pulling the liftgate may
activate the liftgate obstacle detection feature and
stop the power operation or reverse its direction.
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow
poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle.
You and your passengers could be injured by
these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed when
you are operating the vehicle.
If you are required to drive with the liftgate
open, make sure that all windows are closed,
and the climate control blower switch is set at
high speed. Do not use the recirculation
mode.
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel
path is clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed
and latched before driving away.
2
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 69
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo Load Floor
The cargo load floor system has a load capacity of
300 lb (136 kg).
To provide additional storage area, each rear seat
can be folded flat. This allows for extended cargo
space and still maintains some rear seating room
Ú page 30.
Cargo Extension Panels (Only With Sliding
Rear Seat) — If Equipped
Cargo extension panels can be folded and
unfolded. When the rear seats are moved to the
more forward positions and the rear seatbacks are
folded down, the extension panels (2) can be
unfolded manually by hand. The extension panels
can be used to extend the load floor to the rear
seats and/or hide the gap between the load floor
and rear seats or to assist in loading large items
into the cargo area.
NOTE:
If equipped with a cargo area floor mat, the mat
must be removed before unfolding the extension
panels.
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks And Loops
The tie-downs located on the cargo area floor
should be used to secure loads safely when the
vehicle is moving.
Cargo tie-down loops are located on the trim
panels.
WARNING!
Cargo tie-downs are not safe anchors for a
child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or
accident, a tie-down could pull loose and allow
the child seat to come loose. A child could be
badly injured. Use only the anchors provided
for child seat tethers.
To help protect against personal injury,
passengers should not be seated in the rear
cargo area. The rear cargo space is intended
for load carrying purposes only, not for
passengers, who should sit in seats and use
seat belts.
The weight and position of cargo and
passengers can change the vehicle center of
gravity and vehicle handling. To avoid loss of
control resulting in personal injury, follow these
guidelines for loading your vehicle:
Do not carry loads that exceed the load limits
described on the label attached to the left
door or left door center pillar.
Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor.
Put heavier objects as low and as far forward
as possible.
Place as much cargo as possible in front of the
rear axle. Too much weight or improperly
placed weight over or behind the rear axle can
cause the vehicle to sway.
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the
top of the seatback. This could impair visibility
or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden
stop or accident.
WARNING!
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 70
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
(Continued)
Rear Storage Bins
The rear storage bins are located in the rear of the
vehicle on the sides of the load floor.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The load carried on the roof, when equipped with a
luggage rack, must not exceed 150 lb (68 kg), and
it should be uniformly distributed over the cargo
area.
Crossbars should always be used whenever cargo
is placed on the roof rack. Check the straps
frequently to be sure that the load remains
securely attached.
NOTE:
Crossbars can be purchased at an authorized
dealer through Mopar® parts.
External racks do not increase the total load
carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be sure that the
total occupant and luggage load inside the vehicle,
plus the load on the luggage rack, do not exceed
the maximum vehicle load capacity.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before driving
your vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off
the vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting
in personal injury or property damage. Follow
the roof rack cautions when carrying cargo on
your roof rack.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle,
do not exceed the maximum roof rack load
capacity. Always distribute heavy loads as
evenly as possible and secure the load appro-
priately.
Long loads, which extend over the windshield,
should be secured to both the front and rear of
the vehicle.
Place a blanket or other protection between
the surface of the roof and the load.
Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners
carefully when carrying large or heavy loads
on the roof rack. Wind forces, due to natural
causes or nearby truck traffic, can add sudden
upward lift to a load. It is recommended to not
carry large flat loads, such as wood panels or
surfboards, which may result in damage to the
cargo or your vehicle.
Loads should always be secured to crossbars
first, with tie down loops used as additional
securing points if needed. Tie loops are
intended as supplementary tie down points
only. Do not use ratcheting mechanisms with
the tie loops. Check the straps frequently to be
sure that the load remains securely attached.
CAUTION!
2
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 71
72
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 72
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 73
3
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 73
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Instrument Cluster Display
The instrument cluster display features a
driver interactive display Ú page 74.
3. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine
coolant temperature. Any reading within the
normal range indicates that the engine
cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge will likely indicate a higher
temperature when driving in hot weather or
up mountain grades. It should not be
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the
normal operating range.
5. Fuel Gauge
The fuel gauge shows the level of fuel in the
fuel tank when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
mode.
The fuel pump symbol points to the
side of the vehicle where the fuel
door is located Ú page 134.
NOTE:
The hard telltales will illuminate for a bulb check
when the ignition is first cycled.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle may be equipped with an instrument
cluster display, which offers useful information to
the driver. With the ignition in the OFF mode,
opening/closing of a door will activate the display
for viewing, and display the total miles or
kilometers in the odometer. The steering wheel
mounted controls allow you to scroll through and
enter the main menus and submenus.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
L
OCATION AND CONTROLS
The instrument cluster display features a driver
interactive display that is located in the instrument
cluster.
Instrument Cluster Display Location
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized
dealer for service if your vehicle overheats
Ú page 264.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
reads “H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the
vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range. If
the pointer remains on the “H”, turn the engine
off immediately and call an authorized dealer for
service.
1 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen
2 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 74
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 75
The instrument cluster display menu items may
consist of the following:
The system allows the driver to select information
by pushing the following buttons mounted on the
steering wheel:
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
Up And Down Arrow Buttons:
Using the
up or down arrow buttons allow
you to cycle through the Main Menu Items.
Changes the Main Screen area and Menu Title
area.
Left And Right Arrow Buttons:
Using the
left or right arrow buttons allow
you to cycle through the submenu items of the
Main menu item.
NOTE:
Holding the
up / down or left /right
arrow button will loop the user through the
currently selected menu or options presented
on the screen.
Upon returning to a main menu, the last
submenu screen viewed within that main menu
will be displayed.
OK Button
Push the OK button to access/select the infor-
mation screens or submenu screens of a main
menu item. To reset displayed/selected
features push and hold the OK button for two
seconds.
OIL LIFE RESET — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with an engine oil
change indicator system. The “Oil Change
Required” message will display in the instrument
cluster display for five seconds after a single chime
has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil
change interval. The engine oil change indicator
system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate,
dependent upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display
each time you place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, push
and release the
OK button. To reset the oil change
indicator system (after performing the scheduled
maintenance), refer to the following procedure.
Oil Life Reset
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the
ignition in the ON/RUN mode (do not start the
engine).
2. Navigate to “Oil Life” submenu in “Vehicle
Info” in the instrument cluster display.
3. Push and hold the
OK button until the gauge
resets to 100%.
Speedometer Vehicle Info
Driver Assist —
If Equipped
Fuel Economy Trip Info Stop/Start
Audio Messages Screen Setup
Speed
Warning
1 — Left Arrow Button
2 — Up Arrow Button
3 — Right Arrow Button
4 — Down Arrow Button
5 — OK Button
3
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 75
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Secondary Method For Oil Change Reset
Procedure
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position (do not start
the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, three
times within ten seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the
ignition in the OFF position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you start
the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY MENU
I
TEMS
NOTE:
The instrument cluster display menu items display
in the center of the instrument cluster. Menu items
may vary depending on your vehicle features.
Speedometer
Push and release the
up or down arrow
button until the speedometer menu icon is
displayed in the instrument cluster display. Push
and release the
OK button to toggle units, mph or
km/h (If Equipped), of the speedometer.
Vehicle Info
Push and release the
up or down arrow
button until the Vehicle Info menu icon is displayed
in the instrument cluster display. Push and release
the
left or right arrow button to scroll
through the information submenus and push and
release the
OK button to select or reset the
submenus.
Tire Pressure: This menu option will display the
current tire pressure. A low tire will be high-
lighted in red for the 7 inch cluster and it will be
highlighted in white text for the 3.5 inch cluster.
Coolant Temperature: This menu option will
display the current coolant temperature of the
vehicle.
Transmission Temperature: This menu will
display the current transmission temperature of
the vehicle.
Oil Life: This menu option will display the current
oil life of the vehicle.
Oil Temperature: This menu option will display
the current oil temperature level of the vehicle.
Battery Voltage: This menu option will display
the current voltage level of the battery.
Driver Assist
Push and release the
up or down arrow
button until the Driver Assist menu title is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu — If Equipped
The instrument cluster display displays the current
ACC and LaneSense system settings. The
information displayed depends on the status of
ACC and LaneSense.
Push the ACC on/off button (located on the
steering wheel) until one of the following displays
in the instrument cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, and LaneSense is OFF,
the display will read “Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed
setting has not been selected, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”
Push and release the SET + or the SET- button
(located on the steering wheel) and the following
will display in the instrument cluster display:
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 76
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 77
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
instrument cluster.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of the
following:
Distance Setting Change
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
NOTE:
The instrument cluster display will return to the last
display selected after five seconds of no ACC
display activity Ú page 109.
LaneSense — If Equipped
The instrument cluster display displays the current
LaneSense system settings. The information
displayed depends on LaneSense system status
and the conditions that need to be met
Ú page 129.
Fuel Economy
Push and release the
up or down arrow
button until the Fuel Economy menu title is
displayed in the instrument cluster display. Toggle
the
left or right arrow button to select the
screen with or without current fuel economy
display. Push and hold the
OK button to reset
average fuel economy feature.
Range – The display shows the estimated
distance (mi or km) that can be traveled with the
fuel remaining in the tank. When the Range
value is less than 10 miles (16 km) estimated
driving distance, the Range display will change
to a “LOW FUEL” message. Adding a significant
amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the
“LOW FUEL” message and a new Range value
will display. Range cannot be reset through the
OK button.
NOTE:
Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable
distance of the vehicle, regardless of the Range
displayed value.
Average – The display shows the average fuel
economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L) since the
last reset.
Current – This display shows the current fuel
economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L) form while
driving.
Trip Info
Push and release the
up or down arrow
button until the Trip menu title is displayed in the
instrument cluster display. Toggle the
left or
right arrow button to select Trip A or Trip B. The
Trip information will display the following:
Distance – Shows the total distance (mi or km)
traveled for Trip A or Trip B since the last reset.
Average Fuel Economy – Shows the average
fuel economy (MPG or L/100 km or km/L) of
Trip A or Trip B since the last reset.
Elapsed Time – Shows the total elapsed time of
travel since Trip A or Trip B has been reset.
Hold the
OK button to reset feature information.
Stop/Start – If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Stop/Start menu title is displayed
in the instrument cluster display.
Audio
Push and release the
up or down arrow
button until the Audio menu title is displayed in the
instrument cluster display.
Messages
Push and release the
up or down arrow
button until the Messages Menu Icon is highlighted
in the instrument cluster display. This feature
shows the number of stored warning messages.
Pushing the
left or right arrow button will
allow you to scroll through the stored messages.
3
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 77
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Screen Setup
Push and release the
up or down arrow
button until the Screen Setup Menu Icon/Title is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push
and release the
OK button to enter the submenus
and follow the prompts on the screen as needed.
The Screen Setup feature allows you to change
what information is displayed in the instrument
cluster as well as the location where that
information is displayed.
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
Gear Display — If Equipped
Full
Single
Odometer — If Equipped
On
Off
Speed Warning
Push and release the
up or down arrow
button until the Speed Warning Menu icon/title is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push
and release the
OK button to enter speed warning.
Use the
up or down arrow button to select a
desired speed, then push and release the
OK
button to set the speed. When the set speed is just
exceeded, a single chime will sound along with a
pop-up message of speed warning exceeded.
When the set speed is exceeded by 2 mph (3 km/
h) or more, the indicator will light up yellow and
flash along with a continuous chime (until the
speed is no longer exceeded).
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
S
ELECTABLE ITEMS
The instrument cluster display can be used to view
the following main menu items:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicles options, feature
settings may vary Ú page 74.
Upper Left or Right
None Compass Outside Temp.
Time
Range to
Empty
Average Econ
(MPG, km/L or
L/100km)
Current Econ
(MPG, km/L or
L/100km)
Trip A Distance Trip B Distance
Favorite Menus
Speedometer Vehicle Info
Driver Assist
(show/hide)
Fuel Economy
(show/hide)
Trip Info
(show/hide)
Stop/Start
Audio
(show/hide)
(Stored)
Messages
Screen Setup
Speed
Warning —
If Equipped
Center
None Compass Outside Temp.
Time
Range to
Empty
Average Econ
(MPG, km/L or
L/100km)
Current Econ
(MPG, km/L or
L/100km)
Trip A Distance Trip B Distance
Audio Speedometer Menu Title
Favorite Menus
Speedometer Vehicle Info Stop/Start
Audio Driver Assist Fuel Economy
Messages Screen Setup Trip
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 78
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 79
BATTERY SAVER ON/BATTERY SAVER
M
ODE MESSAGE — ELECTRICAL LOAD
R
EDUCTION ACTIONS — IF EQUIPPED
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery
Sensor (IBS) to perform additional monitoring of
the electrical system and status of the vehicle
battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system
failure, or the vehicle battery conditions are
deteriorating, electrical load reduction actions will
take place to extend the driving time and distance
of the vehicle. This is done by reducing power to or
turning off non-essential electrical loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is
running. It will display a message if there is a risk
of battery depletion to the point where the vehicle
may stall due to lack of electrical supply, or will not
restart after the current drive cycle.
When load reduction is activated, the message
“Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will
appear in the instrument cluster display.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a
low state of charge and continues to lose electrical
charge at a rate that the charging system cannot
sustain.
NOTE:
The charging system is independent from load
reduction. The charging system performs a diag-
nostic on the charging system continuously.
If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may
indicate a problem with the charging system
Ú page 81.
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if
equipped), and vehicle functions which can be
effected by load reduction:
Heated Seats / Vented Seats / Heated Wheel
Heated / Cooled Cup Holders — If Equipped
Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
HVAC System
150W Power Inverter System
Audio and Telematics System
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or
more of the following conditions:
The charging system cannot deliver enough
electrical power to the vehicle system because
the electrical loads are larger than the capability
of charging system. The charging system is still
functioning properly.
Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads
(e.g. HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior
lights, overloaded power outlets +12 Volts,
150W, USB ports) during certain driving condi-
tions (city driving, towing, frequent stopping).
Installing options like additional lights, upfitter
electrical accessories, audio systems, alarms
and similar devices.
Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by
long parking periods).
The vehicle was parked for an extended period
of time (weeks, months).
The battery was recently replaced and was not
charged completely.
The battery was discharged by an electrical load
left on when the vehicle was parked.
The battery was used for an extended period
with the engine not running to supply radio,
lights, chargers, +12 Volts portable appliances
like vacuum cleaner’s, game consoles and
similar devices.
3
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 79
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
What to do when an electrical load reduction
action message is present (“Battery Saver On” or
“Battery Saver Mode”)
During a trip:
Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
Turn off redundant lights (interior or exte-
rior).
Check what may be plugged in to power
outlets +12 Volts, 150W, USB ports.
Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature).
Check the audio settings (volume).
After a trip:
Check if any aftermarket equipment was
installed (additional lights, upfitter electrical
accessories, audio systems, alarms) and review
specifications if any (load and Ignition Off Draw
currents).
Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance,
driving time and parking time).
The vehicle should have service performed if
the message is still present during consecutive
trips and the evaluation of the vehicle and
driving pattern did not help to identify the cause.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the
instrument panel together with a dedicated
message and/or acoustic signal when applicable.
These indications are indicative and precautionary
and as such must not be considered as exhaustive.
Always refer to the information in this chapter in
the event of a failure indication. All active telltales
will display first if applicable. The system check
menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status.
Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
RED WARNING LIGHTS
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the
driver or passenger seat belt is
unbuckled. When the ignition is first
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position and if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled,
a chime will sound and the light will turn on. When
driving, if the driver or front passenger seat belt
remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will flash or remain on continuously and a chime
will sound Ú page 188.
Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault with the air bag, and will
turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb
check when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position. This light will
illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the
air bag has been detected, it will stay on until the
fault is cleared. If the light is either not on during
startup, stays on, or turns on while driving, have
the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various brake
functions, including brake fluid level and
parking brake application. If the brake
light turns on it may indicate that the
parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level
is low, or that there is a problem with the Anti-Lock
Brake System reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has
been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full
mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates
a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or
that a problem with the Brake Booster has been
detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) /
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this
case, the light will remain on until the condition has
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 80
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 81
been corrected. If the problem is related to the
brake booster, the ABS pump will run when
applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation
may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking
capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the
hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual
brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning
Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level
in the master cylinder has dropped below a
specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level
conditions. The vehicle should have service
performed, and the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
necessary.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake
Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD
failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along
with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS
system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be
checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF
position to the ON/RUN position. The light should
illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light
should then turn off unless the parking brake is
applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does
not illuminate, have the light inspected by an
authorized dealer.
The light will also turn on when the parking brake
is applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
position.
NOTE:
This light only shows that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake appli-
cation.
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
battery is not charging properly. If it stays
on while the engine is running, there may
be a malfunction with the charging
system. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the
electrical system or a related component.
This warning light will illuminate when the battery
is not charging properly. If it stays on while the
engine is running, there may be a malfunction with
the charging system. Contact an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door
is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault
Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when
there's a fault with the EPS system
Ú page 104.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have
failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You
could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked
immediately.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could
pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service
should be obtained as soon as possible.
3
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 81
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a problem with the ETC system.
If a problem is detected while the vehicle
is running, the light will either stay on or
flash depending on the nature of the problem.
Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is safely and
completely stopped and the transmission is placed
in the PARK (P) position. The light should turn off.
If the light remains on with the vehicle running,
your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see
an authorized dealer for service as soon as
possible.
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake
pedals are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is
running, immediate service is required and you
may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/
ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light does not come on during starting,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Light
This light warns of an overheated engine
condition. If the engine coolant
temperature is too high, this indicator will
illuminate and a single chime will sound.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over
and stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/C)
system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission
into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the
temperature reading does not return to normal,
turn the engine off immediately and call for service
Ú page 240.
Hood Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
hood is left open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
Liftgate Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
liftgate is open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate low engine oil pressure. A chime
will sound when this light turns on and a
message “Oil Pressure Low” will display
in the message screen. If the light turns on while
driving, pull the vehicle to the side of the road at a
safe location, stop the vehicle, shut off the engine
as soon as possible, check the oil level and correct
the oil level if it is low. Contact an authorized
dealer.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
corrected. This light may or may not indicate how
much oil is in the engine. If the oil level is low and
corrected, the engine can be restarted. Otherwise
the vehicle should be serviced by an authorized
dealer Ú page 247.
NOTE:
The light may flash, a message in the center of the
dash may display momentarily “low oil pressure”
and a chime may occur during sharp cornering
maneuvers. If this happen it may indicate a low oil
level. The oil level should be checked and dealer
service performed if this occurs.
CAUTION!
If the vehicle is driven with low oil levels severe
engine damage can occur. Have the vehicle
checked immediately.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 82
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 83
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate the engine oil temperature is
high. If the light turns on while driving,
stop the vehicle and shut off the engine
as soon as possible. Wait for oil temperature to
return to normal levels.
Transmission Temperature Warning
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to warn
of a high transmission fluid temperature.
This may occur with strenuous usage
such as trailer towing. If this light turns
on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or
slightly faster, with the transmission in PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N), until the light turns off. Once the light
turns off, you may continue to drive normally.
Vehicle Security Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for
approximately 15 seconds when the
Vehicle Security System is arming, and
then will flash slowly until the vehicle is
disarmed.
YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault in the ACC system.
Contact a local authorized dealer for
service Ú page 109.
Electronic Park Brake Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate the Electronic Park Brake is not
functioning properly and service is
required. Contact an authorized dealer.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
This warning light monitors the ABS. The
light will turn on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position and may stay on for as long as
four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while
driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and service is required as
soon as possible. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally,
assuming the Brake Warning Light is also not on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position,
have the brake system inspected by an authorized
dealer.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when the
Electronic Stability Control system is
Active. The ESC Indicator Light in the
instrument cluster will come on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position, and when ESC is activated. It should go
out with the engine running. If the ESC Indicator
Light comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in the
ESC system. If this warning light remains on after
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is
illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over,
come in contact with hot engine or exhaust
components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission
Temperature Warning Light illuminated will
eventually cause severe transmission damage
or transmission failure.
3
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 83
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater
than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer
as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indi-
cator Light come on momentarily each time the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
This light will come on when the vehicle is in an
ESC event.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light — If Equipped
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or ACC/
ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even if it was
turned off previously.
Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches
approximately 2 gal (7.5 L) this light will
turn on, and remain on until fuel is
added. A single warning chime will sound
with Low Fuel Warning.
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
windshield washer fluid is low
Ú page 251.
Service LaneSense Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
LaneSense system is not operating and
requires service. Please see an
authorized dealer.
LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense Warning Light will be
solid yellow when the vehicle is
approaching a lane marker. The warning
light will flash when the vehicle is
crossing the lane marker Ú page 129.
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Warning Light
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard
Diagnostic System called OBD II that
monitors engine and automatic
transmission control systems. This warning light
will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
position before engine start. If the bulb does not
come on when turning the ignition switch from OFF
to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas
cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light
after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if
the light stays on through several typical driving
styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive
normally and will not require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to
alert serious conditions that could lead to immediate
loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage.
The vehicle should be serviced by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible if this occurs.
This warning light indicates the ESC is
off.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as
referenced above, can reach higher temperatures
than in normal operating conditions. This can
cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over
flammable substances such as dry plants, wood,
cardboard, etc. This could result in death or
serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the
vehicle control system. It also could affect fuel
economy and driveability. If the MIL is flashing,
severe catalytic converter damage and power
loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
required.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 84
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 85
Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to signal
a fault with the Four-Wheel Drive system.
If the light stays on or comes on during
driving, it means that the Four-Wheel
Drive system is not functioning properly and that
service is required. We recommend you drive to the
nearest service center and have the vehicle
serviced immediately.
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
Light — If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to indicate a fault
in the Forward Collision Warning System.
Contact an local authorized dealer for
service Ú page 182.
Service Stop / Start System Warning Light
This telltale will turn on to indicate the
Stop/Start system is not functioning
properly and service is required. Contact
an authorized dealer for service.
Cruise Control Fault Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate the Cruise Control System is not
functioning properly and service is
required. Contact an authorized dealer.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a
message is displayed to indicate that the
tire pressure is lower than the
recommended value and/or that slow
pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal
tire duration and fuel consumption may not be
guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition
mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should
be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the
inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle
manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label. If your vehicle has tires of
a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure
for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a low tire
pressure warning light when one or more of your
tires is significantly underinflated. Accordingly,
when the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires
as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if underinflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system
is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction
indicator is combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a malfunction,
the telltale will flash for approximately one minute
and then remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When
WARNING!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat
tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the
vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a
tire puncture occurs, repair immediately using
the dedicated tire repair kit and contact an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
3
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 85
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
occur for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS
Active Speed Limiter Fault Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate to signal when
there is a fault detected with the Active
Speed Limiter.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Off
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light indicates that Forward Collision
Warning is off Ú page 182.
4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle
is in the 4WD Low mode. The front and
rear driveshafts are mechanically locked
together forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. Low range
provides a greater gear reduction ratio to provide
increased torque at the wheels Ú page 100.
Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light
This light indicates when the rear axle
lock has been activated.
Wait To Start Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate for
approximately two seconds when the
ignition is turned to the RUN position. Its
duration may be longer based on colder
operating conditions. Vehicle will not initiate start
until telltale is no longer displayed.
NOTE:
The Wait To Start telltale may not illuminate if the
intake manifold temperature is warm enough.
Water In Fuel Indicator Light — If Equipped
The Water In Fuel Indicator Light will
illuminate when there is water detected
in the fuel filter. If this light remains on,
DO NOT start the vehicle before you drain
the water from the fuel filter to prevent engine
damage, and please see an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
and warning have been established for the tire
size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable
system operation or sensor damage may result
when using replacement equipment that is not
of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket
wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to
become inoperable. After using an aftermarket
tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
CAUTION!
The presence of water in the fuel system circuit
may cause severe damage to the injection
system and irregular engine operation. If the
indicator light is illuminated, contact an
authorized dealer as soon as possible to bleed
the system. If the above indications come on
immediately after refuelling, water has probably
been poured into the tank: switch the engine off
immediately and contact an authorized dealer.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 86
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 87
GREEN INDICATOR LIGHTS
Active Speed Limiter SET Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the Active
Speed Limiter is on and set to a specific
speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With
Target Vehicle Light — If Equipped
This will display when the ACC is set and
a vehicle in front is detected
Ú page 109.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set Without
Target Vehicle Light — If Equipped
This will display the distance setting for
the ACC system when the system is
engaged Ú page 109.
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when
the cruise control is set to the desired
speed Ú page 107.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when
the front fog lights are on Ú page 43.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense indicator light illuminates
solid green when both lane markings
have been detected and the system is
“armed” and ready to provide visual and
torque warnings if an unintentional lane departure
occurs Ú page 129.
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when
the parking lights or headlights are
turned on Ú page 43.
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light
This telltale will illuminate when the
Stop/Start function is in “Autostop”
mode.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is
activated, the turn signal indicator will
flash independently and the
corresponding exterior turn signal lamps
will flash. Turn signals can be activated when the
multifunction lever is moved down (left) or up
(right).
NOTE:
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if
either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
WHITE INDICATOR LIGHTS
Active Speed Limiter Ready Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the Active
Speed Limiter is on, but not set.
Hill Descent Control Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator shows when the Hill
Descent Control (HDC) feature is turned
on. The lamp will be on solid when HDC is
armed. HDC can only be armed when the
transfer case is in the 4WD Low position and the
vehicle speed is less then 30 mph (48 km/h). If
these conditions are not met while attempting to
use the HDC feature, the HDC indicator light will
flash on/off.
3
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 87
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is ON, but
not armed, the LaneSense indicator light
illuminates solid white. This occurs when
only left, right, or neither lane line has
been detected. If a single lane line is detected, the
system is ready to provide only visual warnings if
an unintentional lane departure occurs on the
detected lane line Ú page 129.
Speed Warning Indicator Light
The white indicator will illuminate along
with a text message (Speed Warning Set
to XX followed by unit), once the feature
is enabled. When the set speed is
exceeded, a continuous chime (up to 10 seconds
or until the speed is no longer exceeded) will sound
along with a Speed Warning Exceeded pop-up
message and the indicator light will turn yellow and
flash.
NOTE:
The number “31” is only an example of a speed
that can be selected.
Selec-Speed Control Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light will turn on when “Selec-Speed
Control” is activated.
To activate “Selec-Speed Control”, ensure the
vehicle is in Four - Wheel Drive (4WD) Low and
push the button on the Instrument Panel.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is not in 4WD Low, “To Enter
Selec-Speed Shift to 4WD Low” will appear in the
instrument cluster display.
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the Cruise
Control has been turned on, but not set
Ú page 107.
BLUE INDICATOR LIGHTS
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to
indicate that the high beam headlights
are on. With the low beams activated,
push the multifunction lever forward
(toward the front of the vehicle) to turn on the high
beams. Pull the multifunction lever rearward
(toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the high
beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever
toward you for a temporary high beam on, “flash to
pass” scenario.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated
Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II. This
system monitors the performance of the
emissions, engine, and transmission control
systems. When these systems are operating
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine
emissions well within current government
regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II
system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other
information to assist your service technician in
making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually
be drivable and not need towing, see an authorized
dealer for service as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control
system. It could also affect fuel economy and
driveability. The vehicle must be serviced
before any emissions tests can be performed.
If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is
running, severe catalytic converter damage
and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 88
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 89
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
(OBD II) C
YBERSECURITY
Your vehicle is required to have an OBD II and a
connection port to allow access to information
related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may need
to access this information to assist with the
diagnosis and service of your vehicle and
emissions system Ú page 149.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to
pass an inspection of your vehicle's emissions
control system. Failure to pass could prevent
vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies
the Malfunction Indicator Light is
functioning and is not on when the
engine is running, and that the OBD II system is
ready for testing.
The OBD ll system may not be ready if your vehicle
was recently serviced, recently had a depleted
battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD ll
system should be determined not ready for the I/M
test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station.
To check if your vehicle's OBD II system is ready,
you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position,
but do not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the
ON position, you will see the Malfunction
Indicator Light symbol come on as part of a
normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two
things will happen:
The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and
then return to being fully illuminated until
you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine.
This means that your vehicle's OBD II
system is
not ready and you should not
proceed to the I/M station.
The MIL will not flash at all and will remain
fully illuminated until you place the ignition
in the off position or start the engine. This
means that your vehicle's OBD II system is
ready and you can proceed to the I/M
station.
If your OBD II system is
not ready, you should see
an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your
vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery
failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing
more than drive your vehicle as you normally would
in order for your OBD II system to update. A
recheck with the above test routine may then
indicate that the system is
now ready.
WARNING!
ONLY an authorized service technician should
connect equipment to the OBD II connection
port in order to read the VIN, diagnose, or
service your vehicle.
If unauthorized equipment is connected to the
OBD II connection port, such as a
driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
Be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be
impaired or a loss of vehicle control could
occur that may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
Access, or allow others to access, infor-
mation stored in your vehicle systems,
including personal information.
3
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 89
90
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten
your seat belts.
Start the engine with the gear selector in the
NEUTRAL (N) or PARK (P) position. Apply the brake
before shifting to any driving range.
NORMAL STARTING
Press the brake pedal and place the ignition in the
START position and release when the engine
starts. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds:
1. Place the ignition in the OFF position.
2. Wait 10 to 15 seconds.
3. Repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
NOTE:
Only press one pedal at a time while driving the
vehicle. Torque performance of the vehicle could
be reduced if both pedals are pressed at the same
time. If pressure is detected on both pedals simul-
taneously, a warning message will display in the
instrument cluster Ú page 74.
Tip Start Feature
Place the ignition in the START position and
release it as the starter engages. The starter motor
will automatically disengage itself once the engine
is running. If the engine fails to start, the starter will
disengage automatically in 10 seconds. If this
occurs:
1. Place the ignition in the OFF position.
2. Wait 10 to 15 seconds.
3. Repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
WARNING!
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
If equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™, always
make sure the keyless ignition node is in OFF
position, remove the key fob from the vehicle
and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or ON/
RUN position. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
WARNING!
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 90
STARTING AND OPERATING 91
EXTREME COLD WEATHER
(B
ELOW –20°F OR −29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures,
use of an externally powered electric engine block
heater (available from an authorized dealer) is
recommended.
EXTENDED PARK STARTING
NOTE:
Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle
has not been started or driven for at least 30 days.
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to
the battery to ensure a full battery charge
during the crank cycle.
2. Place the ignition in the START position and
release it when the engine starts.
3. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds,
place the ignition in the OFF position, wait 10
to 15 seconds to allow the starter to cool, then
repeat the Extended Park Starting procedure.
4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts,
allow the starter to cool for at least
10 minutes, then repeat the procedure.
IF ENGINE FAILS TO START
A
FTER STARTING
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it
will decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine and
permits quicker starts in cold weather.
Connect the cord to a 110-115 Volt AC electrical
outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
For ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C), the
engine block heater is recommended for at least
an hour to have an adequate warming effect on the
engine. For ambient temperatures below -20°F
(-29°C), the engine block heater is required for at
least four hours to have an adequate warming
effect on the engine.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the
hood, behind to the driver’s side headlamp. Follow
the steps below to properly use the engine block
heater:
1. Locate the engine block heater cord (behind
the driver’s side headlamp).
2. Undo the hook-and-loop strap that secures the
heater cord in place.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank
continuously for more than 10 seconds at a
time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an
attempt to start the vehicle. This could result
in flash fire causing serious personal injury.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to
get it started. Vehicles equipped with an auto-
matic transmission cannot be started this
way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic
converter and once the engine has started,
ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a start
from a booster battery or the battery in
another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly Ú page 237.
4
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 91
92 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. Pull the cord to the front of the vehicle and plug
it into a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
4. After the vehicle is running, reattach the cord
to the hook-and-loop strap and properly stow it
away behind the driver’s side headlamp.
NOTE:
The engine block heater cord is a factory
installed option. If your vehicle is not equipped,
heater cords are available from an authorized
dealer.
The engine block heater will require 110 Volt AC
and 6.5 Amps to activate the heater element.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine
and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your
vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles
(500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km),
speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are
desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within
the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good
break-in. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low
gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory
is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant.
Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated
climate conditions under which vehicle operations
will occur. For the recommended viscosity and
quality grades see Ú page 303.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its first
few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in
and not interpreted as a problem.
PARKING BRAKE
ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB)
Your vehicle is equipped with an EPB that offers
simple operation, and some additional features
that make the parking brake more convenient and
useful.
The parking brake is primarily intended to prevent
the vehicle from rolling while parked. Before
leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is applied. Also, be certain to leave the
transmission in PARK (P).
You can engage the parking brake in two ways:
Manually, by applying the EPB switch.
Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park Brake
feature in the customer programmable features
Ú page 157.
The EPB switch is located in the center console,
behind the gear selector.
EPB Switch
To apply the parking brake manually, pull up on the
EPB switch momentarily. You may hear a sound
from the back of the vehicle while the parking brake
engages. Once the parking brake is fully engaged,
the red BRAKE telltale light in the instrument cluster
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block
heater cord before driving. Damage to the
110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause
electrocution.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral
Oil in the engine or damage may result.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 92
STARTING AND OPERATING 93
(Continued)
and an indicator on the switch will illuminate. If your
foot is on the brake pedal while you apply the
parking brake, you may notice a small amount of
brake pedal movement. The parking brake can be
applied even when the ignition switch is OFF but the
BRAKE telltale light will not illuminate. The parking
brake can only be released when the ignition is in
the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
The EPB fault light will illuminate if the EPB switch
is held for longer than 90 seconds in either the
released or applied position. The light will extin-
guish upon releasing the switch.
If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the
parking brake will automatically engage whenever
the transmission is placed into PARK, while the
ignition is turned OFF. If your foot is on the brake
pedal, you may notice a small amount of brake
pedal movement while the parking brake is
engaging.
The parking brake will release automatically when
the ignition is ON, the transmission is in DRIVE (D)
or REVERSE (R) and the driver seat belt is buckled.
To release the parking brake manually, the ignition
switch must be in the ON/RUN position. Put your
foot on the brake pedal, then push the EPB switch
down momentarily. You may hear a sound from the
back of the vehicle while the parking brake
disengages. You may also notice a small amount of
movement in the brake pedal. Once the parking
brake is fully disengaged, the BRAKE telltale light
in the instrument cluster and the LED indicator on
the switch will extinguish.
NOTE:
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade
and away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply
the parking brake before placing the gear selector
in PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission
locking mechanism may make it difficult to move
the gear selector out of PARK.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute
for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible injury
or damage.
When exiting the vehicle, always turn the igni-
tion off, secure the key fob and lock your
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to
brake failure and a collision.
Always fully apply the parking brake when
leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause
damage or injury. Also be certain to leave the
transmission in PARK. Failure to do so may
allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or
injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on
with the parking brake released, a brake system
malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system
serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.
WARNING!
4
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 93
94 STARTING AND OPERATING
If exceptional circumstances should make it
necessary to engage the parking brake while the
vehicle is in motion, maintain upward pressure on
the EPB switch for as long as engagement is
desired. The BRAKE telltale light will illuminate,
and a continuous chime will sound. The rear stop
lamps will also be illuminated automatically while
the vehicle remains in motion.
To disengage the parking brake while the vehicle is
in motion, release the EPB switch. If the vehicle is
brought to a complete stop using the parking brake,
when the vehicle reaches approximately 3 mph
(5 km/h) the parking brake will remain engaged.
In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the EPB
system, a yellow EPB fault light will illuminate. This
may be accompanied by the BRAKE telltale light
flashing. In this event, urgent service of the EPB
system is required. Do not rely on the parking
brake to hold the vehicle stationary.
Auto Park Brake
The EPB can be programmed to be applied
automatically whenever the vehicle is at a
standstill and the automatic transmission is
placed in PARK, whenever the ignition is turned
OFF. Auto Park Brake is enabled and disabled by
customer selection through the customer
programmable features Ú page 157.
Any single Auto Park Brake application can be
bypassed by pushing the EPB switch to the release
position while the transmission is placed in PARK.
SafeHold
SafeHold is a safety feature of the EPB system that
will engage the parking brake automatically if the
vehicle is left unsecured while the ignition is in ON/
RUN position.
The parking brake will automatically engage if all of
the following conditions are met:
The vehicle is at a standstill.
There is no attempt to press the brake pedal or
accelerator pedal.
The driver seat belt is unbuckled.
The driver door is open.
SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by pressing
the brake pedal and pushing the EPB Switch while
the driver door is open. Once manually bypassed,
SafeHold will be enabled again once the vehicle
reaches 12 mph (20 km/h) or the ignition is turned
to the OFF position and back to ON again.
Brake Maintenance Mode
We recommend having your brakes serviced by an
authorized dealer. You should only make repairs
for which you have the knowledge and the right
equipment. You should only enter Brake
Maintenance Mode during brake service.
When servicing your rear brakes, it may be
necessary for you or your technician to push the
rear piston into the rear caliper bore. With the EPB
system, this can only be done after retracting the
EPB actuator. Fortunately, actuator retraction can
be done easily by entering the Brake Maintenance
Mode through the Uconnect Settings in your
vehicle. This menu-based system will guide you
through the steps necessary to retract the EPB
actuator in order to perform rear brake service.
Maintenance Mode has requirements that must be
met in order to be activated:
The vehicle must be at a standstill.
The parking brake must be unapplied.
The transmission must be in PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N).
WARNING!
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake
engaged, or repeated use of the parking brake
to slow the vehicle, may cause serious damage
to the brake system. Be sure the parking brake
is fully disengaged before driving; failure to do
so can lead to brake failure and a collision.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 94
STARTING AND OPERATING 95
(Continued)
While in Maintenance Mode, the EPB fault lamp
will flash continuously while the ignition is ON.
When brake service work is complete, the following
steps must be followed to reset the parking brake
system to normal operation:
Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill.
Press the brake pedal with moderate force.
Apply the EPB Switch.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for
which you have the knowledge and the right
equipment. If you have any doubt about your
ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle
to a competent mechanic.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N) if the engine speed is higher
than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly
pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all
vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while
the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle,
always come to a complete stop, then apply
the parking brake, shift the transmission into
PARK, turn the engine OFF, and remove the
key fob. When the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF
(key removal) position, (or, with Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™, when the ignition is in the OFF
position) the transmission is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted move-
ment.
When leaving the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF position, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
Never use the PARK position as a substitute
for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to
guard against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the trans-
mission is in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis-
sion gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children), and do
not leave the ignition (in a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™) in the ACC or ON/
RUN position. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
WARNING!
4
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 95
96 STARTING AND OPERATING
KEY IGNITION PARK INTERLOCK
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park
Interlock which requires the transmission to be in
PARK before the ignition can be turned to the
LOCK/OFF (key removal) position. The key fob can
only be removed from the ignition when the ignition
is in the LOCK/OFF position, and the transmission
is locked in PARK whenever the ignition is in the
LOCK/OFF position.
BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT
I
NTERLOCK (BTSI) SYSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI system that
holds the transmission gear selector in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the
transmission out of PARK, the ignition must be in
the ON/RUN position (engine running or not) and
the brake pedal must be pressed.
The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from
NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle
is stopped or moving at low speeds.
9-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The transmission gear range (PRND) is displayed
both beside the gear selector and in the
instrument cluster. To select a gear range, push
the lock button on the gear selector and move the
selector rearward or forward. You must also press
the brake pedal to shift the transmission out of
PARK (or NEUTRAL, when the vehicle is stopped or
moving at low speeds). Select the DRIVE range for
normal driving.
NOTE:
The transmission electronics are self-cali-
brating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a
normal condition, and precision shifts will
develop within a few hundred miles (kilome-
ters).
In the event of a mismatch between the gear
selector position and the actual transmission
gear (for example, driver selects REVERSE while
driving forward), the position indicator will blink
continuously until the selector is returned to the
proper position, or the requested shift can be
completed.
The electronically controlled transmission adapts
its shift schedule based on driver inputs, along
with environmental and road conditions.
The nine-speed transmission has been developed
to meet the needs of current and future FWD/AWD
vehicles. Software and calibration is refined to
optimize the customer’s driving experience and
fuel economy. By design, some vehicle and
driveline combinations utilize NINTH gear only in
very specific driving situations and conditions.
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when
the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is
stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
pedal when shifting between these gears.
The transmission gear selector provides PARK,
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and MANUAL
(AutoStick) shift positions. Manual shifts can be
made using the AutoStick shift control. Moving the
gear selector into the MANUAL (-/+) position
(beside the DRIVE position) activates AutoStick
mode, providing manual shift control and
displaying the current gear in the instrument
cluster (as 1, 2, 3, etc.). Toggling the gear selector
forward (-) or rearward (+) while in the MANUAL
position will manually select the transmission gear
Ú page 99.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
following precautions are not observed:
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above
idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 96
STARTING AND OPERATING 97
(Continued)
(Continued)
NOTE:
If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK,
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed
forward), it is probably in the MANUAL (AutoStick [+/-])
position (beside the DRIVE position). In MANUAL
(AutoStick) mode, the transmission gear (1, 2, 3, etc.)
is displayed in the instrument cluster. Move the gear
selector to the right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for
access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
Gear Selector
GEAR RANGES
Do not press the accelerator pedal when shifting
out of PARK or NEUTRAL.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before acceler-
ating. This is especially important when the engine
is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by
locking the transmission. The engine can be
started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK
while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking
brake when exiting the vehicle in this range.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
before shifting the transmission to PARK,
otherwise the load on the transmission locking
mechanism may make it difficult to move the gear
selector out of PARK. As an added precaution, turn
the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
Apply the parking brake.
Shift the transmission into PARK.
Turn the engine off.
Remove the key fob.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute
for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to
guard against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the trans-
mission is in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all
vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while
the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle,
always come to a complete stop, then apply
the parking brake, shift the transmission into
PARK, turn the engine OFF, and remove the
key fob. When the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF
(key removal) position (or, with Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™, when the ignition is in the OFF
position), the transmission is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted move-
ment.
WARNING!
4
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 97
98 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
The following indicators should be used to ensure
that you have properly engaged the transmission
into the PARK position:
When shifting into PARK, push the lock button
on the gear selector and firmly move the
selector all the way forward until it stops and is
fully seated.
Look at the transmission gear position display
and verify that it indicates the PARK position.
With the brake pedal released, verify that the
gear selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward.
Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come
to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the engine running. The
engine may be started in this range. Apply the
parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK
if you must exit the vehicle.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and
highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts
and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The
transmission automatically upshifts through all
forward gears.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such
as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading
conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong
head winds, or while towing a heavy trailer), use
the AutoStick shift control to select a lower gear
Ú page 99. Under these conditions, using a lower
When leaving the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF position, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis-
sion gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children), and do
not leave the ignition (in a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™) in the ACC or ON/
RUN position. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Before moving the transmission gear selector
out of PARK, you must turn the ignition to the
ON/RUN mode, and also press the brake
pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector
could result.
WARNING!
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as
this can damage the drivetrain.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing
traffic or road conditions. You might lose control
of the vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL
can cause severe transmission damage.
If Recreational Towing see Ú page 142.
If Towing A Disabled Vehicle see Ú page 243.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 98
STARTING AND OPERATING 99
gear will improve performance and extend
transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
and heat buildup.
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal
operating limits, the transmission controller may
modify the transmission shift schedule, reduce
engine torque, and/or expand the range of torque
converter clutch engagement. This is done to
prevent transmission damage due to overheating.
If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light may
illuminate, and the transmission may operate
differently until the transmission cools down.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation
may be modified depending on engine and
transmission temperature as well as vehicle
speed. This feature improves warm-up time of the
engine and transmission to achieve maximum
efficiency. Engagement of the torque converter
clutch, and shifts into EIGHTH or NINTH gear, are
inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm
Ú page 100. Normal operation will resume once
the transmission temperature has risen to a
suitable level.
SPORT — If Equipped
This mode alters the transmission's automatic
shift schedule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds
are increased to make full use of available engine
power.
SPORT mode is activated using the rotary switch
on the center console Ú page 103.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically
for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected
that could result in transmission damage,
Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated. In this
mode, the transmission may operate only in a fixed
gear, or may remain in NEUTRAL. The Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. Limp
Home Mode may allow the vehicle to be driven to
an authorized dealer for service without damaging
the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the
transmission can be reset to regain all forward
gears by performing the following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the
problem is no longer detected, the
transmission will return to normal operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we
recommend that you visit an authorized dealer at
your earliest possible convenience. An authorized
dealer has diagnostic equipment to assess the
condition of your transmission. If the transmission
cannot be reset, authorized dealer service is
required.
AutoStick
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission
feature providing manual shift control, giving you
more control of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to
maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable
upshifts and downshifts, and improve overall
vehicle performance. This feature can also provide
you with more control during passing, city driving,
cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer
towing and many other situations.
Operation
When the gear selector is in the AutoStick position
(beside the DRIVE position), it can be moved
forward and rearward. This allows the driver to
manually select the transmission gear being used.
Moving the gear selector forward (-) triggers a
downshift, and rearward (+) an upshift. The current
gear is displayed in the instrument cluster.
4
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 99
100 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will only shift
up or down when the driver moves the gear
selector rearward (+) or forward (-), except as
described below.
The transmission will automatically upshift
when necessary to prevent engine overspeed.
The transmission will automatically downshift
as the vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging)
and will display the current gear.
The transmission will automatically downshift to
FIRST or SECOND gear (depending on model)
when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as
the vehicle is accelerated.
You can start out (from a stop) in FIRST or
SECOND gear. Starting out in SECOND gear can
be helpful in snow or icy conditions. Tap the gear
selector forward or rearward to select the
desired gear after the vehicle is brought to a
stop.
If a requested downshift would cause the
engine to overspeed, that shift will not occur.
The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too
low of a vehicle speed.
Avoid using Cruise Control when AutoStick is
engaged because the transmission will not shift
automatically.
Transmission shifting will be more noticeable
when AutoStick is enabled.
The system may revert to automatic shift mode
if a fault or overheat condition is detected.
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear
selector to the DRIVE position. You can shift in or
out of the AutoStick position at any time without
taking your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has
been included in the automatic transmission on
your vehicle. A clutch within the torque converter
engages automatically at calibrated speeds. This
may result in a slightly different feeling or response
during normal operation in the upper gears. When
the vehicle speed drops or during some
accelerations, the clutch automatically
disengages.
NOTE:
The torque converter clutch will not engage until
the transmission fluid is warm (usually after 1 to
3 miles [2 to 5 km] of driving). Because the engine
speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is
not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission is
not shifting properly when cold. This is normal. The
torque converter clutch will function normally once
the transmission is sufficiently warm.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
1-SPEED FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE
(4WD) — IF EQUIPPED
This feature provides on-demand four-wheel drive
(4WD). The system is automatic with no driver
inputs or additional driving skills required. Under
normal driving conditions, the front wheels provide
most of the traction. If the front wheels begin to lose
traction, power is shifted automatically to the rear
wheels. The greater the front wheel traction loss,
the greater the power transfer to the rear wheels.
Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy throttle
input (where one may have no wheel spin), torque
will be sent to the rear in a preemptive effort to
improve vehicle launch and performance
characteristics.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking
on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could
lose their grip and the vehicle could skid,
causing a collision or personal injury.
CAUTION!
All wheels must have the same size and type
tires. Unequal tire sizes must not be used.
Unequal tire size may cause failure of the power
transfer unit.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 100
STARTING AND OPERATING 101
2-SPEED FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE
(4WD) — I
F EQUIPPED
2-Speed 4x4 Switch
2-Speed 4x4 Switch (with Rear Lock)
The Four-Wheel Drive is fully automatic in the
normal driving mode. The Selec-Terrain buttons
provide three selectable mode positions:
4WD LOW
REAR LOCK (If Equipped)
N (NEUTRAL)
When additional traction is required, the 4WD LOW
range position can be used to provide an
additional gear reduction, which allows for
increased torque to be delivered to both the front
and rear wheels. 4WD LOW is intended for loose,
slippery road surfaces only. Driving in 4WD LOW on
dry, hard-surfaced roads may cause increased tire
wear and damage to driveline components.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the
engine speed is approximately three times that of
the normal driving mode at a given road speed.
Take care not to overspeed the engine, and do not
exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles
depends on tires of equal size, type, and
circumference on each wheel. Any difference will
adversely affect shifting and cause damage to the
driveline components.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved
traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe turning
and stopping speeds. Do not go faster than road
conditions permit.
SHIFT POSITIONS
For additional information on the appropriate use
of each 4WD system mode position, see the
information below:
N (NEUTRAL)
This range disengages the driveline from the
powertrain. It is to be used for flat towing behind
another vehicle Ú page 142.
4WD LOW
This range is for low speed four-wheel drive. It
provides an additional gear reduction which allows
for increased torque to be delivered to both the
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you
leave the vehicle unattended with the power
transfer unit in the N (NEUTRAL) position without
first fully engaging the parking brake. The N
(NEUTRAL) position disengages both the front
and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and
will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the
transmission is in PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is not
in the vehicle, unless the vehicle is otherwise
secured (for example, when attached to the tow
vehicle).
4
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 101
102 STARTING AND OPERATING
front and rear wheels while providing maximum
pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
NOTE:
For further information on the various positions
and their intended usages Ú page 103.
SHIFTING PROCEDURES
Shifting Into 4WD LOW
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to
5 km/h), the ignition in the ON/RUN position and
the engine running, shift the transmission into
NEUTRAL (N), and push the 4WD LOW button once.
The 4WD LOW indicator light in the instrument
cluster will begin to flash and remain on solid when
the shift is complete.
4WD LOW Button
NOTE:
If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a
message will flash from the instrument cluster
display with instructions on how to complete the
requested shift Ú page 74.
Shifting Out Of 4X4 LOW
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to
5 km/h), the ignition in the ON/RUN position and
the engine running, shift the transmission into
NEUTRAL (N), and push the 4WD LOW button once.
The 4WD LOW indicator light in the instrument
cluster will flash and go out when the shift is
complete.
NOTE:
If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a
message will flash from the instrument cluster
display with instructions on how to complete the
requested shift Ú page 74.
Shifting into or out of 4WD LOW is possible with
the vehicle completely stopped; however, diffi-
culty may occur due to the mating clutch teeth not
being properly aligned. Several attempts may be
required for clutch teeth alignment and shift
completion to occur. The preferred method is with
the vehicle rolling 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h). If the
vehicle is moving faster than 3 mph (5 km/h), the
4WD system will not allow the shift.
REAR ELECTRONIC LOCKER SYSTEM —
I
F EQUIPPED
The Rear Electronic Locker System features a
mechanical locking rear differential to provide
better traction in the 4WD LOW position. The REAR
LOCK button is on the Selec-Terrain Knob.
Activating The Rear Electronic Locker System
To activate the Rear Electronic Locker System, the
following conditions must be met:
1. The 4WD system must be in 4WD LOW.
2. The ignition in the ON/RUN position and the
engine running.
3. Vehicle speed must be below 15 mph
(24 km/h).
4. To engage the Rear Electronic Locker, push
the REAR LOCK button once.
Rear Lock Button
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 102
STARTING AND OPERATING 103
Deactivating The Rear Electronic Locker System
To deactivate the Rear Electronic Locker System,
the following conditions must be met:
1. Rear Electronic Locker must be engaged, and
the REAR LOCK indicator light on.
2. The ignition in the ON/RUN position and the
engine running.
3. To disengage Rear Electronic Locker, push the
REAR LOCK button once.
NOTE:
It may also be necessary to drive slowly steering
back and forth to complete engagement and
disengagement of the Electronic Locker.
When engaging Rear Electronic Locker, the indi-
cator lights in the instrument cluster and on the
REAR LOCK button will begin to flash. When the
shift is complete the REAR LOCK indicator lights
will remain on.
When disengaging Rear Electronic Locker, the
indicator lights in the instrument cluster and on
the REAR LOCK button will begin to flash. When
the shift is complete the REAR LOCK indicator
lights will remain off.
Shifting into or out of Rear Electronic Locker is
possible with the vehicle completely stopped;
however, difficulty may occur due to the mating
clutch teeth not being properly aligned. Several
attempts may be required for clutch teeth align-
ment and shift completion to occur. The
preferred method is for the vehicle to be rolling,
below 15 mph (24 km/h), while including right
and left steering maneuvers to allow for the
clutch teeth to align.
The Rear Electronic Locker System must be
disengaged prior to taking the vehicle out of
4WD LOW range. If 4WD LOW shift conditions/
interlocks are not met, a message will flash from
the instrument cluster display with instructions
on how to complete the requested shift.
SELEC-TERRAIN
DESCRIPTION
Selec-Terrain allows the driver to specify the
driving surface to allow the vehicle systems to
provide the best performance possible across a
wide range of conditions.
Rotate the Selec-Terrain knob to select the desired
mode.
Selec-Terrain Switch
Selec-Terrain offers the following modes:
AUTO — Fully automatic, full-time four-wheel
drive operation can be used on and off road.
Balances traction with a seamless steering feel
to provide improved handling and acceleration.
SNOW — Tuning set for additional stability in
inclement weather. Use when driving on loose
traction surfaces such as snow, while either on
or off road. When in SNOW mode (depending on
certain operating conditions), the transmission
may use SECOND gear (rather than FIRST gear)
during launches, to minimize wheel slippage.
SPORT — This mode alters the transmission's
automatic shift schedule for sportier driving.
Upshift speeds are increased to make full use of
available engine power.
4
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 103
104 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
SPORT mode is not available when 4WD LOW is
selected.
SAND/MUD — Off-road calibration for use on low
traction surfaces such as mud, sand, or wet
grass. The 4WD system provides maximum
capability to all wheels. Some binding may be
felt on high traction surfaces. The electronic
brake system will be adjusted to reduce the
automatic braking of slipping wheels and to
allow the engine to operate without restriction.
ROCK — Off-road calibration is only available in
4WD LOW range. ROCK mode provides the most
aggressive four-wheel drive performance for
extreme off-road terrain. Use for low speed
obstacles such as large rocks, deep ruts, etc.
The driver may notice additional tire scrubbing
and steering wheel feedback while driving in
ROCK mode on higher traction off-road
surfaces. For use only in off-road driving situa-
tions.
NOTE:
ROCK mode is only available on the vehicles
equipped with the Off-Road package.
Activate the Hill Descent Control or Selec-Speed
Control for steep downhill control Ú page 170.
Instrument Cluster Display Messages
When the appropriate conditions exist, a message
will appear in the instrument cluster Ú page 74.
POWER STEERING
The power steering system will provide increased
vehicle response and ease of maneuverability. The
power steering system adapts to different driving
conditions.
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING” or
“POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF -
SERVICE SYSTEM” message and a
steering wheel icon are displayed on the
instrument cluster display screen, it indicates that
the vehicle needs to be taken to an authorized
dealer for service. It is likely the vehicle has lost
power steering assistance Ú page 80.
If the “POWER STEERING SYSTEM HOT -
PERFORMANCE MAY BE LIMITED” message and an
icon are displayed on the instrument cluster
display screen, it indicates that extreme steering
maneuvers may have occurred, which caused an
over temperature condition in the power steering
system. You will lose power steering assistance
momentarily until the over temperature condition
no longer exists. Once driving conditions are safe,
pull over and let the vehicle idle for a few moments
until the light turns off Ú page 80.
NOTE:
Even if the power steering assistance is no
longer operational, it is still possible to steer the
vehicle. Under these conditions there will be a
substantial increase in steering effort, espe-
cially at low speeds and during parking maneu-
vers.
If the condition persists, see an authorized
dealer for service.
STOP/START SYSTEM
The Stop/Start function was developed to reduce
fuel consumption. The system will stop the engine
automatically during a vehicle stop if the required
conditions are met. Releasing the brake pedal or
pressing the accelerator pedal will automatically
restart the engine.
This vehicle has been upgraded with a heavy-duty
battery, starter, as well as other engine parts, to
handle the additional engine starts.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could
pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service
should be obtained as soon as possible.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 104
STARTING AND OPERATING 105
AUTOSTOP MODE
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every
normal customer engine start. At that time, the
system will go into STOP/START READY.
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following
Must Occur:
The system must be in STOP/START READY
state. A STOP/START READY message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster display
within the Stop/Start section Ú page 74.
The vehicle must be completely stopped.
The gear selector must be in a forward gear and
the brake pedal pressed.
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will
move to the zero position, and the Stop/Start
indicator light will illuminate indicating you are in
Autostop. Customer settings will be maintained
upon return to an engine-running condition.
POSSIBLE REASONS THE ENGINE DOES
N
OT AUTOSTOP
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check
many safety and comfort conditions to see if they
are fulfilled. Detailed information about the
operation of the Stop/Start system may be viewed
in the instrument cluster display Stop/Start
Screen. In the following situations, the engine will
not stop:
Driver’s seat belt is not buckled
Driver’s door is not closed
Battery temperature is too warm or cold
Battery charge is low
The vehicle is on a steep grade
Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an
acceptable cabin temperature has not been
achieved
HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower
speed
HVAC is set to MAX A/C
Engine has not reached normal operating
temperature
The transmission is not in a forward or reverse
gear
Hood is open
Part-Time 4WD, 4WD Lock, 4WD LOW, or an
off-road Selec-Terrain mode is selected (if
equipped)
Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient pres-
sure with vehicle in DRIVE (D) position
Accelerator pedal input
Engine temperature is too high
5 mph (8 km/h) threshold has not been
achieved from previous Autostop
Steering angle is beyond threshold
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven
several times without the Stop/Start system going
into a STOP/START READY state under more
extreme conditions of the items listed above.
4
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 105
106 STARTING AND OPERATING
TO START THE ENGINE WHILE IN
A
UTOSTOP MODE
While in a forward gear, the engine will start when
the brake pedal is released or the throttle pedal is
pressed. The transmission will automatically
re-engage upon engine restart.
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start
Automatically While In Autostop Mode:
The transmission gear selector is moved out of
DRIVE, except in the PARK position
To maintain cabin temperature comfort
HVAC is set to full defrost mode
HVAC system temperature or fan speed is
manually adjusted
Battery voltage drops too low
Stop/Start OFF switch is pushed
A Stop/Start system error occurs
Part-Time 4WD, 4WD Lock, 4WD LOW, or an
off-road Selec-Terrain mode is selected (if
equipped)
Steering wheel is turned beyond threshold
Conditions That Force An Application Of The
Electric Park Brake While In Autostop Mode:
The driver’s door is open and brake pedal
released
The driver’s door is open and the driver’s seat
belt is unbuckled
The engine hood has been opened
A Stop/Start system error occurs
If the Electric Park Brake (EPB) is applied with the
engine off, the engine may require a manual
restart and the EPB may require a manual release
(press brake pedal and push EPB switch).
TO MANUALLY TURN OFF THE STOP/
S
TART SYSTEM
Stop/Start OFF Switch
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the
switch bank). The light on the switch will illuminate.
The “STOP/START OFF” message will appear in the
instrument cluster display and the Autostop mode
will be disabled Ú page 74.
NOTE:
The Stop/Start system will reset itself back to the
ON mode every time the ignition is turned OFF and
back ON.
TO MANUALLY TURN ON THE STOP/
S
TART SYSTEM
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the
switch bank). The light on the switch will turn off.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start system,
the system will not shut down the engine. A
“SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message and a
yellow Stop/Start telltale will appear in the
instrument cluster display Ú page 80.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message
appears in the instrument cluster display, have the
system checked by an authorized dealer.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 106
STARTING AND OPERATING 107
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cruise
Control system, or the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) system:
Cruise Control will keep your vehicle at a
constant preset speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) will adjust the
vehicle speed up to the preset speed to main-
tain a distance with the vehicle ahead.
NOTE:
In vehicles equipped with ACC, if ACC is not
enabled, Fixed Speed Cruise Control will not
detect vehicles directly ahead of you. Always be
aware of the feature selected.
Only one Cruise Control feature can operate at a
time. For example, if Fixed Speed Cruise Control
is enabled, Adaptive Cruise Control will be
unavailable, and vice versa.
CRUISE CONTROL
When engaged, the Cruise Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than
20 mph (32 km/h).
The Cruise Control buttons are located on the right
side of the steering wheel.
Cruise Control Buttons
NOTE:
Do not place the gear selector in NEUTRAL when
Cruise Control is activated. Doing so will disengage
the system.
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Cruise
Control. The cruise indicator light in the instrument
cluster display will illuminate. To turn the system
off, push the on/off button a second time. The
cruise indicator light will turn off. The system
should be turned off when not in use.
1 — On/Off
2 — CANC/Cancel
3 — SET (+)/Accel
4 — RES/Resume
5 — SET (-)/Decel
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your
vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and
you could lose control and have an accident. Do
not use Cruise Control in heavy traffic or on
roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or
slippery.
WARNING!
Leaving the Cruise Control system on when not
in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set
the system or cause it to go faster than you
want. You could lose control and have an
accident. Always leave the system off when you
are not using it.
4
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 107
108 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Cruise Control on. When the vehicle has
reached the desired speed, push and release the
SET (+) or SET (-) button. Release the accelerator
and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
Once a speed has been set, a message “CRUISE
CONTROL SET TO MPH (km/h)” will appear
indicating the set speed. A cruise indicator lamp,
along with set speed will also appear and stay on
in the instrument cluster when the speed is set.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
When the Cruise Control is set, you can increase
speed by pushing the SET
(+) button, or decrease
speed by pushing the SET
(-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will
result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
adjustment of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed
will continue to adjust until the button is released,
then the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will
result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
adjustment of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed
will continue to adjust until the button is released,
then the new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
While the Cruise Control is set, press the
accelerator to pass as you would normally. When
the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the
set speed.
USING CRUISE CONTROL ON HILLS
The transmission may downshift on hills to
maintain the vehicle set speed.
The Cruise Control system maintains speed up and
down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills
is normal. On steep hills, a greater speed loss or
gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive
without Cruise Control.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES
button and release. Resume can be used at any
speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC button,
or normal brake pressure will deactivate the Cruise
Control system without erasing the set speed from
memory.
The following conditions will also deactivate the
Cruise Control without erasing the set speed from
memory:
Vehicle parking brake is applied
Stability event occurs
Gear selector is moved out of DRIVE
Engine overspeed occurs
Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition in
the OFF position, will erase the set speed from
memory.
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the sys-
tem cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehi-
cle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not
use Cruise Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 108
STARTING AND OPERATING 109
(Continued)
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
convenience provided by Cruise Control while
traveling on highways and major roadways.
However, it is not a safety system and not designed
to prevent collisions. The Cruise Control function
performs differently
Ú page 107.
ACC will allow you to keep Cruise Control engaged
in light to moderate traffic conditions without the
constant need to reset your Cruise Control. ACC
utilizes a radar sensor and a forward facing
camera designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead
of you.
NOTE:
If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC
will apply limited braking or acceleration (not to
exceed the original set speed) automatically to
maintain a preset following distance, while
matching the speed of the vehicle ahead.
Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifica-
tions to the vehicle will affect the performance
of the Adaptive Cruise Control and Forward Colli-
sion Warning system.
Fixed Speed Cruise Control will not detect vehi-
cles directly ahead of you. Always be aware of
the feature selected Ú page 308.
WARNING!
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a conve-
nience system. It is not a substitute for active
driver involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic,
and weather conditions, vehicle speed,
distance to the vehicle ahead; and, most
importantly, brake operation to ensure safe
operation of the vehicle under all road condi-
tions. Your complete attention is always
required while driving to maintain safe control
of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warn-
ings can result in a collision and death or
serious personal injury.
The ACC system:
Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming
vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a
stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a
disabled vehicle).
Cannot take street, traffic, and weather
conditions into account, and may be
limited upon adverse sight distance condi-
tions.
Does not always fully recognize complex
driving conditions, which can result in
wrong or missing distance warnings.
Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop
and hold the vehicle in the stop position
for approximately three minutes when
following a vehicle ahead. If the vehicle
ahead does not start moving within three
minutes, the parking brake will be acti-
vated, and the ACC system will be
cancelled.
You should switch off the ACC system:
When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy
snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex
driving situations (i.e., in highway
construction zones).
When entering a turn lane or highway off
ramp; when driving on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or
have steep uphill or downhill slopes.
When towing a trailer up or down steep
slopes.
When circumstances do not allow safe
driving at a constant speed.
WARNING!
4
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 109
110 STARTING AND OPERATING
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The buttons on the right side of the steering wheel
operate the ACC system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The instrument cluster display will show the
current ACC system settings. The information it
displays depends on ACC system status.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button until one of the following appears in the
instrument cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed
setting has not been selected, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Set
When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button is pushed,
the display will read “ACC SET.”
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the
instrument cluster display.
The ACC screen may display once again if any of
the following ACC activity occurs:
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
The instrument cluster display will return to the last
display selected after five seconds of no ACC
display activity.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is
20 mph (32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the ready
state, the instrument cluster display will read “ACC
Ready.”
When the system is off, the instrument cluster
display will read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Off.”
NOTE:
You cannot engage ACC under the following condi-
tions:
When in 4WD Low
When the brakes are applied
When the parking brake is applied
When the transmission is in PARK, REVERSE or
NEUTRAL
When the vehicle speed is below the minimum
speed range
When the brakes are overheated
When the driver’s door is open at low speeds
When the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled at low
speeds
When there is a stationary vehicle in front of
your vehicle in close proximity
When ESC Full Off mode is active
1 — CANC/Cancel
2 — Fixed Speed Cruise Control On/Off
3 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
4 — Distance Decrease Button
5 — SET (+)/Accel
6 — RES/Resume
7 — SET (-)/Decel
8 — Distance Increase Button
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 110
STARTING AND OPERATING 111
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) on/off button. The ACC menu in the
instrument cluster display will read “ACC Ready.”
To turn the system off, push and release the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again.
At this time, the system will turn off and the
instrument cluster display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
To Set A Desired Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push
the SET
(+) button or the SET (-) button and
release. The instrument cluster display will show
the set speed.
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control can be used without
ACC enabled. To change between the different
modes, push the
ACC on/off button which turns
the ACC and the Fixed Speed Cruise Control off.
Pushing the
Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off
button will result in turning on (changing to) Fixed
Speed Cruise Control mode.
If ACC is set when the vehicle speed is
below
20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed will default to
20 mph (32 km/h).
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control cannot be set below
20 mph (32 km/h).
If either system is set when the vehicle speed is
above 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be
the current speed of the vehicle.
NOTE:
Keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal can
cause the vehicle to continue to accelerate
beyond the set speed. If this occurs, the
message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in the
instrument cluster display.
If you continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed while ACC is enabled, the system will not
be controlling the distance between your vehicle
and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed will
only be determined by the position of the accel-
erator pedal.
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the ACC or Fixed
Speed Cruise Control systems:
The brake pedal is applied
The CANC (cancel) button is pushed
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) activates
The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE
position
The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control
System (ESC/TCS) activates
The vehicle parking brake is applied
The Trailer Sway Control (TSC) activates
The driver switches ESC to Full Off mode
The braking temperature exceeds normal range
(overheated)
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
system on when not in use is dangerous. You
could accidentally set the system or cause it to
go faster than you want. You could lose control
and have a collision. Always leave the system off
when you are not using it.
WARNING!
In the Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode, the
system will not react to vehicles ahead. In
addition, the proximity warning does not activate
and no alarm will sound even if you are too close
to the vehicle ahead since neither the presence
of the vehicle ahead nor the vehicle-to-vehicle
distance is detected. Be sure to maintain a safe
distance between your vehicle and the vehicle
ahead. Always be aware which mode is selected.
4
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 111
112 STARTING AND OPERATING
The following conditions will only cancel the ACC
system:
Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds
Driver door is opened at low speeds
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
memory if:
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
is pushed
The Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off button is
pushed
The ignition is placed in the OFF position
4WD Low is engaged
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory, push the RES
(resume) button and remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. The instrument cluster display
will show the last set speed.
Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph
(32 km/h) when only Fixed Speed Cruise Control is
being used.
Resume can be used at any speed above 0 mph
(0 km/h) when ACC is active.
NOTE:
If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than
two seconds, then the driver will either have to
push the RES (resume) button, or apply the
accelerator pedal to reengage the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) to the existing set speed.
ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary
vehicle in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
After setting a speed, you can increase the set
speed by pushing the SET
(+) button, or decrease
speed by pushing the SET
(-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will
result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
adjustment of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust in 5 mph incre-
ments until the button is released. The new set
speed is reflected in the instrument cluster
display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will
result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
adjustment of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust in 10 km/h incre-
ments until the button is released. The new set
speed is reflected in the instrument cluster
display.
NOTE:
When you override and push the SET
(+) button or
SET
(-) buttons, the new set speed will be the
current speed of the vehicle.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if
traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming a
set speed that is too high or too low for
prevailing traffic and road conditions could
cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate too
sharply for safe operation. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision and death or
serious personal injury.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 112
STARTING AND OPERATING 113
When ACC Is Active
When you use the SET (-) button to decelerate, if
the engine’s braking power does not slow the
vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed, the
brake system will automatically slow the vehicle.
The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a full
stop when following a vehicle in front. If your
vehicle follows the vehicle in front to a standstill,
after two seconds the driver will either have to
push the RES (resume) button, or apply the
accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC to the
existing set speed.
The ACC system maintains set speed when
driving uphill and downhill. However, a slight
speed change on moderate hills is normal. In
addition, downshifting may occur while climbing
uphill or descending downhill. This is normal
operation and necessary to maintain set speed.
When driving uphill and downhill, the ACC
system will cancel if the braking temperature
exceeds normal range (overheated).
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set
by varying the distance setting between four bars
(longest), three bars (long), two bars (medium) and
one bar (short). Using this distance setting and the
vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets the
distance to the vehicle ahead. This distance
setting appears in the instrument cluster display.
Distance Settings
To increase the distance setting, push the
Distance Increase button and release. Each time
the button is pushed, the distance setting
increases by one bar (longer).
To decrease the distance setting, push the
Distance Decrease button and release. Each time
the button is pushed, the distance setting
decreases by one bar (shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will
maintain the set speed. If a slower moving vehicle
is detected in the same lane, the instrument
cluster display will show the ACC Set With Target
Detected Indicator Light, and the system will adjust
the vehicle speed automatically to maintain the
distance setting, regardless of the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above
the set speed.
The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or
view of the sensor.
The distance setting is changed.
The system disengages Ú page 111.
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited;
however, the driver can always apply the brakes
manually, if necessary.
NOTE:
The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC
system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC
predicts that its maximum braking level is not
sufficient to maintain the set distance. If this
occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE!” will flash in the
instrument cluster display and a chime will sound
while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
capacity.
NOTE:
The “BRAKE!” screen in the instrument cluster
display is a warning for the driver to take action
and does not necessarily mean that the Forward
Collision Warning system is applying the brakes
autonomously.
1 — Longest Distance Setting (Four Bars)
2 — Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars)
3 — Long Distance Setting (Three Bars)
4 — Short Distance Setting (One Bar)
4
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 113
114 STARTING AND OPERATING
Overtake Aid
When driving with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
engaged and following a vehicle, the system will
provide an additional acceleration up to the ACC
set speed to assist in passing the vehicle. This
additional acceleration is triggered when the driver
utilizes the left turn signal and will only be active
when passing on the left hand side.
ACC Operation At Stop
In the event that the ACC system brings your
vehicle to a standstill while following the vehicle in
front, if the vehicle in front starts moving within two
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, your
vehicle will resume motion without the need for
any driver action.
If the vehicle in front does not start moving within
two seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill,
the driver will either have to push the RES (resume)
button, or apply the accelerator pedal to reengage
the ACC to the existing set speed.
NOTE:
After the ACC system holds your vehicle at a stand-
still for approximately three consecutive minutes,
the parking brake will be activated, and the ACC
system will be cancelled.
While ACC is holding your vehicle at a standstill, if
the driver seat belt is unbuckled or the driver door
is opened, the parking brake will be activated, and
the ACC system will be cancelled.
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“WIPE FRONT RADAR SENSOR IN FRONT OF
VEHICLE” WARNING
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning will display and a chime will
sound when conditions temporarily limit system
performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility,
such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may
also become temporarily blinded due to
obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these
cases, the instrument cluster display will display
the above message and the system will deactivate.
This message can sometimes be displayed while
driving in highly reflective areas (i.e. ice and snow,
or tunnels with reflective tiles). The ACC system will
recover after the vehicle has left these areas.
Under rare conditions, when the radar is not
tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this
warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning is active, Fixed Speed Cruise
Control is still available.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
should examine the sensor. It may require cleaning
or removal of an obstruction. The sensor is located
in the center of the vehicle behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC system operating properly, it is
important to note the following maintenance
items:
Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to
damage the sensor lens.
Do not remove any screws from the sensor.
Doing so could cause an ACC system malfunc-
tion or failure and require a sensor realignment.
If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is
damaged due to a collision, see an authorized
dealer for service.
Do not attach or install any accessories near the
sensor, including transparent material or after-
market grilles. Doing so could cause an ACC
system failure or malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system is
no longer present, the system will return to the
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off” state and will resume
function by simply reactivating it.
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver
must ensure that there are no pedestrians,
vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision and death or serious personal injury.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 114
STARTING AND OPERATING 115
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
than once on every trip) without any snow, rain,
mud, or other obstruction, have the radar
sensor realigned at an authorized dealer.
Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an
aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not
recommended. Doing so may block the sensor
and inhibit ACC/FCW operation.
“CLEAN FRONT WINDSHIELD” WARNING
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” warning will display, and a chime will
sound when conditions temporarily limit system
performance. This most often occurs at times of
poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain and
fog. The ACC system may also become temporarily
blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or
ice on windshield and fog on the inside of glass. In
these cases, the instrument cluster display will
read “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” and the system will have degraded
performance.
This message can sometimes be displayed while
driving in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/
FCW system will recover after the vehicle has left
these areas. Under rare conditions, when the
camera is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its
path this warning may temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
should examine the windshield and the camera
located on the back side of the inside rearview
mirror. They may require cleaning or removal of an
obstruction.
When the condition that created limited
functionality is no longer present, the system will
return to full functionality.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
than once on every trip) without any snow, rain,
mud, or other obstruction, have the windshield and
forward facing camera inspected at an authorized
dealer.
SERVICE ACC/FCW WARNING
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster
display reads “ACC/FCW Unavailable Service
Required” or “Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service
Required”, there may be an internal system fault or
a temporary malfunction that limits ACC
functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable
under normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily
unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC again
later, following an ignition cycle. If the problem
persists, see an authorized dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have
detection issues. In these cases, ACC may brake
late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert
and may need to intervene. The following are
examples of these types of situations:
TOWING A TRAILER
Towing a trailer is not recommended when using
ACC.
OFFSET DRIVING
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that
is offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle
merging in from a side lane. There may not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. The offset
vehicle may move in and out of the line of travel,
which can cause your vehicle to brake or
accelerate unexpectedly.
Offset Driving Condition Example
4
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 115
116 STARTING AND OPERATING
TURNS AND BENDS
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the
system may increase or decrease the vehicle
speed for stability, with no vehicle ahead detected.
Once the vehicle is out of the curve, the system will
resume your original set speed. This is a part of
normal ACC system functionality.
NOTE:
On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
USING ACC ON HILLS
ACC performance may be limited when driving on
hills. ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane
depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
conditions, and the steepness of the hill.
ACC Hill Example
LANE CHANGING
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely
in the lane in which you are traveling. In the lane
changing example below, ACC has not yet detected
the vehicle changing lanes and it may not detect
the vehicle until it's too late for the ACC system to
take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is
completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be
attentive and ready to apply the brakes if
necessary.
Lane Changing Example
NARROW VEHICLES
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer
edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not
detected until they have moved fully into the lane.
There may not be sufficient distance to the vehicle
ahead.
Narrow Vehicle Example
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 116
STARTING AND OPERATING 117
STATIONARY OBJECTS AND VEHICLES
ACC does not react to stationary objects or
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in
situations where the vehicle you are following exits
your lane and the vehicle ahead is stopped in your
lane. It will consider this stopped vehicle a
stationary object as it did not previously detect
movement from it. Always be attentive and ready
to apply the brakes if necessary.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between
the rear, and if equipped, the front fascia/bumper
and a detected obstacle when backing up or
moving forward (e.g. during a parking maneuver).
The vehicle brakes may be automatically applied
and released when performing a reverse parking
maneuver if the system detects a possible collision
with an obstacle.
NOTE:
The driver can disable the automatic braking
function by turning ParkSense off via the Park-
Sense switch. The driver can also override auto-
matic braking by changing the gear or by
pressing the gas pedal over 90% of its capacity
during the braking event.
Automatic brakes are not available if the vehicle
is in 4WD Low.
Automatic brakes will not be available if there is
a faulted condition detected with the ParkSense
Park Assist system or the Braking System
Module.
The automatic braking function may only be
applied if the vehicle deceleration is not enough
to avoid colliding with a detected obstacle.
The automatic braking function may not be
applied fast enough for obstacles that move
toward the rear of the vehicle from the left and/
or right sides.
The automatic braking function can be
enabled/disabled from the Customer Program-
mable Features section of the Uconnect system.
ParkSense will retain its last known configura-
tion state for the automatic braking function
through ignition cycles.
The automatic braking function is intended to
assist the driver in avoiding possible collisions with
detected obstacles when backing up in REVERSE
gear.
NOTE:
The system is designed to assist the driver and
not to substitute the driver.
The driver must stay in full control of the
vehicle's acceleration and braking and is
responsible for the vehicle's movements.
4
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 117
118 STARTING AND OPERATING
For limitations of this system, precautions, and
recommendations, see Ú page 122.
ParkSense will retain the last system state
(enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle
when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN
position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear
selector is in REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is
enabled at one of these gear selector positions,
the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph
(11 km/h) or above. The system will become active
again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds
less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h). A display
warning will appear in the instrument cluster
display if the vehicle is in REVERSE and the speed
exceeds 7 mph (11 km/h).
PARKSENSE SENSORS
The six ParkSense sensors (four when vehicle is
not equipped with front sensors), located in the
rear fascia/bumper, and the six ParkSense
sensors located in the front fascia/bumper,
monitor the area in front and behind the vehicle
that is within the sensors’ field of view. The front
sensors detect obstacles from approximately
12 inches (30 cm) up to 47 inches (120 cm) from
the front fascia/bumper. The rear sensors can
detect obstacles from approximately 12 inches
(30 cm) up to 79 inches (200 cm) from the rear
fascia/bumper. These distances depend on the
location, type and orientation of the obstacle in the
horizontal direction.
PARKSENSE DISPLAY
The warning display will turn on indicating the
system status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or
when the vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle has
been detected.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by
showing a single arc in the left and/or right front or
rear regions based on the object’s distance and
location relative to the vehicle.
If an object is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single arc in the left
and/or right rear region and the system will
produce a tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the
object, the display will show the single arc moving
closer to the vehicle and the tone will change from
a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to fast, to
continuous.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 118
STARTING AND OPERATING 119
Front/Rear/Side ParkSense Arcs
1 — No Tone/Solid Arc 7 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
2 — No Tone/Flashing Arc 8 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 9 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
4 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 10 — Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
5 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 11 — Continuous Tone if on course for collision/Flashing Arcs
6 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 12 — Fast Tone if on course for collision/Flashing Arcs
4
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 119
120 STARTING AND OPERATING
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the instrument cluster display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the
warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
79 inches
(200 cm)
79-59 inches
(200-150 cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches
(30 cm)
Audible Alert Chime None
Single 1/2 Sec-
ond Tone
Slow Slow Fast Fast Continuous
Arcs-Left None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs-Center None 10th Solid 9th Solid 8th Solid 7th Flashing 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs-Right None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Radio Volume Reduced No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT
Front Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
47 inches (120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches (30 cm)
Audible Alert Chime None None None Fast Continuous
Arcs-Left None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs-Center None 1st Solid 2nd Flashing 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs-Right None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Radio Volume Reduced No No No Yes Yes
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 120
STARTING AND OPERATING 121
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist
audible alert (chime) after approximately three
seconds when an obstacle has been detected, the
vehicle is stationary, and brake pedal is applied.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Front and Rear chime volume settings can be
selected within the Uconnect system Ú page 150.
The chime volume settings include low, medium,
and high.
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration
state through ignition cycles.
PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be
displayed if Sound and Display is selected within
the Uconnect system Ú page 150.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within
the instrument cluster display Ú page 74. It
provides visual warnings to indicate the distance
between the rear fascia/bumper and/or front
fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.
ENABLING AND DISABLING PARKSENSE
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled
with the ParkSense switch located below
the Uconnect display.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable
the system, the instrument cluster will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five
seconds. When the gear selector is moved to
REVERSE and the system is disabled, the
instrument cluster display will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
NOTE:
When ParkSense is disabled and the gear selector
is moved to the DRIVE position, no warning
message will be displayed.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when
ParkSense is disabled or requires service. The
ParkSense switch LED will be off when the system
is enabled. If the ParkSense switch is pushed, and
the system requires service, the ParkSense switch
LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED will
be on.
SERVICE THE PARKSENSE PARK ASSIST
S
YSTEM
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense
System has detected a faulted condition, the
instrument cluster will actuate a single chime,
once per ignition cycle, and it will display the
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS", or the "PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message for
five seconds. When the gear selector is moved to
REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted
condition, the instrument cluster display will
display a "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED" pop-up message for five
seconds. After five seconds, a vehicle graphic will
be displayed with "UNAVAILABLE" at either the
front or rear sensor location depending on where
the fault is detected. The system will continue to
provide arc alerts for the side that is functioning
properly. These arc alerts will interrupt the
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS", or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED" messages if an object is
detected within the five second pop-up duration.
The vehicle graphic will remain displayed for as
long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
If "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS" appears in the instrument
cluster display make sure the outer surface and
the underside of the rear fascia/bumper and/or
front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow,
ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle
the ignition. If the message continues to appear
see an authorized dealer.
4
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 121
122 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED" message appears in the instrument
cluster display, see an authorized dealer.
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash
soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard
cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.
PARKSENSE SYSTEM USAGE
P
RECAUTIONS
NOTE:
Ensure that the front and rear fascia/bumper
are free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to
keep the ParkSense system operating properly.
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibra-
tions could affect the performance of Park-
Sense.
When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument
cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF.” Further-
more, once you turn ParkSense off, it remains
off until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the
ignition.
When you move the gear selector to the
REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned off,
the instrument cluster will display “PARKSENSE
OFF” for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of
the radio when it is sounding a tone.
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking
care not to scratch or damage them. The
sensors must not be covered with ice, snow,
slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so can
result in the system not working properly. The
ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle
behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle
is behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense
system off if objects such as bicycle carriers,
trailer hitches, etc. are placed within 12 inches
(30 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to
do so can result in the system misinterpreting a
close object as a sensor problem, causing the
“PARKSENSE WIPE REAR SENSORS” message
to be displayed in the instrument cluster.
ParkSense should be disabled when the liftgate
is in the open position. An opened liftgate could
provide a false indication that an obstacle is
behind the vehicle.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be
sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before
backing up. You are responsible for safety and
must continue to pay attention to your
surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recom-
mended that the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly be disconnected from the vehicle
when the vehicle is not used for towing.
Failure to do so can result in injury or damage
to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball
will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the vehicle sounds the
continuous tone. Also, the sensors could
detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly,
depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the
vehicle.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 122
STARTING AND OPERATING 123
SIDE DISTANCE WARNING SYSTEM
The Side Distance Warning system detects the
presence of side obstacles near the vehicle using
the parking sensors located in the front and rear
bumpers.
Side Distance Warning Display
The Side Distance Warning screen will only be
displayed if “Sound and Display” is selected within
the Uconnect system Ú page 150.
The system warns the driver with an acoustic
signal and, when enabled, with visual indications
on the instrument panel display.
NOTE:
Parksense will reduce the volume of the radio if on
when the system is sounding an audible tone. An
audible tone will only sound if a collision is
possible.
Activation/Deactivation
The system can operate only after driving a short
distance and if the vehicle speed is between 0 and
7 mph (0 and 11 km/h). The system can be
activated/deactivated within the Uconnect system.
If the ParkSense System is deactivated via the
ParkSense switch then the Side Distance Warning
system will automatically be deactivated.
Message on the display for Side Distance Warning
feature:
“Wipe Sensors” — This message is displayed in the
case of a failure of the Side Distance Warning
system sensors. Free the bumpers of any
obstacles, ensure that the front and rear fascia/
bumper are free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris
to keep the ParkSense system operating properly.
“System Not Available” — This message is
displayed if the Side Distance Warning system is
not available. The failed operation of the system
might be due to the insufficient voltage from the
battery or other failures on the electrical system.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible
to have the electrical system checked.
ParkSense Usage Precautions
Some conditions may influence the performance
of the Side Distance Warning system:
NOTE:
Ensure that the front and rear fascia/bumper
are free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to
keep the ParkSense system operating properly.
Construction equipment, large trucks, and other
vibrations could affect the performance of Park-
Sense.
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle, including
small obstacles. Parking curbs might be
temporarily detected or not detected at all.
Obstacles located above or below the sensors
will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recom-
mended that the driver looks over his/her
shoulder when using ParkSense.
WARNING ALERTS
Distance
(inches/cm)
Less than
12 inches
(30 cm)
12–24 inches
(30–60 cm)
Arcs-Left 11th Flashing 12th Flashing
Arcs-Right 11th Flashing 12th Flashing
Audible Alert
Chime
Continuous
tone if vehicle
is on course
for a collision
Fast tone if
vehicle is on
course for a
collision
Radio Volume
Reduced
Yes Yes
4
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 123
124 STARTING AND OPERATING
When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument
cluster display will read “PARKSENSE OFF.”
Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense off, it
remains off until you turn it on again, even if you
cycle the ignition key.
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of
the radio when it is sounding a tone.
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking
care not to scratch or damage them. The
sensors must not be covered with ice, snow,
slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so can
result in the system not working properly. The
ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle
behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle
is behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
The presence of a tow hook without a trailer may
interfere with the correct operation of the
parking sensors. Before using the ParkSense
system, it is recommended to remove the
removable tow hook ball assembly and any
attachments from the vehicle when it is not
used for towing operations.
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
intended to assist the driver during parallel,
perpendicular, and parallel park exit maneuvers by
identifying a proper parking space, providing
audible/visual instructions, and controlling the
steering wheel. The ParkSense Active Park Assist
system is defined as “semi-automatic” since the
driver maintains control of the accelerator, gear
selector and brakes. Depending on the driver's
parking maneuver selection, the ParkSense Active
Park Assist system is capable of maneuvering a
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be
sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before
backing up. You are responsible for safety and
must continue to pay attention to your
surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recom-
mended that the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly be disconnected from the vehicle
when the vehicle is not used for towing.
Failure to do so can result in injury or damage
to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball
will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the vehicle sounds the
continuous tone. Also, the sensors could
detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly,
depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle, including
small obstacles. Parking curbs might be
temporarily detected or not detected at all.
Obstacles located above or below the sensors
will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recom-
mended that the driver looks over his/her
shoulder when using ParkSense.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 124
STARTING AND OPERATING 125
vehicle into a parallel or a perpendicular parking
space on either side (i.e., driver side or passenger
side), as well as exiting a parallel parking space.
NOTE:
The driver is always responsible for controlling
the vehicle, responsible for any surrounding
objects, and must intervene as required during
a parking maneuver.
The system is designed to assist the driver and
not to substitute the driver.
During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the driver
touches the steering wheel after being
instructed to remove their hands from the
steering wheel, the system will cancel, and the
driver will be required to manually complete the
parking maneuver.
The system may not work in all conditions (e.g.
environmental conditions such as heavy rain,
snow, etc., or if searching for a parking space
that has surfaces that will absorb the ultrasonic
sensor waves).
New vehicles from the dealer must have at least
30 miles (48 km) accumulated before the Park-
Sense Active Park Assist system is fully cali-
brated and performs accurately. This is due to
the system’s dynamic vehicle calibration to
improve the performance of the feature. The
system will also continuously perform the
dynamic vehicle calibration to account for differ-
ences such as over or under inflated tires and
new tires.
ENABLING AND DISABLING THE
P
ARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST
S
YSTEM
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system
can be enabled and disabled with the
ParkSense Active Park Assist switch,
located on the switch panel below the
Uconnect display.
To enable or disable the ParkSense Active Park
Assist system, push the ParkSense Active Park
Assist switch once (LED turns on). Pushing the
switch a second time will disable the system (LED
turns off).
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will turn
off automatically for any of the following
conditions:
Parking maneuver is completed
Vehicle speed is greater than 18 mph (30 km/h)
when searching for a parking space
Vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (7 km/h)
during active steering guidance into the parking
space
Steering wheel is touched during active steering
guidance into the parking space
ParkSense switch is pushed
Driver's door is opened
Rear liftgate is opened
Electronic Stability Control/Anti-Lock Braking
System intervention
NOTE:
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system allows a
maximum number of shifts between DRIVE and
REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be completed
within the maximum amount of shifts, the system
will cancel and the instrument cluster display will
instruct the driver to complete the maneuver
manually.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will only
operate and search for a parking space when the
following conditions are present:
Gear selector is in DRIVE.
Ignition is in the RUN position.
ParkSense Active Park Assist switch is acti-
vated.
Driver's door is closed.
Rear liftgate is closed.
4
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 125
126 STARTING AND OPERATING
Vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (25 km/h).
Vehicle is not in 4WD Low (if equipped).
The outer surface and the underside of the front
and rear fascias/bumpers are clean and clear
of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction.
When pushed, the LED on the ParkSense Active
Park Assist switch will blink momentarily, and then
the LED will turn off if any of the above conditions
are not present.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is driven above approximately
15 mph (25 km/h) while searching for a parking
space, the instrument cluster display will instruct
the driver to slow down. If the vehicle is driven
above approximately 18 mph (30 km/h), the
system will cancel. The driver must then reactivate
the system by pushing the ParkSense Active Park
Assist switch.
PARALLEL/PERPENDICULAR PARKING
S
PACE ASSISTANCE OPERATION
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
enabled the “Active ParkSense Searching - Press
or to Switch Maneuver” message will
appear in the instrument cluster display. You may
switch to perpendicular parking or Parallel Park
Exit if you desire. The arrow buttons on the left side
of the steering wheel can be used to switch parking
maneuvers.
Active ParkSense Searching
NOTE:
When searching for a parking space, use the
turn signal indicator to select which side of the
vehicle you want to perform the parking
maneuver. The ParkSense Active Park Assist
system will automatically search for a parking
space on the passenger's side of the vehicle if
the turn signal is not activated.
The driver needs to make sure that the selected
parking space for the maneuver remains free
and clear of any obstructions (e.g. pedestrians,
bicycles, etc.).
The driver is responsible to ensure that the
selected parking space is suitable for the
maneuver and free/clear of anything that may
be overhanging or protruding into the parking
space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc. from
surrounding objects/vehicles).
When searching for a parking space, the driver
should drive as parallel or perpendicular
(depending on the type of maneuver) to other
vehicles as possible.
The feature will only indicate the last detected
parking space (example: if passing multiple
available parking spaces, the system will only
indicate the last detected parking space for the
maneuver).
The feature will only detect an available parking
space if there is a vehicle parked on each side
of the parking space.
When an available parking space has been found,
and the vehicle is not in position, you will be
instructed to move forward to position the vehicle
for a perpendicular or parallel parking sequence
(depending on the type of maneuver being
performed).
Space Found — Keep Moving Forward
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 126
STARTING AND OPERATING 127
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be
instructed to stop the vehicle’s movement and
remove your hands from the steering wheel. When
the vehicle comes to a standstill (your hands still
removed from the steering wheel), you will be
instructed to place the gear selector into the
REVERSE position.
The system may then instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete before then instructing to
check surroundings and move backward.
Move Backward Into Parallel Parking Space
Move Backward Into Perpendicular Parking Space
The system may instruct several more gear shifts
(DRIVE and REVERSE), with hands off of the
steering wheel, before instructing the driver to
check surroundings and complete the parking
maneuver.
When the vehicle is in the parking position, the
maneuver is complete and the driver will be
instructed to check the vehicle's parking position,
then shift the vehicle into PARK. The message
“Active ParkSense Complete - Check Parking
Position” will be displayed momentarily.
NOTE:
It is the driver's responsibility to use the brake
and accelerator during the semi-automatic
parking maneuver.
It is the driver's responsibility to use the brake
and stop the vehicle. The driver should check
their surroundings and be prepared to stop the
vehicle either when instructed to, or when driver
intervention is required.
When the system instructs the driver to remove
their hands from the steering wheel, the driver
should check their surroundings and begin to
back up slowly.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will
allow a maximum of six shifts between DRIVE
and REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be
completed within six shifts, the system will
cancel and the instrument cluster display will
instruct the driver to complete the maneuver
manually.
The system will cancel the maneuver if the
vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during
active steering guidance into the parking space.
The system will provide a warning to the driver
at 3 mph (5 km/h) that tells them to slow down.
The driver is then responsible for completing the
maneuver if the system is canceled.
If the system is canceled during the maneuver
for any reason, the driver must take control of
the vehicle.
4
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 127
128 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXITING THE PARKING SPACE
NOTE:
The function does not work for exiting a perpen-
dicular parking space, but only exiting parallel
parking spaces.
Activation
To activate this function, shift to DRIVE then push
the Active ParkSense switch once. After selection,
the system activates and warns the driver on the
instrument panel display about the operations that
have to be carried out to perform the maneuver
correctly.
Selection Of The Maneuver Side
Use the direction indicators to choose the direction
that you want to perform the maneuver. Use the
right arrow indicator to perform the maneuver to
the right side and use the left arrow indicator to
perform the maneuver to the left.
During the maneuver, the system instructs the
driver to shift to REVERSE, and operate the turn
signal in the direction you want to exit. Let go of the
steering wheel and use the brake or accelerator
pedals as instructed, while the system handles the
steering automatically for exiting the parking
space. If the driver continues to carry out a
voluntary or involuntary action on the steering
wheel during the exit maneuver (touching or
holding the steering wheel to prevent its
movement), the maneuver will be interrupted.
Shift To Reverse Then Move Backward
Shift To Drive Then Move Forward
End Of Maneuver
The semi-automatic maneuver ends when the
display shows the message of a completed
maneuver. At the end of the maneuver, the system
gives back the vehicle control to the driver.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when performing paral-
lel or perpendicular parking maneuvers even
when using the ParkSense Active Park Assist
system. Always check carefully behind and in
front of your vehicle, look behind and in front of
you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, ani-
mals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind
spots before backing up and moving forward.
You are responsible for safety and must con-
tinue to pay attention to your surroundings. Fail-
ure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize
every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected
or not detected at all. Obstacles located above
or below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
the ParkSense Active Park Assist system in
order to be able to stop in time when an
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that
the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using the ParkSense Active Park Assist
system.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 128
STARTING AND OPERATING 129
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
LANESENSE OPERATION
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds
above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph
(180 km/h). The LaneSense system uses a
forward looking camera to detect lane markings
and measure vehicle position within the lane
boundaries.
When both lane markings are detected and the
driver drifts out of the lane (no turn signal applied),
the LaneSense system provides a haptic warning
in the form of torque applied to the steering wheel,
as well as a visual warning in the instrument
cluster display, to prompt the driver to remain
within the lane boundaries.
The driver may manually override the haptic
warning by applying force into the steering wheel at
any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected and
the driver drifts across the lane marking (no turn
signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a
visual warning through the instrument cluster
display to prompt the driver to remain within the
lane.
When only a single lane marking is detected, a
haptic or a torque warning will not be provided.
NOTE:
When operating conditions have been met, the
LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s
hands are on the steering wheel and provide an
audible and visual warning to the driver if removed.
The system will cancel if the driver does not return
their hands to the wheel.
TURNING LANESENSE ON OR OFF
The LaneSense button is located on the
switch panel below the Uconnect display.
To turn the LaneSense system on, push the
LaneSense button (LED turns off). A “LaneSense
On” message is shown in the instrument cluster
display.
To turn the LaneSense system off, push the
LaneSense button once (LED turns on).
NOTE:
The LaneSense system will retain the last system
state, on or off, from the last ignition cycle when
the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.
LANESENSE WARNING MESSAGE
The LaneSense system will indicate the current
lane drift condition through the instrument cluster
display.
Base Instrument Cluster Display — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines
are gray when both of the lane boundaries have
not been detected and the LaneSense telltale
is solid white.
System On (Gray Lines/White Telltale)
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
When the LaneSense system is on, the Lane-
Sense telltale is solid white when only the
left lane marking has been detected and the
system is ready to provide visual warnings in the
instrument cluster display if an unintentional
lane departure occurs.
4
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 129
130 STARTING AND OPERATING
When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane departure
situation, the left lane line flashes from white to
gray and the LaneSense telltale changes
from solid white to flashing yellow.
Lane Approached (Flashing White To Gray Line/
Flashing Yellow Telltale)
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar
behavior for a right lane departure when only the
right lane marking has been detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane
lines turn from gray to white to indicate that
both of the lane markings have been detected.
The LaneSense telltale is solid green when
both lane markings have been detected and the
system is “armed” to provide visual warnings in
the instrument cluster display and a torque
warning in the steering wheel if an unintentional
lane departure occurs.
Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Telltale)
When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift
situation, the left lane line turns solid white. The
LaneSense telltale changes from solid green
to solid yellow. At this time torque is applied to
the steering wheel in the opposite direction of
the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of the
lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Sensed (Solid White Line/Solid Yellow Telltale)
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 130
STARTING AND OPERATING 131
When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane departure
situation, the left lane line flashes from white to
gray and the LaneSense telltale changes
from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this time
torque is applied to the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of the
lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Approached (Flashing White To Gray Line/
Flashing Yellow Telltale)
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar
behavior for a right lane departure.
Premium Instrument Cluster Display — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines
are gray when both of the lane boundaries have
not been detected and the LaneSense telltale
is solid white.
System On (Gray Lines/White Telltale)
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
When the LaneSense system is on, the Lane-
Sense telltale is solid white when only the
left lane marking has been detected and the
system is ready to provide visual warnings in the
instrument cluster display if an unintentional
lane departure occurs.
When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane departure
situation, the left lane line flashes from yellow to
gray and the LaneSense telltale changes
from solid white to flashing yellow.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow To Gray Line/
Flashing Yellow Telltale)
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar
behavior for a right lane departure when only the
right lane marking has been detected.
4
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 131
132 STARTING AND OPERATING
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane
lines turn from gray to white to indicate that
both of the lane markings have been detected.
The LaneSense telltale is solid green when
both lane markings have been detected and the
system is “armed” to provide visual warnings in
the instrument cluster display and a torque
warning in the steering wheel if an unintentional
lane departure occurs.
Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Telltale)
When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift
situation, the left lane line turns solid yellow.
The LaneSense telltale changes from solid
green to solid yellow. At this time torque is
applied to the steering wheel in the opposite
direction of the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of the
lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Drift Sensed (Solid Yellow Line/Solid Yellow Telltale)
When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane departure
situation, the left lane line flashes yellow. The
LaneSense telltale changes from solid
yellow to flashing yellow. At this time torque is
applied to the steering wheel in the opposite
direction of the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of the
lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Line/
Flashing Yellow Telltale)
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar
behavior for a right lane departure.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 132
STARTING AND OPERATING 133
CHANGING LANESENSE STATUS
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust the
intensity of the torque warning and the warning
zone sensitivity (early/late) that you can configure
through the Uconnect system Ú page 150.
NOTE:
When enabled the system operates above
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph
(180 km/h).
The warnings are disabled with use of the turn
signal.
The system will not apply torque to the steering
wheel whenever a safety system engages
(Anti-Lock Brakes, Traction Control System,
Electronic Stability Control, Forward Collision
Warning, etc.).
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
Your vehicle is equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an
on-screen image of the rear surroundings of your
vehicle whenever the gear selector is put into
REVERSE. The image will be displayed in the
touchscreen display along with a caution note to
“Check Entire Surroundings” across the top of the
screen. After five seconds this note will disappear.
The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the
vehicle above the rear license plate.
NOTE:
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has program-
mable modes of operation that may be selected
through the Uconnect system Ú page 150.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with
camera delay turned off), the rear camera mode is
exited and the previous screen appears. When the
vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned on), the camera image will continue to
be displayed for up to 10 seconds unless the
following conditions occur: the vehicle speed
exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted
into PARK, the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the
OFF position, or the touchscreen button “X” to
disable the display of the Rear View Camera is
pressed.
Manual Activation Of The Rear View Camera
1. Press the “Controls” button located on the
bottom of the Uconnect display.
2. Press the “Backup Camera” button to turn the
Rear View Camera system on.
NOTE:
If the Rear View Camera was manually activated,
the timer will start again only after the vehicle
speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h).
NOTE:
If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph
(13 km/h), the Rear View Camera image will be
displayed continuously until deactivated via the
touchscreen button “X”, the vehicle is shifted
into PARK, or the ignition is placed in the OFF
position.
The touchscreen button “X” to disable display of
the camera image is made available ONLY when
the vehicle is not in REVERSE.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on
the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and
its projected backup path based on the steering
wheel position. A dashed center line overlay
indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with
parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to
the rear of the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate
distances for each zone:
Zone
Distance To The Rear Of
The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
Green
6.5 ft or greater
(2 m or greater)
4
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 133
134 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the
lens.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
There is no fuel filler cap. Two flapper doors inside
the pipe seal the system.
1. Open the fuel filler door by pushing on the
rear edge of the fuel door.
Fuel Door
2. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe;
the nozzle opens and holds the flapper door
while refueling.
3. Fill the vehicle with fuel, and when the fuel
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
Fuel Filler
4. Keep the nozzle in the filler for five seconds
after nozzle clicks to allow fuel to drain from
the nozzle.
5. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel
door.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera.
Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before
backing up. You are responsible for the safety of
your surroundings and must continue to pay
attention while backing up. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should
only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView
camera is unable to view every obstacle or
object in your drive path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able
to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is
recommended that the driver look frequently
over his/her shoulder when using ParkView.
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open or
the tank is being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light (MIL) to turn on.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 134
STARTING AND OPERATING 135
VEHICLE LOADING
CERTIFICATION LABEL
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration regulations, your vehicle has a
certification label affixed to the driver's side door or
pillar.
This label contains the month and year of
manufacture, Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR), front and rear Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR), and Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). A
Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is included on this
label and indicates the Month, Day and Hour of
manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your
vehicle including driver, passengers, vehicle,
options and cargo. The label also specifies
maximum capacities of front and rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). Total load must be limited
so GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not
exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable
load weight a truck can carry, including the weight
of the driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the
front and rear axles. The load must be distributed
in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is
not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components
in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity
(axle, springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or
suspension components sometimes specified by
purchasers for increased durability does not
necessarily increase the vehicle's GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label
represents the actual tire size on your vehicle.
Replacement tires must be equal to the load
capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire
size listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your
vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total
weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including
vehicle fuel, at full capacity conditions, and with no
occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle. The
front and rear curb weight values are determined
by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale
before any occupants or cargo are added.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle.
You could be burned. Always place fuel
containers on the ground while filling.
WARNING!
4
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 135
136 STARTING AND OPERATING
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front
and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be
determined by weighing it when it is loaded and
ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a
commercial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not
been exceeded. The weight on the front and rear of
the vehicle should then be determined separately
to be sure that the load is properly distributed over
the front and rear axle. Weighing the vehicle may
show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles
has been exceeded but the total load is within the
specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from
front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the
specified weight limitations are met. Store the
heavier items down low and be sure that the
weight is distributed equally. Stow all loose items
securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse
effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles
and the way the brakes operate.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and
information on limits to the type of towing you can
reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a
trailer, carefully review this information to tow your
load as efficiently and safely as possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
coverage, follow the requirements and
recommendations in this manual concerning
vehicles used for trailer towing.
COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS
The following trailer towing related definitions will
assist you in understanding the following
information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo,
and tongue weight. The total load must be limited
so that you do not exceed the GVWR Ú page 135.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight
of all cargo, consumables, and equipment
(permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the
trailer in its “loaded and ready for operation”
condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put
your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The
entire weight of the trailer must be supported by
the scale.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If
you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it can
change the way your vehicle handles. This could
cause you to lose control. Overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
WARNING!
If the Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) is 3,500 lb
(1,587 kg) or more, it is mandatory to use a
weight-distributing hitch to ensure stable
handling of your vehicle. If you use a standard
weight-carrying hitch, you could lose control of
your vehicle and cause a collision.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 136
STARTING AND OPERATING 137
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front
and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front
and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not
exceed either front or rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle
Loading” Ú page 135 for further information.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch
ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of
the load on your vehicle.
Trailer Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied
by the maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
The TSC can be a mechanical telescoping link that
can be installed between the hitch receiver and the
trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable
friction associated with the telescoping motion to
dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions
while traveling.
If equipped, the electronic TSC recognizes a
swaying trailer and automatically applies individual
wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to
attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch
ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle.
These kinds of hitches are commonly used to tow
small and medium sized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing hitch system works by
applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They
are typically used for heavier loads to distribute
trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front axle
and the trailer axle(s). When used in accordance
with the manufacturer's directions, it provides for a
more level ride, offering more consistent steering
and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway
control also dampens sway caused by traffic and
crosswinds and contributes positively to tow
vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway control and
a weight-distributing (load equalizing) hitch are
recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW)
and may be required depending on vehicle and
trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the
maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous
driving condition can result if either rating is
exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle
and have a collision.
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted weight-distributing
hitch system may reduce handling, stability,
braking performance, and could result in a
collision.
Weight-distributing hitch systems may not be
compatible with surge brake couplers. Consult
with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a
reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for
additional information.
4
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 137
138 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATION
The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow, and should be used to assist you in selecting
the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT RATINGS)
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lb (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lb (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 6,000 lb (2,722 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lb (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
Engine/Transmission Model Frontal Area Maximum GTW Maximum TW (See Note)
2.0L Automatic FWD or 4WD 32 sq ft (2.97 sq m) 2,000 lb (907 kg) 200 lb (90 kg)
2.0L Automatic With Trailer Tow Package 4WD 32 sq ft (2.97 sq m) 4,000 lb (1,814 kg) 400 lb (181 kg)
2.4L Automatic With Or Without Trailer Tow Package FWD or 4WD 32 sq ft (2.97 sq m) 2,000 lb (907 kg) 200 lb (90 kg)
3.2L Automatic FWD or 4WD 32 sq ft (2.97 sq m) 2,000 lb (907 kg) 200 lb (90 kg)
3.2L Automatic With Trailer Tow Package 4WD 39.44 sq ft (3.66 sq m) 4,500 lb (2,041 kg) 450 lb (204 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE:
The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and should never exceed the weight referenced on the
Tire and Loading Information placard.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 138
STARTING AND OPERATING 139
(Continued)
TRAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight
stamped on your fascia/bumper or trailer hitch.
Weight Distribution
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
The tongue weight of the trailer.
The weight of any other type of cargo or equip-
ment put in or on your vehicle.
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the trailer
adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options
must be considered as part of the total load on
your vehicle. Refer to the Tire And Loading Infor-
mation placard for the maximum combined weight
of occupants and cargo for your vehicle
Ú page 283.
TOWING REQUIREMENTS
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle
drivetrain components, the following guidelines
are recommended:
CAUTION!
Always load a trailer with 60% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% of the
GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads
balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear
can cause the trailer to sway severely side to
side which will cause loss of control of the
vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier
in front is the cause of many trailer collisions.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow
these guidelines to make your trailer towing as
safe as possible:
Make certain that the load is secured in the
trailer and that it will not shift during travel.
When trailering cargo that is not fully secured,
dynamic load shifts can occur that may be diffi-
cult for the driver to control. You could lose
control of your vehicle and have a collision.
When hauling cargo, or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance, or
damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission,
steering, suspension, chassis structure, or tires.
Safety chains must always be used between
your vehicle and trailer. Always connect the
chains to the frame or hook retainers of the
vehicle hitch. Cross the chains under the trailer
tongue and allow enough slack for turning
corners.
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake
on the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmis-
sion in PARK. Always block or "chock" the trailer
wheels.
GCWR must not be exceeded.
Total weight must be distributed between the
tow vehicle and the trailer such that the
following four ratings are not exceeded:
GVWR
GTW
GAWR
Trailer tongue weight rating for the trailer
hitch utilized.
WARNING!
4
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 139
140 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements — Tires
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a
compact spare tire.
Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) when
towing while using a full size spare tire.
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire
damage before towing a trailer.
Replacing tires with a higher load carrying
capacity will not increase the vehicle's GVWR
and GAWR limits.
Refer to Tires for further information
Ú page 279.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system
or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of
the trailer. This could cause inadequate braking
and possible personal injury.
An electronically actuated trailer brake
controller is required when towing a trailer with
electronically actuated brakes. When towing a
trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated
brake system, an electronic brake controller is
not required.
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers
over 1,000 lb (453 kg) and required for trailers
in excess of 2,000 lb (907 kg).
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And
Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer
size, stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are
required for motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved
trailer harness and connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the
vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer
connector. Refer to the following illustrations.
CAUTION!
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first
500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is driven.
The engine, axle or other parts could be
damaged.
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that
a trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full
throttle. This helps the engine and other parts
of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your
brake system and cause it to fail. You might
not have brakes when you need them and
could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing, you should allow for
additional space between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could
result in an accident.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lb (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do
this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear,
higher brake pedal effort, and longer stopping
distances.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 140
STARTING AND OPERATING 141
NOTE:
Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the
vehicle before launching a boat (or any other
device plugged into vehicle’s electrical connect)
into water.
Be sure to reconnect once clear from water
area.
Four-Pin Connector
Seven-Pin Connector
TOWING TIPS
Before towing, practice turning, stopping, and
backing up the trailer in an area located away from
heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE (D) range can be selected when towing.
The transmission controls include a drive strategy
to avoid frequent shifting when towing. However, if
frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE, use
the AutoStick shift control to select a lower gear.
NOTE:
Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions will improve perfor-
mance and extend transmission life by reducing
excessive shifting and heat build up. This action
will also provide better engine braking.
AutoStick — If Equipped
When using the AutoStick shift control, select
the highest gear that allows for adequate perfor-
mance and avoids frequent downshifts. For
example, choose “5” if the desired speed can be
maintained. Choose “4” or “3” if needed to
maintain the desired speed.
To prevent excess heat generation, avoid
continuous driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle
speed as necessary to avoid extended driving at
high RPM. Return to a higher gear or vehicle
speed when grade and road conditions allow.
Cruise Control — If Equipped
Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
When using the Cruise Control, if you experience
speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h),
disengage until you can get back to cruising
speed.
Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with light
loads to maximize fuel efficiency.
1 — Ground
2 — Park
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Right Stop/Turn
1 — Backup Lamps
2 — Running Lamps
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Ground
5 — Battery
6 — Right Stop/Turn
7 — Electric Brakes
4
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 141
142 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME)
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE
4X4 Models
Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground
Front-Wheel Drive
(FWD) Models
1-Speed Power
Transfer Unit
2-Speed Power Transfer Unit
Flat Tow NONE
NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
See Instructions:
Transmission in PARK
Power transfer unit in N (NEUTRAL)
Tow in forward direction
Dolly Tow
Front OK NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK OK
NOTE:
You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is disabled before towing this vehicle, to avoid inadvertent Electric Park Brake engagement. The Auto
Park Brake feature is enabled or disabled via the customer programmable features in the Uconnect Settings.
When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 142
STARTING AND OPERATING 143
(Continued)
RECREATIONAL TOWING —
F
RONT-WHEEL DRIVE (FWD) MODELS
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
drivetrain will result.
Recreational towing (for front-wheel drive models)
is allowed ONLY if the front wheels are
OFF the
ground. This may be accomplished using a tow
dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow
this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle,
following the dolly manufacturer's
instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Apply the parking brake. Place transmission in
PARK. Turn the engine off.
4. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly,
following the dolly manufacturer's instructions.
5. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN mode, but do
not start the engine.
6. Press and hold the brake pedal.
7. Release the parking brake.
8. Turn the ignition OFF, remove the key fob, and
release the brake pedal.
RECREATIONAL TOWING — 4X4
M
ODELS WITH 1-SPEED POWER
T
RANSFER UNIT
Recreational towing is not allowed. These models
do not have a N (NEUTRAL) position in the power
transfer unit.
NOTE:
This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle
trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground.
RECREATIONAL TOWING — 4X4
M
ODELS WITH 2-SPEED POWER
T
RANSFER UNIT
The power transfer unit must be shifted into N
(NEUTRAL) and the transmission must be in PARK
for recreational towing. The N (NEUTRAL) selection
button is adjacent to the 4WD selector switch.
Shifts into and out of N (NEUTRAL) can take place
with the selector switch in any mode position.
CAUTION!
Towing with the front wheels on the ground
will cause severe transmission damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is
released, and remains released, while being
towed.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle with
ANY of its wheels on the
ground can cause severe transmission and/or
power transfer unit damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
DO NOT dolly tow any 4x4 vehicle. Towing with
only one set of wheels on the ground (front or
rear) will cause severe transmission and/or
power transfer unit damage. Tow with all four
wheels either ON the ground, or OFF the
ground (using a vehicle trailer).
Tow only in a forward direction. Towing this
vehicle backwards can cause severe damage
to the power transfer unit.
The transmission must be in PARK for recre-
ational towing.
Before recreational towing, perform the proce-
dure outlined under “Shifting into N
(NEUTRAL)” to be certain that the power
transfer unit is fully in N (NEUTRAL). Other-
wise, internal damage will result.
4
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 143
144 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shifting Into N (NEUTRAL)
Use the following procedure to shift the 4WD
system into N (NEUTRAL).
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on level
ground, and shift the transmission to PARK.
2. Turn the engine off.
3. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN position, but
do not start the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push
and hold the recessed N (NEUTRAL) button
(located by the selector switch) for four
seconds. The light behind the N symbol will
blink, indicating shift in progress. The light will
stop blinking (stay on solid) when the shift to N
(NEUTRAL) is complete.
Neutral Button
7. After the shift is completed and the N
(NEUTRAL) light stays on, release the N
(NEUTRAL) button.
8. Start the engine.
9. Release the parking brake.
10. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
11. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and
ensure that there is no vehicle movement.
12. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
13. Apply the parking brake.
14. Shift the transmission into PARK, turn the
engine off, and remove the key fob.
15. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a
suitable tow bar.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
and/or power transfer unit damage. Damage
from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is
released, and remains released, while being
towed.
Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow
bar on your vehicle. The fascia/bumper face
bar will be damaged.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you
leave the vehicle unattended with the power
transfer unit in the N (NEUTRAL) position without
first fully engaging the parking brake. The N
(NEUTRAL) position disengages both the front
and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and
will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the
transmission is in PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is not
in the vehicle, unless the vehicle is otherwise
secured (for example, when attached to the tow
vehicle).
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain
that the power transfer unit is fully in N
(NEUTRAL) before recreational towing to prevent
damage to internal parts.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 144
STARTING AND OPERATING 145
16. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN position, but
do not start the engine.
17. Press and hold the brake pedal.
18. Release the parking brake.
19. Turn the ignition OFF, remove the key fob, and
release the brake pedal.
NOTE:
When towing this vehicle behind another
vehicle, the parking brake must be released.
Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must
be met before pushing the N (NEUTRAL) button,
and must continue to be met until the shift has
been completed. If any of these requirements
are not met before pushing the N (NEUTRAL)
button or are no longer met during the shift,
then the N (NEUTRAL) indicator light will flash
continuously until all requirements are met or
until the N (NEUTRAL) button is released.
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position for
a shift to take place and for the position indi-
cator lights to be operable. If the ignition is not
in the ON/RUN position, the shift will not take
place and no position indicator lights will be on
or flashing.
A flashing N (NEUTRAL) position indicator light
indicates that shift requirements have not been
met.
Shifting Out Of N (NEUTRAL)
Use the following procedure to prepare your
vehicle for normal usage.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving
it connected to the tow vehicle.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN position, but
do not start the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push
and hold the recessed power transfer unit N
(NEUTRAL) button (located by the selector
switch) for one second.
Neutral Button
7. When the N (NEUTRAL) indicator light turns off,
release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
8. After the N (NEUTRAL) button has been
released, the power transfer unit will shift to
the position indicated by the selector switch.
NOTE:
When shifting the power transfer unit out of N
(NEUTRAL), the engine should remain off to avoid
gear clash.
9. Shift the transmission into PARK.
10. Release the brake pedal.
11. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
12. Start the engine.
13. Press and hold the brake pedal.
14. Release the parking brake.
15. Shift the transmission into DRIVE, release the
brake pedal, and check that the vehicle
operates normally.
16. Re-enable the Auto Park Brake feature, if
desired.
4
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 145
146 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must
be met before pushing the N (NEUTRAL) button,
and must continue to be met until the shift has
been completed. If any of these requirements
are not met before pushing the N (NEUTRAL)
button or are no longer met during the shift, the
N (NEUTRAL) indicator light will flash continu-
ously until all requirements are met or until the
N (NEUTRAL) button is released.
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position for
a shift to take place and for the position indi-
cator lights to be operable. If the ignition is not
in the ON/RUN position, the shift will not take
place and no position indicator lights will be on
or flashing.
A flashing N (NEUTRAL) position indicator light
indicates that shift requirements have not been
met.
DRIVING TIPS
ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a
narrower track to make them capable of
performing in a wide variety of off-road
applications. Specific design characteristics give
them a higher center of gravity than conventional
passenger cars.
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a
better view of the road, allowing you to anticipate
problems. They are not designed for cornering at
the same speeds as conventional passenger cars
any more than sports cars are designed to perform
satisfactorily in off-road conditions. Avoid sharp
turns or abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles
of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly
may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover.
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
When To Use 4WD LOW Range
When off-road driving, shift to 4WD LOW for
additional traction and control on slippery or
difficult terrain, ascending or descending steep
hills, and to increase low-speed pulling power
(refer to “All Wheel Drive and Four-Wheel Drive
Operation” in this section for further details). This
range should be limited to extreme situations such
as deep snow, mud, or sand where additional low
speed pulling power is needed. Vehicle speeds in
excess of 25 mph (40 km/h) should be avoided
when in 4WD LOW range.
Driving Through Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
water, there are a number of precautions that
must be considered before entering the water:
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to
ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
If you must drive through water, try to determine
the depth and the bottom condition (and location
of any obstacles) prior to entering. Proceed with
caution and maintain a steady controlled speed
less than 5 mph (8 km/h) in deep water to
minimize wave effects.
CAUTION!
When driving through water, do not exceed
5 mph (8 km/h). Always check water depth
before entering as a precaution, and check all
fluids afterward. Driving through water may
cause damage that may not be covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 146
STARTING AND OPERATING 147
Flowing Water
If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm
run-off) avoid crossing until the water level recedes
and/or the flow rate is reduced. If you must cross
flowing-water, avoid depths in excess of 9 inches
(22 cm). The flowing water can erode the
streambed causing your vehicle to sink into deeper
water. Determine exit point(s) that are downstream
of your entry point to allow for drifting.
Standing Water
Avoid driving in standing water deeper than
16 inches (40.5 cm), and reduce speed
appropriately to minimize wave effects. Maximum
speed in 16 inches (40.5 cm) of water is less than
5 mph (8 km/h).
(Trailhawk only): Avoid driving in standing water
deeper than 19 inches (48 cm), and reduce speed
appropriately to minimize wave effects. Maximum
speed in 19 inches (48 cm) of water is less than
5 mph (8 km/h).
Maintenance
After driving through deep water, inspect your
vehicle fluids and lubricants (engine, transmission,
Power Transfer Unit, and Rear Drive Module) to
ensure they have not been contaminated.
Contaminated fluids and lubricants (milky, foamy
in appearance) should be flushed/changed as
soon as possible to prevent component damage.
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for
additional control at slower speeds, shift the
transmission to a low gear and shift the 4WD
system to the appropriate terrain mode, using
4WD LOW if necessary Ú page 100. Only shift into
a lower gear to maintain forward motion.
Over-revving the engine can spin the wheels and
traction will be lost.
Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads
because engine braking may cause skidding and
loss of control.
Hill Climbing
NOTE:
Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the
conditions at the crest and/or on the other side.
Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transmission
to a lower gear and shift the 4WD system to 4WD
LOW. Use FIRST gear and 4WD LOW for very steep
hills.
NOTE:
Brakes should be applied at increased slippage,
but before coming to a stop to avoid digging into
the loose surface and rendering the operator of the
vehicle stuck/immobile.
If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing
a steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop
and immediately apply the brakes. Once stopped,
shift to REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill
allowing the compression braking of the engine to
help regulate your speed. If the brakes are
required to control vehicle speed, apply them
lightly and avoid locking or skidding the tires.
NOTE:
Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill —
drive straight up or down.
If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest
of a hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain
headway by turning the front wheels slowly left and
right. This may provide a fresh “bite” into the surface
and may provide traction to complete the climb.
WARNING!
If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot
make it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never
attempt to turn around. To do so may result in tip-
ping and rolling the vehicle. Always back straight
down a hill in REVERSE gear carefully. Never back
down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the brake.
4
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 147
148 STARTING AND OPERATING
Traction Downhill
Shift the transmission into a low gear and the 4WD
system to 4WD LOW range or Select Hill Descent
Control if equipped Ú page 170. Let the vehicle go
slowly down the hill with all four wheels turning
against engine compression drag. This will permit
you to control the vehicle speed and direction.
When descending mountains or hills, repeated
braking can cause brake fade with loss of braking
control. Avoid repeated heavy braking by
downshifting the transmission whenever possible.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your
vehicle than does most on-road driving. After going
off-road, it is always a good idea to check for
damage.
Completely inspect the underbody of your
vehicle. Check tires, body structure, steering,
suspension, and exhaust system for damage.
Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and
clean as required.
Check threaded fasteners for looseness, partic-
ularly on the chassis, drivetrain components,
steering, and suspension. Retighten them, if
required, and torque to the values specified in
the Service Manual.
Check for accumulations of plants or brush.
These things could be a fire hazard. They might
hide damage to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle
pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan,
brake rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle
yokes inspected and cleaned as soon as
possible.
Impacted material can cause wheel imbalance.
Freeing the wheels of impacted material will
likely rectify imbalance condition.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the braking
system may cause excessive wear or
unpredictable braking performance. Full braking
power may not be available to prevent a
collision. If you have been operating your vehicle
in dirty conditions, inspect and clean the braking
components as soon as possible.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 148
149
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect
4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display system, refer
to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration
purposes only and may not reflect exact software
for your vehicle.
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may
be equipped with both wired and wireless
networks. These networks allow your vehicle to
send and receive information. This information
allows systems and features in your vehicle to
function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security
features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and
unlawful access to vehicle systems and wireless
communications. Vehicle software technology
continues to evolve over time and FCA US LLC,
working with its suppliers, evaluates and takes
appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a
computer or other devices, your vehicle may
require software updates to improve the usability
and performance of your systems or to reduce the
potential risk of unauthorized and unlawful access
to your vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to
your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the
most recent version of vehicle software (such as
Uconnect software) is installed.
NOTE:
FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you
directly regarding software updates.
To help further improve vehicle security and
minimize the potential risk of a security breach,
vehicle owners should:
Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com
(US Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca
(Canadian Residents) to learn about avail-
able Uconnect software updates.
Only connect and use trusted media
devices (e.g. personal mobile phones,
USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications
cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully
intercept information and private communications
without your consent Ú page 89.
WARNING!
It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems
are breached. It may be possible that vehicle
systems, including safety related systems,
could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control
could occur that may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
ONLY insert trusted devices/components into
your vehicle. Media of unknown origin could
possibly contain malicious software, and if
installed in your vehicle, it may increase the
possibility for vehicle systems to be breached.
As always, if you experience unusual vehicle
behavior, take your vehicle to your nearest
authorized dealer immediately.
5
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 149
150 MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of
buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the
faceplate located on the center of the instrument
panel. These buttons allow you to access and
change the Customer Programmable Features.
Many features can vary by vehicle.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below and/or
beside the Uconnect system in the center of the
instrument panel. In addition, there is a Scroll/
Enter control knob located on the right side. Turn
the control knob to scroll through menus and
change settings. Push the center of the control
knob one or more times to select or change a
setting.
Your Uconnect system may also have Screen Off
and Mute buttons on the faceplate.
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to turn
off the Uconnect screen. Push the button again or
tap the screen to turn the screen on.
Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a Menu
or certain option on the Uconnect system.
CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Buttons On
Faceplate And Buttons On Touchscreen
For the Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch
Display
Press the Apps button, then press the Settings
button on the touchscreen to display the menu
setting screen. In this mode, the Uconnect system
allows you to access programmable features.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature
settings may vary.
All settings should be changed with the ignition
in the ON/RUN position.
When making a selection, only press one button at
a time to enter the desired menu. Once in the
desired menu, press and release the preferred
setting option until a check mark appears next to
the setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Once the setting is complete, press the X
button on the touchscreen to close out of the
settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow
button on the right side of the screen will allow you
to toggle up or down through the available settings.
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 150
MULTIMEDIA 151
Language
Display
When the Language button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different language options. Once an option is selected, the system will
display in the chosen language. The available setting is:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Language
This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and the
Instrument Cluster Display. The available languages are English, Français, and
Español.
When the Display button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the options related to the theme (if equipped), brightness, and color of the
touchscreen. The available settings are:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Display Mode
This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the system
set it automatically. The “Auto” setting has the system automatically adjust the
display brightness. The “Manual” setting will allow the user to adjust the
brightness of the display.
Display Brightness With Headlights ON
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To
access this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+” setting will
increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
5
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 151
152 MULTIMEDIA
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To
access this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+” setting will
increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
Keyboard
This setting will change the keyboard type on the display. The selectable
keyboards are “ABCDEF Keyboard”, “QWERTY Keyboard”, and “AZERTY
Keyboard”.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Control Screen Timeout
This setting allows you to set the Control Screen to turn off automatically after
five seconds or stay open until manually closed.
Navigation Next Turn Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster This setting will display Navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster
This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the
Instrument Cluster Display.
Setting Name Description
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 152
MULTIMEDIA 153
Units
Voice
When the Units button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different measurement options. The selected unit of measurement will display in
the instrument cluster display and Navigation system (if equipped). The available settings are:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
US This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to US.
Metric This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to Metric.
Custom
This setting changes the “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km), “Fuel
Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi, kPa,
or bar), or “Temperature” (°C or °F) units of measurement independently.
When the Voice button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s Voice Recognition feature.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Voice Response Length
This setting will change the response length for the Voice Recognition system.
The “Brief” setting provides a shortened audio description from the system.
The “Detailed” setting provides the full audio description from the system.
Show Command List
This setting will allow you to turn the Command List on or off. The “Always”
setting will always show the Command List. The “With Help” setting will show
the Command List and provide a brief description of what the command does.
The “Never” setting will turn the Command List off.
5
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 153
154 MULTIMEDIA
Clock
When the Clock button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s internal clock.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Sync Time With GPS
This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system. The system
will control the time via the GPS location.
Set Time And Format/Time Format
This setting will allow you set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS
must be off for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the
time to a 12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour
format.
Set Time Hours
This setting will allow you to set the hours. Sync Time With GPS must be off for
this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the hours. The “-”
setting will decrease the hours.
Set Time Minutes
This setting will allow you to set the minutes. Sync Time With GPS must be off
for this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the minutes. The
“-” setting will decrease the minutes.
Show Time in Status Bar This setting will place the time in the radio’s status bar.
Set Date
This setting will allow you to set the day, month and year. Using “+” or “-”, you
can scroll through the available days, months, and years.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 154
MULTIMEDIA 155
Camera
Safety/Driving Assistance
When the Camera button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s camera features.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
This setting will add a delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when shifting out
of REVERSE.
Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines on or off.
Fixed ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Fixed ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines on or off.
When the Safety/Driving Assistance button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s safety settings. These options
will differ depending on the features equipped on the vehicle. The settings may display in list form or within subfolders on the screen. To access a subfolder,
select the desired folder; the available options related to that feature will then display on the screen.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity
This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision Warning
(FCW) alert sounds. The “Medium” setting will have the FCW system signal
when an object is in view, and the possibility of a collision is detected. The
“Near” setting will have the FCW system signal when the object is closer to the
vehicle. The “Far” setting will have the FCW system signal when an object is at
a far distance from the vehicle.
5
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 155
156 MULTIMEDIA
Forward Collision Warning
This setting will turn the Forward Collision system on or off. The “Off” setting
will deactivate the FCW system. The “Warning Only” setting will provide only
an audible chime when a collision is detected. The “Warning + Active Braking”
setting will provide an audible chime and apply brake pressure when a
collision is detected.
LaneSense Warning
This setting will change the distance at which the steering wheel will provide
lane departure feedback. The available settings are “Early”, “Medium”, and
“Late”.
LaneSense Strength
This setting will change the strength of the steering wheel feedback during a
lane departure. The available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
ParkSense
This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is
detected and provide both an audible chime and a visual display.
Front ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Front ParkSense system. The available
settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The available
settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Braking Assist
This setting will provide braking assist if the Rear ParkSense system senses a
collision with an object.
Blind Spot Alert
This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is detected
in a vehicle’s blind spot. The “Off” setting will turn off Blind Spot Alert. The
“Lights” setting will activate the Blind Spot Alert lights on the outside mirrors.
The “Lights & Chime” setting will activate both the lights on the outside
mirrors and an audible chime.
Hill Start Assist This setting will turn the Hill Start Assist system on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines on or off.
Setting Name Description
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 156
MULTIMEDIA 157
Brakes
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
This setting will add a delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when shifting out
of REVERSE.
Side Distance Warning
This setting will turn the Side Distance Warning on or off and set how the
system will communicate with the user. The “Off” setting will deactivate the
system. The “Sound” setting will provide an audible chime to the user. The
“Sound And Display” setting will provide both an audible chime and a visual
display.
Side Distance Warning Volume
This setting will adjust the warning for side distance. The available options are
“Off”, “Sound Only”, and “Sound & Display”.
Tire Fill Assist This setting will turn the Tire Fill Assist on or off.
Setting Name Description
When the Brakes button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display settings related to the vehicle’s brake system.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto Park Brake This setting will turn the Auto Park Brake on or off.
Brake Service
This setting will allow you to set the brakes for service. When the setting is
selected, a pop-up will display with “Yes” and “No”.
5
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 157
158 MULTIMEDIA
Mirrors & Wipers
When the Mirrors & Wipers button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s mirrors and wipers.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Tilt Side Mirrors in Reverse
This setting will tilt the outside side-view mirrors when the ignition is in the
ON/RUN position and the transmission gear selector is in the REVERSE
position. The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the
transmission is shifted out of REVERSE. The available settings are “On” and
“Off”.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers This setting will turn the Rain Sensing Auto Wipers on or off.
Headlights with Wipers
This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated. Setting
options are “On” and “Off”.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 158
MULTIMEDIA 159
Lights
When the Lights button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s exterior and interior lights.
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned On or Off. This feature is only allowed by law in the country
of the vehicle purchased.
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights
to shut off after the vehicle is turned off. The available settings are “0 sec”,
“30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlight Illumination On Approach
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights
to shut off after the vehicle is unlocked. The available settings are “0 sec”,
“30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlights with Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock
button is pushed on the key fob on or off. Available settings are “On” and
“Off”.
Auto Dim High Beams This setting will allow you to turn the Auto Dim High Beams on or off.
5
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 159
160 MULTIMEDIA
Doors & Locks
When the Doors & Locks button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to locking and unlocking the vehicle’s doors.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto Unlock On Exit
This setting will unlock the doors when any of the doors are opened from the
inside.
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock
button is pushed on the key fob on or off. Available settings are “On” and
“Off”.
Sound Horn With Lock
This setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed on the key
fob. The “Off” setting will not sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed.
The “1st Press” setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed
once. The “2nd Press” setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is
pushed twice.
Sound Horn With Remote Start
This setting will sound the horn when the remote start is activated from the
key fob.
Remote Door Unlock, Door Lock/1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
This setting will change how many pushes of the Unlock button on the key fob
are needed to unlock all the doors. The “Driver Door” setting will only unlock
the driver door on the first push on the Unlock button. The “All Doors” setting
will unlock all doors on the first push of the Unlock button.
Passive Entry
This setting will allow you to turn the Passive Entry feature (Keyless
Enter ‘N Go™) on or off.
Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob
This setting will recall preset radio stations and driver seat position that have
been linked to the key fob.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 160
MULTIMEDIA 161
Seats & Comfort
Power Liftgate Alert
This setting will chime an audible alert when the power liftgate is raising or
lowering. Selectable options are “On” and “Off”.
Hands Free Power Liftgate
This setting will use hands-free technology to automatically open or close the
power liftgate. Selectable options are “On” and “Off”.
Setting Name Description
When the Seats & Comfort button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s comfort systems when remote start
has been activated or the vehicle has been started.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort system and heated seats or
heated steering wheel when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is
started. The “Off” setting will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote
Start” setting will only activate the comfort systems when using Remote Start.
The “All Start” setting will activate the comfort systems whenever the vehicle
is started.
5
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 161
162 MULTIMEDIA
Key Off Options/Engine Off Options
Audio
When the Key Off Options/Engine Off Options button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to vehicle shut off. These settings
will only activate when the ignition is set to OFF.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Easy Exit Seat This setting adjusts the seats to make exiting the vehicle easier.
Engine Off Power Delay
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is
turned off. When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate. The
available settings are “0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time the headlights remain on
after the vehicle has been turned off. The available settings are “0 sec”,
“30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change the audio
location within the vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Balance/Fade
This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/back
and left/right of the vehicle. The Speaker icon can be moved to set audio
location.
Equalizer This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the audio.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 162
MULTIMEDIA 163
Phone/Bluetooth®
Speed Adjusted Volume
This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher setting,
the volume will increase more as the vehicle speeds up. The available settings
are “Off”, “1”, “2”, and “3”.
Surround Sound This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
AUX Volume Offset
This setting will tune the audio levels from a device connected through the
AUX port. The available settings are “+” and “-”.
Auto Play This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected device.
Loudness This setting will improve audio quality at lower volumes.
Setting Name Description
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external audio
device or smartphone. The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster
This setting will activate phone message pop-ups in the Instrument Cluster
Display.
Do Not Disturb
This setting will open the Do Not Disturb settings menu. The following settings
are “Auto Reply” (both, text, call), “Auto Reply Message” (custom, default), and
“Custom Auto Reply Message” (create message).
Paired Phones This setting will show the list of paired phones.
Paired Audio Sources This setting will show the list of paired audio sources.
Paired Phones And Audio Devices This setting will show the list of paired phones and audio devices.
5
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 163
164 MULTIMEDIA
SiriusXM® Setup — If Equipped
When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to SiriusXM® satellite radio. These settings can be used
to skip specific radio channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.
NOTE:
A subscription to SiriusXM® satellite radio is required for these settings to be functional.
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Tune Start
This setting will play the current song from the beginning when you tune to a
music channel using one of the 12 presets.
Channel Skip
This setting allows you to set channels that you wish to skip. A channel list will
display of the skipped channels.
Subscription Information
This menu provides SiriusXM® subscription information. SiriusXM® Travel
Link is a separate subscription.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 164
MULTIMEDIA 165
Clear Personal Data/Restore Settings
System Information
When the Clear Personal Data/Restore Settings button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect system
back to its default settings. These settings can clear personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Restore Settings
This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory
default.
Reset App Drawer This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
Clear Personal Data
This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all personal
data from the system, including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
When the System Information button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the radio system information.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Software Licenses This will display the software licensing information screen.
5
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 165
166 MULTIMEDIA
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being
on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy
performance from your radio. This condition may
be lessened or eliminated by repositioning the
mobile phone within the vehicle. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily improve from repositioning
the mobile phone, it is recommended that the
volume be turned down or off during mobile phone
operation when not using the Uconnect system.
REGULATORY AND SAFETY
I
NFORMATION
US/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless
radio is far below the FCC and IC radio frequency
exposure limits. Nevertheless, the wireless radio
will be used in such a manner that the radio is 8 in
(20 cm) or further from the human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within
guidelines found in radio frequency safety
standards and recommendations, which reflect
the consensus of the scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal
wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The
level of energy emitted is far less than the
electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless
devices such as mobile phones. However, the use
of wireless radios may be restricted in some
situations or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are
encouraged to ask for authorization before turning
on the wireless radio Ú page 308.
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with Off-Road
Pages, which displays vehicle information related
to the drivetrain, transfer case, and coolant/oil
gauges.
To access Off-Road Pages, press the Apps button
on the touchscreen, and then select “Off-Road
Pages”.
Main Menu
Off-Road Pages has the following selectable pages:
Vehicle Dynamics
Pitch & Roll — If Equipped
Accessory Gauge
1 — Uconnect Apps Button
2 — Off-Road Pages App
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 166
MULTIMEDIA 167
OFF-ROAD PAGES STATUS BAR
The Off-Road Pages Status Bar is located along the
bottom of Off-Road Pages and is present in each of
the five selectable page options. It provides
continually updating information for the following
items:
1. Current Transfer Case Status (only appears
when in 4WD Low)
2. Current Latitude/Longitude
3. Current Altitude of the vehicle
4. Status of Hill Descent
DRIVETRAIN
The Drivetrain page displays information
concerning the vehicle’s drivetrain.
The following information is displayed:
1. Steering angle in degrees
2. Status of the Front Drivetrain
3. Power Transfer Unit
Drivetrain
PITCH & ROLL
The Pitch & Roll page displays the vehicle’s current
pitch (angle up and down) and roll (angle side to
side) in degrees. The pitch and roll gauges provide
a visualization of the current vehicle angle.
Pitch & Roll Menu
1 — Steering Angle
2 — Front Drivetrain
3 — Power Transfer Unit
1 — Current Pitch
2 — Current Roll
5
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 167
168 MULTIMEDIA
ACCESSORY GAUGES
The Accessory Gauges page displays the current
status of the vehicle’s Coolant Temperature, Oil
Temperature, Transmission Temperature, and
Battery Voltage.
Accessory Gauges Menu
SELEC-TERRAIN — IF EQUIPPED
The Selec-Terrain page displays the current
Selec-Terrain mode through a high resolution
image. The vehicle must be in the ON/RUN
position to display Selec-Terrain information.
The selectable modes are as follows:
Auto — Default
Snow
Sand
Mud
Rock — Vehicle Must Be In 4WD Low
NOTE:
While in the Selec-Terrain pages, the Off-Road
Pages Status Bar will also display the current
Selec-Terrain mode.
Current Selec-Terrain Mode
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 168
169
(Continued)
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and
brake performance under most braking conditions.
The system automatically prevents wheel lock and
enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that
the ABS is working properly each time the vehicle
is started and driven. During this self-check, you
may hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
related motor noises.
The ABS is activated during braking when the
system detects one or more wheels are beginning
to lock. Road conditions such as ice, snow, gravel,
bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or panic stops
may increase the likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following normal
characteristics when the ABS activates:
ABS motor noise or clicking sounds (you may
continue to hear for a short time after the stop).
Brake pedal pulsations.
A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the
stop.
The ABS is designed to function with the Original
Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires. Modification
may result in degraded ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
The yellow ABS Warning Light will turn on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes on
while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion
of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional
brake system will continue to operate normally if
the ABS Warning Light is on.
WARNING!
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic
equipment that may be susceptible to interfer-
ence caused by improperly installed or high
output radio transmitting equipment. This
interference can cause possible loss of
anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
such equipment should be performed by qual-
ified professionals.
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer.
Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you
need to slow down or stop.
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it
increase braking or steering efficiency beyond
that afforded by the condition of the vehicle
brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
planing.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner that could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
WARNING!
6
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 169
170 SAFETY
If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system
should be serviced as soon as possible to restore
the benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS
Warning Light does not come on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have the light
repaired as soon as possible.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL (EBC)
S
YSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced EBC
system. This system includes Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS),
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD),
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM), Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), Hill Start Assist (HSA), and
Traction Control System (TCS). These systems work
together to enhance both vehicle stability and
control in various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Dynamic
Steering Torque (DST), Hill Descent Control (HDC),
Rain Brake Support (RBS), Ready Alert Braking
(RAB), Selec-Speed Control (SSC), and Trailer Sway
Control (TSC).
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s
braking capability during emergency braking
maneuvers. The system detects an emergency
braking situation by sensing the rate and amount
of brake application and then applies optimum
pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce
braking distances. The BAS complements the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes
very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To
receive the benefit of the system, you must apply
continuous braking pressure during the stopping
sequence (do not “pump” the brakes). Do not
reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no
longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released,
the BAS is deactivated.
Brake System Warning Light
The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the brake
system is not functioning properly and that
immediate service is required. If the Brake System
Warning Light does not come on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have the light
repaired as soon as possible.
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
DST is a feature of the Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) and the Electric Power Steering (EPS)
modules, that provides torque at the steering
wheel for certain driving conditions, in which the
ESC module is detecting vehicle instability. The
torque that the steering wheel receives is only
meant to help the driver realize optimal steering
behavior in order to reach/maintain vehicle
stability. The only notification the driver receives
that the feature is active is the torque applied to
the steering wheel.
NOTE:
The DST feature is only meant to help the driver
realize the correct course of action through small
torques on the steering wheel, which means the
effectiveness of the DST feature is highly
dependent on the driver’s sensitivity and overall
reaction to the applied torque. It is very important
to realize that this feature will not steer the vehicle,
meaning the driver is still responsible for steering
the vehicle.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded
by prevailing road conditions. BAS cannot
prevent collisions, including those resulting from
excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a
BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in
a reckless or dangerous manner, which could
jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of
others.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 170
SAFETY 171
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
EBD function manages the distribution of the
braking torque between the front and rear axles by
limiting braking pressure to the rear axle. This is
done to prevent overslip of the rear wheels to avoid
vehicle instability, and to prevent the rear axle from
entering ABS before the front axle.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
ERM anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and
the speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines
that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle
and vehicle’s speed are sufficient to potentially
cause wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate
brake and may also reduce engine power to lessen
the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM can only
reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during
severe or evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot
prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as
road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking
objects or other vehicles.
NOTE:
ERM is disabled any time the ESC is in “Full Off”
mode (if equipped) Ú page 171.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
ESC enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC
corrects for oversteering or understeering of the
vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate
wheel(s) to counteract the above conditions.
Engine power may also be reduced to help the
vehicle maintain the desired path.
Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more
than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less
than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the
vehicle path intended by the driver and compares
it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual
path does not match the intended path, ESC
applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to
assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer
condition.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
located in the instrument cluster will start to flash
as soon as the ESC system becomes active. The
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also
flashes when the TCS is active. If the ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to
flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible.
Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road conditions.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road
conditions and driving conditions, influence the
chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM
cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers,
especially those that involve leaving the roadway
or striking objects or other vehicles. The
capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user's safety
or the safety of others.
6
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 171
172 SAFETY
(Continued)
ESC Operating Modes
Depending upon model and mode of operation, the
ESC system may have multiple operating modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for ESC.
Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system
will be in this mode. This mode should be used for
most driving conditions. Alternate ESC modes
should only be used for specific reasons as noted
in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes
stuck. This mode may modify TCS and ESC
thresholds for activation, which allows for more
wheel spin than normally allowed.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push
the ESC OFF button and the ESC OFF Indicator
Light will illuminate. To turn the ESC on again,
momentarily push the ESC OFF button and the ESC
OFF Indicator Light will turn off.
NOTE:
For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes, the
push and release of the button will toggle the ESC
modes. Multiple attempts may be required to
return to “ESC On”.
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road condi-
tions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
planing. ESC also cannot prevent accidents
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to
inappropriate driver input for the conditions.
Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner which could
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly
maintain your vehicle, may change the
handling characteristics of your vehicle, and
may negatively affect the performance of the
ESC system. Changes to the steering system,
suspension, braking system, tire type and size
or wheel size may adversely affect ESC perfor-
mance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn
tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any
vehicle modification or poor vehicle mainte-
nance that reduces the effectiveness of the
ESC system can increase the risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
WARNING!
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS function-
ality of ESC (except for the limited slip feature
described in the TCS section) has been
disabled and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will
be illuminated. When in “Partial Off” mode,
the engine power reduction feature of TCS is
disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability
offered by the ESC system is reduced.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when
the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 172
SAFETY 173
(Continued)
Full Off — If Equipped
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road
use only and should not be used on any public
roadways. In this mode, TCS and ESC features are
turned off. To enter the “Full Off” mode, push and
hold the ESC OFF button for five seconds while the
vehicle is stopped with the engine running. After five
seconds, a chime will sound, the ESC OFF Indicator
Light will illuminate, and the ESC OFF message will
display in the instrument cluster. To turn ESC on
again, momentarily push the ESC OFF button.
NOTE:
System may switch from ESC “Full Off” to “Partial
Off” mode when vehicle exceeds a predetermined
speed. When the vehicle speed slows below the
predetermined speed the system will return to ESC
“Full Off”.
ESC modes may also be affected by drive modes (if
equipped).
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light in the instrument cluster will come
on when the ignition is placed in the ON/
RUN mode. It should turn off with the
engine running. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light comes on continuously with the
engine running, a malfunction has been detected
in the ESC system. If this light remains on after
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater
than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer
as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and
the ESC system becomes active. The ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes
when TCS is active. If the ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during
acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply
as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your
speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates
that the Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
is in a reduced mode.
NOTE:
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on
momentarily each time the ignition is placed in
the ON position.
Each time the ignition is placed in the ON posi-
tion, the ESC system will be on even if it was
turned off previously.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive
following the maneuver that caused the ESC
activation.
WARNING!
In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque
reduction and stability features are disabled.
Therefore, enhanced vehicle stability offered
by the ESC system is unavailable. In an emer-
gency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will
not engage to assist in maintaining stability.
ESC “Full Off” mode is intended for
off-highway or off-road use only.
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road condi-
tions. ESC cannot prevent all accidents,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot
prevent collisions.
WARNING!
6
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 173
174 SAFETY
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
HDC is intended for low speed off-road driving
while in 4WD Low. HDC maintains vehicle speed
while descending hills during various driving
situations. HDC controls vehicle speed by actively
controlling the brakes.
HDC Has Three States:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not
activate).
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but
activation conditions are not met, or driver is
actively overriding with brake or throttle
application).
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively
controlling vehicle speed).
Enabling HDC
HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC button, but the
following conditions must also be met to enable
HDC:
The driveline is in 4WD Low
The vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h)
The parking brake is released
The driver door is closed
Activating HDC
Once HDC is enabled it will activate automatically
if driven down a grade of sufficient magnitude. The
set speed for HDC is selectable by the driver, and
can be adjusted by using the gear shift +/-. The
following summarizes the HDC set speeds:
HDC Target Set Speeds
P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but will
not activate.
R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)
9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped
NOTE:
During HDC the +/- shifter input is used for HDC
target speed selection, but will not affect the gear
chosen by the transmission. When actively
controlling HDC the transmission will shift appro-
priately for the driver-selected set speed and corre-
sponding driving conditions.
Driver Override
The driver may override HDC activation with
throttle or brake application at any time.
Deactivating HDC
HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any
of the following conditions occur:
Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle or
brake application.
Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but
remains below 40 mph (64 km/h).
Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient
magnitude, is on level ground, or is on an uphill
grade.
Vehicle is shifted to PARK.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 174
SAFETY 175
Disabling HDC
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of the
following conditions occur:
The driver pushes the HDC button.
The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low.
The parking brake is applied.
The driver door opens.
The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph
(32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds.
The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph
(64 km/h) (HDC exits immediately).
HDC detects excessive brake temperature.
Feedback To The Driver
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the
HDC button has an LED icon, which offers
feedback to the driver about the state HDC is in.
The cluster icon and button lamp will illuminate
and remain on solid when HDC is enabled or
activated. This is the normal operating condition
for HDC.
The cluster icon and button lamp will flash for
several seconds then extinguish when the driver
pushes the HDC button but enable conditions
are not met.
The cluster icon and button lamp will flash for
several seconds then extinguish when HDC
disables due to excess speed.
The cluster icon and button lamp will flash when
HDC deactivates due to overheated brakes. The
flashing will stop and HDC will activate again
once the brakes have cooled sufficiently.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
HSA is designed to mitigate roll back from a
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver
releases the brake while stopped on an incline,
HSA will continue to hold the brake pressure for a
short period. If the driver does not apply the
throttle before this time expires, the system will
release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll
down the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in order for
HSA to activate:
The feature must be enabled.
The vehicle must be stopped.
The parking brake must be off.
The driver door must be closed.
The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
The gear selection must match vehicle uphill
direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward
gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward
gears. The system will not activate if the trans-
mission is in PARK or NEUTRAL.
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in
controlling vehicle speed when descending hills.
The driver must remain attentive to the driving
conditions and is responsible for maintaining a
safe vehicle speed.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start
Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling
may occur, such as on minor hills or with a
loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA is
not a substitute for active driving involvement. It
is always the driver’s responsibility to be
attentive to distance to other vehicles, people,
and objects, and most importantly brake
operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle
under all road conditions. Your complete
attention is always required while driving to
maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision or
serious personal injury.
6
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 175
176 SAFETY
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To
change the current setting, proceed as follows:
If disabling HSA using your instrument cluster
display Ú page 74
If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings
Ú page 150
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll
back while towing a trailer.
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
RBS may improve braking performance in wet
conditions. It will periodically apply a small amount
of brake pressure to remove any water buildup on
the front brake rotors. It functions when the
windshield wipers are in LO or HI speed. When RBS
is active, there is no notification to the driver and
no driver interaction is required.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
RAB may reduce the time required to reach full
braking during emergency braking situations. It
anticipates when an emergency braking situation
may occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is
released by the driver. The Electronic Brake
Controller (EBC) will prepare the brake system for
a panic stop.
Selec-Speed Control (SSC) — If Equipped
SSC is intended for off-road driving in 4WD Low
only. SSC maintains vehicle speed by actively
controlling engine torque and brakes.
SSC has three states:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate).
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but
activation conditions are not met, or driver is
actively overriding with brake or throttle
application).
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively
controlling vehicle speed).
Enabling SSC
SSC is enabled by pushing the SSC button, but the
following conditions must also be met to enable
SSC:
The driveline is in 4WD Low
The vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h)
The parking brake is released
The driver door is closed
The driver is not applying throttle
Activating SSC
Once SSC is enabled it will activate automatically
once the following conditions are met:
Driver releases throttle
Driver releases brake
Transmission is in any selection other than
PARK (P)
Vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h)
The set speed for SSC is selectable by the driver,
and can be adjusted by using the gear shift +/-.
Additionally, the SSC set speed may be reduced
when climbing a grade and the level of set speed
reduction depends on the magnitude of grade. The
following summarizes the SSC set speeds:
SSC Target Set Speeds
1st = .6 mph (1 km/h)
2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
WARNING!
If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there
may not be enough brake pressure to hold
both the vehicle and the trailer on a hill when
the brake pedal is released. In order to avoid
rolling down an incline while resuming accel-
eration, manually activate the trailer brake or
apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to
releasing the brake pedal.
HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting your vehicle.
Also, be certain to place the transmission in
PARK (P).
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision or serious personal injury.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 176
SAFETY 177
3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
8th = 5 mph (8 km/h)
9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped
REVERSE = .6 mph (1 km/h)
NEUTRAL = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
PARK = SSC remains enabled but not active
NOTE:
During SSC the +/- shifter input is used for SSC
target speed selection but will not affect the
gear chosen by the transmission. While actively
controlling SSC the transmission will shift appro-
priately for the driver-selected set speed and
corresponding driving conditions.
SSC performance is influenced by the
Selec-Terrain mode. This difference may be
notable to the driver and may be perceived as a
varying level of aggressiveness.
Driver Override:
The driver may override SSC activation with throttle
or brake application at any time.
Deactivating SSC
SSC will be deactivated but remain available if any
of the following conditions occur:
Driver overrides SSC set speed with throttle or
brake application.
Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but
remains below 40 mph (64 km/h).
Vehicle is shifted to PARK.
Disabling SSC
SSC will deactivate and be disabled if any of the
following conditions occur:
The driver pushes the SSC button.
The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low.
The parking brake is applied.
The driver door opens.
The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph
(32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds.
The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph
(64 km/h) (SSC exits immediately).
Feedback To The Driver:
The instrument cluster has an SSC icon and the
SSC button has an LED which offers feedback to
the driver about the state SSC is in.
The cluster icon and button lamp will illuminate
and remain on solid when SSC is enabled or
activated. This is the normal operating condition
for SSC.
The cluster icon and button lamp will flash for
several seconds then extinguish when the driver
pushes the SSC button but enable conditions
are not met.
The cluster icon and button lamp will flash for
several seconds then extinguish when SSC
disables due to excess speed.
The cluster icon and button lamp will flash then
extinguish when SSC deactivates due to over-
heated brakes.
WARNING!
SSC is only intended to assist the driver in con-
trolling vehicle speed when driving in off road
conditions. The driver must remain attentive to
the driving conditions and is responsible for
maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
6
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 177
178 SAFETY
Traction Control System (TCS)
The TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of
each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is
detected, the TCS may apply brake pressure to the
spinning wheel(s) and/or reduce engine power to
provide enhanced acceleration and stability. A
feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential (BLD)
functions similarly to a limited slip differential and
controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one
wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the
other, the system will apply the brake of the
spinning wheel. This will allow more engine torque
to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD
may remain enabled even if TCS and Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) are in reduced modes.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an
excessively swaying trailer and will take the
appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway.
NOTE:
TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always
use caution when towing a trailer and follow the
trailer tongue weight recommendations
Ú page 136.
When TSC is functioning, the ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light will flash, the engine
power may be reduced and you may feel the
brakes being applied to individual wheels to
attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is
disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial
Off” or “Full Off” modes.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) —
I
F EQUIPPED
BSM uses two radar sensors, located inside the
rear fascia/bumper, to detect highway licensable
vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.)
that enter the blind spot zones from the rear/front/
side of the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM Warning Light
will momentarily illuminate in both outside
rearview mirrors to let the driver know that the
system is operational. The BSM system sensors
operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear
and enters standby mode when the vehicle is in
PARK (P).
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one
lane width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft
(3.7 m). The zone length starts at the outside
mirror and extends approximately 10 ft (3 m)
beyond the rear fascia/bumper of the vehicle. The
BSM system monitors the detection zones on both
sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed
reaches approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher
and will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and
adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 178
SAFETY 179
NOTE:
The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver
about rapidly approaching vehicles that are
outside the detection zones.
The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT
change if your vehicle is towing a trailer. There-
fore, visually verify the adjacent lane is clear for
both your vehicle and trailer before making a
lane change. If the trailer or other object (i.e.,
bicycle, sports equipment) extends beyond the
side of your vehicle, this may result in the BSM
Warning Light remaining illuminated the entire
time the vehicle is in a forward gear
Ú page 150.
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may
experience dropouts (blinking on and off) of the
side mirror warning indicator lamps when a
motorcycle or any small object remains at the
side of the vehicle for extended periods of time
(more than a couple of seconds).
The area on the rear fascia/bumper where the
radar sensors are located must remain free of
snow, ice, and dirt/road contamination so that the
BSM system can function properly. Do not block
the area of the rear fascia/bumper where the
radar sensors are located with foreign objects
(bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
Sensor Location
The BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
appropriate side view mirror based on a detected
object. If the turn signal is then activated, and it
corresponds to an alert present on that side of the
vehicle, an audible chime will also be sounded.
Whenever a turn signal and detected object are
present on the same side at the same time, both
the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In
addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) will
also be muted.
Warning Light Location
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from
three different entry points (side, rear, front) while
driving to see if an alert is necessary. The BSM
system will issue an alert during these types of
zone entries.
6
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 179
180 SAFETY
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from
either side of the vehicle.
Side Monitoring
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on
either side and enter the rear detection zone with
a relative speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative
speed less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle
remains in the blind spot for approximately 1.5
seconds, the warning light will be illuminated. If the
difference in speed between the two vehicles is
greater than 15 mph (24 km/h), the warning light
will not illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
Overtaking/Passing
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert
on stationary objects such as guardrails, posts,
walls, foliage, berms, etc. However, occasionally
the system may alert on such objects. This is
normal operation and your vehicle does not require
service.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 180
SAFETY 181
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that
are traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle
in adjacent lanes Ú page 308.
Opposing Traffic
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
RCP is intended to aid the driver when backing out
of parking spaces where their vision of oncoming
vehicles may be blocked. Proceed slowly and
cautiously out of the parking space until the rear
end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both
sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving
toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum
speed of approximately 3 mph (5 km/h), to objects
moving a maximum of approximately 20 mph
(32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE (R),
the driver is alerted using both the visual and
audible alarms, including reducing the radio
volume.
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be
blocked by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or
vehicles, the system will not be able to alert the
driver.
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid
to help detect objects in the blind spot zones.
The BSM system is not designed to detect
pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your
vehicle is equipped with the BSM system, always
check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your
shoulder, and use your turn signal before
changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a backup
aid system. It is intended to be used to help a
driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking
lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you,
and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals,
other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots
before backing up. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
6
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 181
182 SAFETY
Blind Spot Modes
Blind Spot has three selectable modes of
operation that are available in the Uconnect
system Ú page 150.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate
side view mirror based on a detected object.
However, when the system is operating in Rear
Cross Path (RCP) mode, the system will respond
with both visual and audible alerts when a
detected object is present. Whenever an audible
alert is requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
mode, the BSM system will provide a visual alert in
the appropriate side view mirror based on a
detected object. If the turn signal is then activated,
and it corresponds to an alert present on that side
of the vehicle, an audible chime will also be
sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected
object are present on the same side at the same
time, both the visual and audible alerts will be
issued. In addition to the audible alert the radio (if
on) will also be muted.
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the
BSM system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall
respond with both visual and audible alerts when a
detected object is present. Whenever an audible
alert is requested, the radio is also muted. Turn/
hazard signal status is ignored; the RCP state
always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the
vehicle is started the previously stored mode will
be recalled and used.
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)
W
ITH MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED
FCW with Mitigation provides the driver with
audible warnings, visual warnings (within the
instrument cluster display), and may apply a haptic
warning to warn the driver when it detects a
potential frontal collision. The warnings are
intended to provide the driver with enough time to
react, avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake
Controller (EBC), to calculate the probability of a
forward collision. When the system determines
that a forward collision is probable, the driver will
be provided with audible and visual warnings and
may provide a haptic warning in the form of a brake
jerk.
If the driver does not take action based upon these
progressive warnings, then the system will provide
a limited level of active braking to help slow the
vehicle and mitigate the potential forward collision.
If the driver reacts to the warnings by braking and
the system determines that the driver intends to
avoid the collision by braking but has not applied
sufficient brake force, the system will compensate
and provide additional brake force as required.
If a Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event
begins at a speed below 32 mph (52 km/h), the
system may provide the maximum braking
possible to mitigate the potential forward collision.
If the Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation
event stops the vehicle completely, the system will
hold the vehicle at standstill for two seconds and
then release the brakes.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 182
SAFETY 183
FCW Message
When the system determines a collision with the
vehicle in front of you is no longer probable, the
warning message will be deactivated Ú page 308.
NOTE:
The minimum speed for FCW activation is
1 mph (2 km/h).
The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects
other than vehicles such as guard rails or sign
posts based on the course prediction. This is
expected and is a part of normal FCW activation
and functionality.
It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent
such misuse of the system, after four Active
Braking events within a key cycle, the Active
Braking portion of FCW will be deactivated until
the next key cycle.
The FCW system is intended for on-road use
only. If the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW
system should be deactivated to prevent unnec-
essary warnings to the surroundings.
FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as
overhead objects, ground reflections, objects
not in the path of the vehicle, stationary objects
that are far away, oncoming traffic, or leading
vehicles with the same or higher rate of speed.
FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavail-
able screens.
Turning FCW On Or Off
The FCW button is located in the Uconnect display
in the control settings Ú page 150.
To turn the FCW system on, press the forward
collision button once.
To turn the FCW system off, press the forward
collision button once.
NOTE:
When the FCW is “on”, this allows the system to
warn the driver of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front.
When the FCW is “off”, this prevents the system
from warning the driver of a possible collision
with the vehicle in front. If the FCW is set to “off”,
“FCW OFF" will be displayed in the instrument
cluster display.
When FCW status is set to “Only Warning”, this
prevents the system from providing limited
active braking, or additional brake support if the
driver is not braking adequately in the event of
a potential frontal collision.
When FCW status is set to “Warning and
Braking”, this allows the system to warn the
driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in
front using audible/visual warnings and it
applies autonomous braking.
The system will retain the last setting selected
by the driver after ignition shutdown.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended
to avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW
detect every type of potential collision. The driver
has the responsibility to avoid a collision by
controlling the vehicle via braking and steering.
Failure to follow this warning could lead to
serious injury or death.
6
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 183
184 SAFETY
FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity
The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking status are
programmable through the Uconnect system
Ú page 150.
Far
When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the
“Far” setting and the system status is “Only
Warning”, this allows the system to warn the
driver of a possible more distant collision
with the vehicle in front using audible/
visual warnings.
More cautious drivers that do not mind
frequent warnings may prefer this setting.
Medium
When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the
“Medium” setting and the system status is
“Only Warning”, this allows the system to
warn the driver of a possible collision with
the vehicle in front using audible/visual
warnings.
Near
When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the
“Near” setting and the system status is
“Only Warning”, this allows the system to
warn the driver of a possible closer collision
with the vehicle in front using audible/
visual warnings.
This setting provides less reaction time than
the “Far” and “Medium” settings, which
allows for a more dynamic driving experi-
ence.
More dynamic or aggressive drivers that
want to avoid frequent warnings may prefer
this setting.
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster display reads “ACC/FCW
Limited Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited
Functionality Clean Front Windshield”
momentarily, there may be a condition that limits
FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still
drivable under normal conditions, the active
braking may not be fully available. Once the
condition that limited the system performance is
no longer present, the system will return to its full
performance state. If the problem persists, see an
authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster
display reads:
ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault.
Although the vehicle is still driveable under normal
conditions, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS)
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure
based on the vehicle recommended cold placard
pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by
approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C).
This means that when the outside temperature
decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire
pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for
at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle
is driven. This is normal and there should be no
adjustment for this increased pressure.
See Ú page 279 on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure
if the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure
warning limit for any reason, including low
temperature effects and natural pressure loss
through the tire.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 184
SAFETY 185
(Continued)
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low
tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and
will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above
the recommended cold placard pressure. Once the
low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring
System Warning Light) illuminates, you must
increase the tire pressure to the recommended
cold placard pressure in order for the TPMS
Warning Light to turn off.
The system will automatically update and the
TPMS Warning Light will turn off once the system
receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a
recommended cold (parked for more than three
hours) placard pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the
ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the
measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a
temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the
tire pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa).
This tire pressure is low enough to turn on the
TPMS Warning Light. Driving the vehicle may cause
the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi
(193 kPa), but the TPMS Warning Light will still be
on. In this situation, the TPMS Warning Light will
turn off only after the tires are inflated to the
vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
value Ú page 308.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in
order to turn the TPMS Warning Light off.
NOTE:
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire
care and maintenance, or to provide warning of
a tire failure or condition.
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel effi-
ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility
to maintain correct tire pressure using an accu-
rate tire pressure gauge, even if underinflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination
of the TPMS Warning Light.
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire
pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual
tire pressure in the tire.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
and warning have been established for the tire
size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable
system operation or sensor damage may
result when using replacement equipment
that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
The TPMS sensor is not designed for use on
aftermarket wheels, and may contribute to a
poor overall system performance. Customers
are encouraged to use Original Equipment
Manufacturer (OEM) wheels to ensure TPMS
feature operation.
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an
aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended
that you take your vehicle to an authorized
dealer to have your sensor function checked.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the TPMS
sensor.
CAUTION!
6
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 185
186 SAFETY
Premium System
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) uses
wireless technology with wheel rim mounted
electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels.
Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the
valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the
receiver module.
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
Receiver module
Four TPMS sensors
Various TPMS messages, which display in the
instrument cluster
TPMS Warning Light
SERVICE TPMS WARNING
When a system fault is detected, the TPMS
Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then remain on solid. The system fault will also
sound a chime. In addition, the instrument cluster
will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for
a minimum of five seconds and then display
dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value to
indicate which sensor is not being received.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Service Warning
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will
repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If the
system fault no longer exists, the TPMS Warning
Light will no longer flash, and the “SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM” message will no longer display, and a
pressure value will display in place of the dashes.
A system fault can occur due to any of the
following:
Jamming due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio
frequencies as the TPMS sensors.
Installing some form of aftermarket window
tinting that affects radio wave signals.
Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
Using tire chains on the vehicle.
Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS
sensors.
Vehicles With Compact Spare Or Non-Matching
Full Size Spare
1. The compact spare tire or non-matching full
size does not have a TPMS sensor. Therefore,
the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the
compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact or non-matching full
size spare tire in place of a road tire that has a
pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,
upon the next ignition key cycle, the TPMS
Warning Light will remain on and a chime will
sound. In addition, the graphic in the
instrument cluster will still display a different
color pressure value and an "Inflate to XX"
message.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h), the TPMS Warning
Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then remain on solid. In addition, the
instrument cluster will display a “Service Tire
Pressure System” message for five seconds
and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a
chime will sound, the TPMS Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid, and the instrument cluster will
display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for
five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in
place of the pressure value.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 186
SAFETY 187
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire
and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the
compact spare or non-matching full size, the
TPMS will update automatically. In addition,
the TPMS Warning Light will turn off and the
graphic in the instrument cluster will display a
new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as
long as no tire pressure is below the
low-pressure warning limit in any of the four
active road tires. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING LOW PRESSURE
WARNINGS
The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in
the instrument cluster and a chime will
sound when tire pressure is low in one or
more of the four active road tires. In
addition, the instrument cluster will display a "Tire
Low" message for a minimum of five seconds, an
"Inflate to XX" message and a graphic showing the
pressure values of each tire with the low tire
pressure values in a different color.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Low Pressure Warning
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as
possible and inflate the tires with low pressure
(those in a different color in the instrument cluster
graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended cold
placard pressure value as shown in the "Inflate to
XX" message. Once the system receives the
updated tire pressures, the system will
automatically update, the pressure values in the
graphic display in the instrument cluster will return
to their original color, and the TPMS Warning Light
will turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for
up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in
order to turn the TPMS Warning Light off.
TIRE FILL ALERT
Tire Fill Alert notifies the user when the placard tire
pressure is attained while inflating or deflating the
tire.
The customer may choose to disable or enable the
Tire Fill Alert feature through use of the customer
settings in the radio.
NOTE:
Only one tire can be filled at a time when using
the Tire Fill Alert system.
The Tire Fill Alert feature cannot be entered if an
existing TPMS fault is set to “active” or if the
system is in deactivation mode (if equipped).
The system will be activated when the system
detects an increase of tire pressure while inflating
the tire. The ignition must be in the RUN mode, with
the transmission in PARK (P).
NOTE:
It is not required to have the engine running to
enter Tire Fill Alert mode.
The hazard lamps will come on to confirm the
vehicle is in Tire Fill Alert mode.
When Tire Fill Alert mode is entered, the tire
pressure display screen will be displayed in the
instrument cluster.
6
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 187
188 SAFETY
Operation:
The horn will chirp once to let the user know
when to stop filling the tire, when it reaches
recommended pressure.
The horn will chirp three times if the tire is over
filled and will continue to chirp every five
seconds if the user continues to inflate the tire.
The horn will chirp once again when enough air
is let out to reach proper inflation level.
The horn will also chirp three times if the tire is
then under-inflated and will continue to chirp
every five seconds if the user continues to
deflate the tire.
If the hazard lamps do not come on while
inflating the tire, the TPMS sensor may be in an
inoperative position, preventing the TPMS
sensor signal from being received. In this case,
the vehicle may need to be moved slightly
forward or backward.
TPMS DEACTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all four
wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel
and tire assemblies that do not have TPMS
sensors, such as when installing winter wheel and
tire assemblies on your vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first replace all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not
equipped with TPMS sensors. Then, drive the
vehicle for 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h).
The TPMS will chime, the TPMS Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain
on. The instrument cluster will display the
“SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message and then
display dashes (--) in place of the pressure values.
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS
will no longer chime or display the “SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM” message in the instrument cluster but
dashes (--) will remain in place of the pressure
values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and
tire assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with
TPMS sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS
will chime, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then turn off. The
instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM” message and then display pressure
values in place of the dashes. On the next ignition
cycle the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message will no
longer be displayed as long as no system fault
exists.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
F
EATURES
Seat Belt Systems
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on others. If
you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please pay close attention to the information in
this section. It tells you how to use your restraint
system properly, to keep you and your passengers
as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to
minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should
always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the
vehicle seat belt properly must be secured in
the appropriate child restraint or
belt-positioning booster seat in a rear seating
position Ú page 209.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 188
SAFETY 189
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the
front passenger seat, move the seat as far
back as possible and use the proper child
restraint Ú page 209.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt
behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with
your child restraint to make sure that you are
using it properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should
be moved back as far as practical to allow the
front air bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment
occurs, the side air bags will inflate forcefully
into the space between occupants and the
door and occupants could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person,
see Ú page 305 for customer service contact
information.
SEAT BELT SYSTEMS
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver,
even on short trips. Someone on the road may be
a poor driver and could cause a collision that
includes you. This can happen far away from home
or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and
they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a
collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when
people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts
reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of
injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.
Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all
times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind
the driver and outboard front seat
passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle
their seat belts. The BeltAlert feature is active
whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/
RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch
is first in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime
will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the
START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard
front seat belts are buckled. The outboard front
passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when an
outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when
the vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle
speed range and the driver or outboard front seat
passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front
passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
6
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 189
190 SAFETY
(Continued)
(Continued)
outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied). The
BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking the
Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning
sequence has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will remain on until the seat belts are
buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may
repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver and
occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts
are buckled. The driver should instruct all
occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the
vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning sequence
will begin until the seat belts are buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not
active when the outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an
animal or other items are placed on the outboard
front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat
(if equipped). It is recommended that pets be
restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat
belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an
authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not
recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn
on and remain on until the driver and outboard
front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped
with lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows
the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely
with you under normal conditions. However, in a
collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk
of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown
out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, the air bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
though you have air bags.
In a collision, you and your passengers can
suffer much greater injuries if you are not
properly buckled up. You can strike the inte-
rior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you
can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be
sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside
or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly. Occupants,
including the driver, should always wear their
seat belts whether or not an air bag is also
provided at their seating position to minimize
the risk of severe injury or death in the event
of a crash.
WARNING!
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 190
SAFETY 191
(Continued)
(Continued)
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could
even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these
instructions to wear your seat belt safely and
to keep your passengers safe, too.
Two people should never be belted into a
single seat belt. People belted together can
crash into one another in a collision, hurting
one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder
belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no
matter what their size.
WARNING!
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk
of injury in a collision. The seat belt forces
won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones,
but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap
part of your seat belt as low as possible and
keep it snug.
WARNING!
A twisted seat belt may not protect you prop-
erly. In a collision, it could even cut into you.
Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body,
without twists. If you can’t straighten a seat
belt in your vehicle, take it to an authorized
dealer immediately and have it fixed.
A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong
buckle will not protect you properly. The lap
portion could ride too high on your body,
possibly causing internal injuries. Always
buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest
you.
A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too
far forward, increasing the possibility of injury.
Wear your seat belt snugly.
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike the inside
surfaces of the vehicle in a collision,
increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt
worn under the arm can cause internal inju-
ries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
WARNING!
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not
protect you from injury during a collision. You
are more likely to hit your head in a collision if
you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap
and shoulder belt are meant to be used
together.
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immedi-
ately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat
belt system. If your vehicle is involved in a
collision, or if you have questions regarding
the seat belt or retractor conditions, take your
vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or autho-
rized FCA Certified Collision Care Program
facility for inspection.
WARNING!
6
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 191
192 SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back
and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of
the front seat, and next to your arm in the rear
seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear seat).
Grab the latch plate and pull out the seat belt.
Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as
necessary to allow the seat belt to go around
your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert
the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies
low across your hips, below your abdomen. To
remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on
the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is
too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap
belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding
under the seat belt in a collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder
and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it
is comfortable and not resting on your neck.
The retractor will withdraw any slack in the
shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button
on the buckle. The seat belt will automatically
retract to its stowed position. If necessary,
slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow
the seat belt to retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted
lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to
the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above
the latch plate, grab and twist the seat belt
webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that
begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded
webbing. The folded webbing must enter the
slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it
clears the folded webbing and the seat belt is
no longer twisted.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 192
SAFETY 193
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger seats,
the top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted
upward or downward to position the seat belt away
from your neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage
button to release the anchorage, and move it up or
down to the position that serves you best.
Adjustable Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower
position, and if you are taller than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a higher
position. After you release the anchorage button,
try to move it up or down to make sure that it is
locked in position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature
allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted
in the upward position without pushing or
squeezing the release button. To verify the
shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward
on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked
into position.
Second Row Center Seat Belt Operating
Instructions — Fixed Rear Seat
(If Equipped)
The second row center seat belt may feature a seat
belt with a mini-latch plate and buckle, which
allows the seat belt to detach from the lower
anchor when the seat is folded. The mini-latch
plate and regular latch plate can then be stored
out of the way in the left side trim panel for added
convenience to open up utilization of the storage
areas behind the front seats when the seat is not
occupied.
1. Remove the mini-latch plate and regular latch
plate from its stowed position in the left rear
side trim panel.
Mini-Latch Stowage
WARNING!
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could
even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these
instructions to wear your seat belt safely and
to keep your passengers safe, too.
Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder
and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it
is comfortable and not resting on your neck.
The retractor will withdraw any slack in the
shoulder belt.
Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce
the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
Always make all seat belt height adjustments
when the vehicle is stationary.
6
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 193
194 SAFETY
2. Grab the mini-latch plate and pull the seat belt
over the seat.
Shoulder Belt Routed Through The Seat Belt Guide Loop
3. Route the shoulder belt through the seat belt
guide loop on the top of the seatback near the
inboard side of the left head restraint.
Inserting Mini-Latch Plate Into Mini-Buckle
4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert
the mini-latch plate into the mini-buckle until
you hear a “click.”
Mini-Latch Plate Buckled
5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate up
the webbing as far as necessary to allow the
seat belt to go around your lap.
6. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert
the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
7. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies
low across your hips, below your abdomen. To
remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on
the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is
too tight, pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt
in a collision.
8. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that
it is comfortable and not resting on your neck.
The retractor will withdraw any slack in the
seat belt.
Rear Center Seat Belt Buckled
9. To release the seat belt, push the red button
on the buckle.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 194
SAFETY 195
(Continued)
10. To disengage the mini-latch plate from the
mini-buckle for storage, insert the regular latch
plate into the center red slot on the
mini-buckle. The seat belt will automatically
retract to its stowed position. If necessary,
slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow
the seat belt to retract fully. Insert the
mini-latch plate and regular latch plate into its
stowed position.
Detaching Mini-Latch And Mini-Buckle
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even
when the webbing is fully extended and the
adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, an authorized
dealer can provide you with a Seat Belt Extender.
The Seat Belt Extender should be used only if the
existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different
occupant, it must be removed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
WARNING!
If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are not
properly connected when the seat belt is used
by an occupant, the seat belt will not be able
to provide proper restraint and will increase
the risk of injury in a collision.
When reattaching the mini-latch plate and
mini-buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is
not twisted. If the webbing is twisted, follow
the preceding procedure to detach the
mini-latch plate and mini-buckle, untwist the
webbing, and reattach the mini-latch plate
and mini-buckle.
When the center seat belt is in use, make sure
that any cargo in the cargo compartment is
properly secured and does not contact the
seat belt webbing, and that there is no slack in
the center shoulder belt webbing.
WARNING!
WARNING!
ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original
seat belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt
Extender if, when worn, the distance between
the front edge of the Seat Belt Extender
buckle and the center of the occupant’s body
is LESS than 6 inches.
Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed
can increase the risk of serious injury or death
in a collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender
when the lap belt is not long enough and only
use in the recommended seating positions.
Remove and store the Seat Belt Extender
when not needed.
6
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 195
196 SAFETY
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of
an accident is reduced for the mother and the
unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the
abdomen and across the strong bones of the hips.
Place the shoulder belt across the chest and away
from the neck. Never place the shoulder belt
behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a
collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing slack
from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still
must be worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the
pretensioners are single use items. A deployed
pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be
replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with an Energy Management feature that may help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a
collision. The seat belt system has a retractor
assembly that is designed to release webbing in a
controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions
are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure a child
restraint system. See Ú page 218 for additional
information. The figure below illustrates the
locking feature for each seating position.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(Sliding Seat)
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(Fixed Seat)
If the passenger seating position is equipped with
an ALR and is being used for normal usage, only
pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR
is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the
seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract
completely in this case and then carefully pull out
only the amount of webbing necessary to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a "click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child
restraint is installed in a seating position that has
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 196
SAFETY 197
a seat belt with this feature. Children 12 years old
and under should always be properly restrained in
the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull downward
until the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic
Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and
allow it to retract completely to disengage the
Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle
sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
(SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on others. If
you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in
a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the internal circuits and
interconnecting wiring associated with the
electrical Air Bag System Components. Your
vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag
System Components:
Air Bag System Components
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Occupant Classification System
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the air bag system whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN
position. If the ignition switch is in the OFF position
or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not on
and the air bags will not inflate.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
feature or any other seat belt function is not
working properly when checked according to
the procedures in the Service Manual.
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to
restrain occupants who are wearing the seat
belt or children who are using booster seats.
The locked mode is only used to install
rear-facing or forward-facing child restraints
that have a harness for restraining the child.
6
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 197
198 SAFETY
The ORC contains a backup power supply system
that may deploy the air bag system even if the
battery loses power or it becomes disconnected
prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight
seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is
first in the ON/RUN position. After the self-check,
the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC
detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either
momentarily or continuously. A single chime will
sound to alert you if the light comes on again after
initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will
illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning
Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect
the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the
nature of the malfunction. While the air bag system
is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the
following occurs, have an authorized dealer
service the air bag system immediately.
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on
during the four to eight seconds when the igni-
tion switch is first in the ON/RUN position.
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the
four to eight-second interval.
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit-
tently or remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In
this condition the air bags may not be ready to
inflate for your protection. Have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
detected, which could affect the
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS),
the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will
illuminate on the instrument panel. The
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on until
the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will
sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light has come on and a fault has been
detected. If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
comes on intermittently or remains on while driving
have an authorized dealer service the vehicle
immediately Ú page 80.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder
belts for both the driver and front passenger. The
front air bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint systems. The driver front air bag is
mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger front air bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment.
The words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are
embossed on the air bag covers.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
instrument panel could mean you won’t have the
air bag system to protect you in a collision. If the
light does not come on as a bulb check when the
ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start
the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have
an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 198
SAFETY 199
(Continued)
(Continued)
Front Air Bag/Knee Impact Bolster Locations
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system
provides output appropriate to the severity and
type of collision as determined by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive
information from the front impact sensors (if
equipped) or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately
during an impact that requires air bag deployment.
A low energy output is used in less severe
collisions. A higher energy output is used for more
severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or
front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects
whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is
buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or
front passenger seat track position sensors that
may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front
Air Bags based upon seat position.
This vehicle is equipped with a right front
passenger Occupant Classification System (“OCS”)
that is designed to provide Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag output appropriate to the occupant’s
seated weight input, as determined by the OCS.
1 — Driver Front Air Bag
2 — Passenger Front Air Bag
3 — Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag/Driver
Knee Impact Bolster
4 — Supplemental Passenger Knee Air Bag/
Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
WARNING!
Being too close to the steering wheel or instru-
ment panel during front air bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfort-
ably extending your arms to reach the steering
wheel or instrument panel.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
WARNING!
No objects should be placed over or near the
air bag on the instrument panel or steering
wheel because any such objects could cause
harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe
enough to cause the air bag to inflate.
Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You
may damage the air bags and you could be
injured because the air bags may no longer be
functional. The protective covers for the air
bag cushions are designed to open only when
the air bags are inflating.
6
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 199
200 SAFETY
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional
protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front
air bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury
in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front air bags
will not deploy in all frontal collisions, including
some that may produce substantial vehicle damage
— for example, some pole collisions, truck
underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and
location of impact, front air bags may deploy in
crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but
that produce a severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle
deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage
by themselves are not good indicators of whether
or not an air bag should have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all
collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in
position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
detects a collision requiring the front air bags, it
signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air
bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper
passenger side of the instrument panel separate
and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to
their full size. The front air bags fully inflate in less
time than it takes to blink your eyes. The front air
bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain
the driver and front passenger.
Occupant Classification System (OCS) —
Front Passenger Seat
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is part
of a Federally regulated safety system for this
vehicle. It is designed to provide Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag output appropriate to the
occupant’s seated weight, as determined by the
OCS.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) consists
of the following:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and
Sensor located in the front passenger seat
Air Bag Warning Light
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) And Sensor
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is
located underneath the front passenger seat. The
Sensor is located beneath the passenger seat
cushion foam. Any weight on the seat will be
sensed by the Sensor. The OCM uses input from
the Sensor to determine the front passenger’s
most probable classification. The OCM
communicates this information to the ORC. The
ORC may reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag deployment based on
occupant classification. In order for the OCS to
operate as designed, it is important for the front
passenger to be seated properly and properly
wearing the seat belt.
The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS may
reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag if the OCS estimates that:
The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has
very light objects on it; or
The front passenger seat is occupied by a small
passenger, including a child; or
The front passenger seat is occupied by a
rear-facing child restraint; or
The front passenger is not properly seated or his
or her weight is taken off of the seat for a period
of time.
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even
though you have air bags.
WARNING!
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 200
SAFETY 201
* It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult, allowing a full-power Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag deployment. Never allow children to ride in the front passenger seat and
never install a child restraint system, including a rear-facing child restraint, in the front passenger seat.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most
probable classification. The OCS estimates the
seated weight on the front passenger seat and
where that weight is located. The OCS
communicates the classification status to the ORC.
The ORC uses the classification to determine
whether the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
inflation rate should be adjusted.
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is
important for the front passenger to be seated
properly and properly wearing the seat belt.
Properly seated passengers are:
Sitting upright
Facing forward
Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet
comfortably on or near the floor
Sitting with their back against the seatback and
the seatback in an upright position
Seated Properly
Front Passenger Seat Occupant Status Front Passenger Air Bag Output
Rear-facing child restraint Reduced-power deployment
Child, including a child in a forward-facing child restraint or booster seat* Reduced-power deployment OR Full-power deployment
Properly seated adult Full-power deployment OR reduced-power deployment
Unoccupied seat Reduced-power deployment
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
Children 12 years or younger should always
ride buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle
with a rear seat.
6
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 201
202 SAFETY
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults)
When a lighter weight passenger, including a small
adult, occupies the front passenger seat, the OCS
may reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. This does not mean that
the OCS is working improperly.
Do not decrease OR increase the front passenger’s
seated weight on the front passenger seat
The front passenger’s seated weight must be
properly positioned on the front passenger seat.
Failure to do so may result in serious injury or
death. The OCS determines the most probable
classification of the occupant that it detects. The
OCS will detect the front passenger’s decreased or
increased seated weight, which may result in an
adjusted inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag in a collision. This does not mean that
the OCS is working improperly. Decreasing the
front passenger’s seated weight on the front
passenger seat may result in a reduced-power
deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag. Increasing the front passenger’s seated
weight on the front passenger seat may result in a
full-power deployment of the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag.
Examples of improper front passenger seating
include:
The front passenger’s weight is transferred to
another part of the vehicle (like the door, arm
rest or instrument panel).
The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or
turns to face the rear of the vehicle.
The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full
upright position.
The front passenger carries or holds an object
while seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.).
Objects are lodged under the front passenger
seat.
Objects are lodged between the front passenger
seat and center console.
Accessories that may change the seated weight
on the front passenger seat are attached to the
front passenger seat.
Anything that may decrease or increase the
front passenger’s seated weight.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most
probable classification. If an occupant in the front
passenger seat is seated improperly, the occupant
may provide an output signal to the OCS that is
different from the occupant’s properly seated
weight input, for example:
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 202
SAFETY 203
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
The Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument
panel will turn on whenever the OCS is unable to
classify the front passenger seat status. A
malfunction in the OCS may affect the operation of
the air bag system. If the Air Bag Warning Light
does not come on, or stays on after you start the
vehicle, or it comes on as you drive, take the
vehicle to an authorized dealer for service
immediately.
The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS
components that may affect the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag inflation. In order for the
OCS to properly classify the seated weight of a
front seat passenger, the OCS components must
function as designed. Do not make any
modifications to the front passenger seat
components, assembly, or to the seat cover. If the
seat, trim cover, or cushion needs service for any
reason, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer.
Only FCA US LLC approved seat accessories may
be used.
The following requirements must be strictly
followed:
Do not modify the front passenger seat
assembly or components in any way.
Do not use prior or future model year seat
covers or cushions not designated by FCA US
LLC for the specific model being repaired.
Always use the correct seat cover and cushion
specified for the vehicle.
WARNING!
If a child restraint system, child, small teen-
ager or adult in the front passenger seat is
seated improperly, the occupant may provide
an output signal to the OCS that is different
from the occupant’s properly seated weight
input. This may result in serious injury or death
in a collision.
Always wear your seat belt and sit properly,
with the seatback in an upright position, your
back against the seatback, sitting upright,
facing forward, in the center of the seat, with
your feet comfortably on or near the floor.
Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., back-
packs, boxes, etc.) while seated in the front
passenger seat. Holding an object may
provide an output signal to the OCS that is
different than the occupant’s properly seated
weight input, which may result in serious injury
or death in a collision.
Placing an object on the floor under the front
passenger seat may prevent the OCS from
working properly, which may result in serious
injury or death in a collision. Do not place any
objects on the floor under the front passenger
seat.
6
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 203
204 SAFETY
Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an
aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
At no time should any Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) component or SRS related
component or fastener be modified or replaced
with any part except those which are approved
by FCA US LLC.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees
of the driver and front passenger, and position the
front occupants for improved interaction with the
front air bags.
Supplemental Driver And Front Passenger
Knee Air Bags
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument
panel below the steering column and a
Supplemental Passenger Knee Air Bag mounted in
the instrument panel below the glove
compartment. The Supplemental Knee Air Bags
provide enhanced protection during a frontal
impact by working together with the seat belts,
pretensioners, and front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
are located in the outboard side of the front seats.
The SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat trim on the
outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant
injury during certain side impacts, in addition to
the injury reduction potential provided by the seat
belts and body structure.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service proce-
dures to the passenger seat assembly, its
related components, seat cover or cushion
may inadvertently change the air bag deploy-
ment in case of a frontal collision. This could
result in death or serious injury to the front
passenger if the vehicle is involved in a colli-
sion. A modified vehicle may not comply with
required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
dards (FMVSS) and/or Canadian Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards (CMVSS).
If it is necessary to modify the air bag system
for persons with disabilities, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
WARNING!
Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee
impact bolsters in any way.
Do not mount any accessories to the knee
impact bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos,
citizen band radios, etc.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 204
SAFETY 205
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the
outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. The
inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into
the space between the occupant and the door. The
SAB moves at a very high speed and with such a
high force that it could injure occupants if they are
not seated properly, or if items are positioned in
the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side
Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs) are located above the side windows. The
trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG”
or “AIRBAG.”
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other
injuries to front and rear seat outboard occupants
in certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and
body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side
windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside
edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the
window. The SABICs inflate with enough force to
injure occupants if they are not belted and seated
properly, or if items are positioned in the area
where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even
greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through
side windows in certain side impact events.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in
certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether the
deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
impact event is appropriate, based on the severity
and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid
the ORC in determining the appropriate response
to impact events. The system is calibrated to
deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the
vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag
occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air
Bags deploy independently; a left side impact
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place
objects between you and the Side Air Bags; the
performance could be adversely affected and/or
objects could be pushed into you, causing
serious injury.
WARNING!
Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or
other cargo up high enough to block the
deployment of the SABICs. The trim covering
above the side windows where the SABIC and
its deployment path are located should
remain free from any obstructions.
In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do
not install any accessory items in your vehicle
which could alter the roof. Do not add an after-
market sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add
roof racks that require permanent attach-
ments (bolts or screws) for installation on the
vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
6
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 205
206 SAFETY
(Continued)
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right-side
impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether
or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side
collisions, including some collisions at certain
angles, or some side collisions that do not impact
the area of the passenger compartment. The Side
Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal
collisions where the front air bags deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time
than it takes to blink your eyes.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are
designed to activate in certain rollover events. The
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether deployment in a particular rollover event
is appropriate, based on the severity and type of
collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good
indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags and seat
belt pretensioners should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners will
not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover
sensing system determines if a rollover event may
be in progress and whether deployment is
appropriate. In the event the vehicle experiences a
rollover or near rollover event, and deployment is
appropriate, the rollover sensing system will deploy
the side air bags and seat belt pretensioners on
both sides of the vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through
side windows in certain rollover or side impact
events.
WARNING!
Occupants, including children, who are up
against or very close to Side Air Bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants,
including children, should never lean on or
sleep against the door, side windows, or area
where the side air bags inflate, even if they are
in an infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where appro-
priate) are necessary for your protection in all
collisions. They also help keep you in position,
away from an inflating Side Air Bag. To get the
best protection from the Side Air Bags, occu-
pants must wear their seat belts properly and
sit upright with their backs against the seats.
Children must be properly restrained in a child
restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for
the size of the child.
WARNING!
Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely
injured or killed.
Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead
to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side
Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain
you properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags
won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt
even though you have Side Air Bags.
WARNING!
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 206
SAFETY 207
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors
the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring
associated with electrical Air Bag System Compo-
nents listed below:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Occupant Classification System
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all colli-
sions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air
bags, any or all of the following may occur:
The air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occu-
pants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or
those you might get sliding along a carpet or
gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not permanent
and normally heal quickly. However, if you
haven’t healed significantly within a few days, or
if you have any blistering, see your doctor imme-
diately.
As the air bags deflate, you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal
by-product of the process that generates the
non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These
airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes,
nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles
settle on your clothing, follow the garment
manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another collision,
the air bags will not be in place to protect you.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deploy-
ment.
After any collision, the vehicle should be taken
to an authorized dealer immediately.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners
cannot protect you in another collision. Have the
air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat
belt retractor assemblies replaced by an
authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the
Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced
as well.
6
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 207
208 SAFETY
(Continued)
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication
network remains intact, and the power remains
intact, depending on the nature of the event, the
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) will determine
whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response
System perform the following functions:
Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped).
Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if
equipped).
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has
power.
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as
long as the battery has power or for 15 minutes
from the intervention of the Enhanced Accident
Response System.
Unlock the power door locks.
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any
of these other functions in response to the
Enhanced Accident Response System:
Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC
Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door
Cut off battery power to the:
Engine
Electric Motor (if equipped)
Electric power steering
Brake booster
Electric park brake
Automatic transmission gear selector
Horn
Front wiper
Headlamp washer pump (if equipped)
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition to
the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key
from the ignition switch to avoid draining the
battery. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in
the engine compartment and on the ground near
the engine compartment and fuel tank before
resetting the system and starting the engine. If
there are no fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle
electrical devices (e.g. headlights) after an
accident, reset the system by following the
procedure described below. If you have any doubt,
contact an authorized dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System
Reset Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response
System functions after an event, the ignition switch
must be changed from ignition START or ON/RUN
to ignition OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel
leaks in the engine compartment and on the
ground near the engine compartment and fuel
tank before resetting the system and starting the
engine.
After an accident, if the vehicle will not start after
performing the reset procedure, the vehicle must
be towed to an authorized dealer to be inspected
and to have the Enhanced Accident Response
System reset.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You
could be injured if the air bag system is not
there to protect you. Do not modify the compo-
nents or wiring, including adding any kind of
badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub
trim cover or the upper passenger side of the
instrument panel. Do not modify the front
bumper, vehicle body structure, or add after-
market side steps or running boards.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone
who works on your vehicle that it has an air
bag system.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 208
SAFETY 209
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting
a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The
EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data
as:
How various systems in your vehicle were oper-
ating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving condi-
tions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender,
age, and crash location) are recorded. However,
other parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the EDR data with the type of personally
identifying data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment
is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer,
other parties, such as law enforcement, that have
the special equipment, can read the information if
they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at
all times, including babies and children. Every
state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in
proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you
can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to
crash statistics, children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost
large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check
the child seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you
have the correct seat for your child. Carefully read
and follow all the instructions and warnings in the
child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the
labels attached to the child restraint.
Do not attempt to modify any part of your air
bag system. The air bag may inflate accidentally
or may not function properly if modifications are
made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer
for any air bag system service. If your seat,
including your trim cover and cushion, needs to
be serviced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts),
take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only
manufacturer approved seat accessories may
be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag
system for persons with disabilities, contact an
authorized dealer.
WARNING!
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become
a projectile inside the vehicle. The force required
to hold even an infant on your lap could become
so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured or killed. Any child riding
in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for
the child’s size.
6
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 209
210 SAFETY
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards. You should also make sure that you can
install it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to http://www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or call: 1–888–327–4236
Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s website for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/child-car-seat-safety.html
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger and who
have not reached the height or weight limits of their
child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their
rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point
Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing
child restraint, but are too small to properly fit the
vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat
belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their booster
seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the
vehicle
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 210
SAFETY 211
(Continued)
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years
old or until they reach either the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint. Two types of
child restraints can be used rear-facing: infant
carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth
until they reach the weight or height limit of the
infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used
either rear-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle.
Convertible child seats often have a higher weight
limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers
do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who
have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less
than at least two years old. Children should remain
rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or
height allowed by their convertible child seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have
outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat
can ride forward-facing in the vehicle.
Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for
children who are over two years old or who have
outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children
should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a
harness for as long as possible, up to the highest
weight or height allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s
seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with
knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while
the child’s back is against the seatback, they
should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The
child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in
the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in
a collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufac-
turer’s directions exactly when installing an
infant or child restraint.
After a child restraint is installed in the
vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat forward
or rearward because it can loosen the child
restraint attachments. Remove the child
restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat
position. When the vehicle seat has been
adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
When your child restraint is not in use, secure
it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH
anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do
not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden
stop or accident, it could strike the occupants
or seatbacks and cause serious personal
injury.
6
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 211
212 SAFETY
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the
shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long
enough to bend over the front of the seat when
their back is against the seatback, should use the
seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step test
to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s
seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the
back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over
the front of the vehicle seat while the child is
still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s
shoulder between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible,
touching the child’s thighs and not the
stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole
trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no”,
then the child still needs to use a booster seat in
this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder
belt, check seat belt fit periodically and make sure
the seat belt buckle is latched. A child’s squirming
or slouching can move the belt out of position. If
the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move
the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
under an arm or behind their back. In a crash,
the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly,
which may result in serious injury or death. A
child must always wear both the lap and
shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
Restraint Type
Combined Weight of
the Child + Child
Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Anchors Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower
Anchors + Top Tether
Anchor
Seat Belt + Top Tether
Anchor
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X X
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 212
SAFETY 213
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint
anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for
Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The
LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for
installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There are
two lower anchorages located at the back of the
seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one
top tether anchorage located behind the seating
position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the
vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may
have a top tether anchorage but no lower
anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat
belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to
install the child restraint. Please see the following
table for more information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
Sliding Second Row LATCH Positions
Fixed Second Row LATCH Positions
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
6
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 213
214 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child
restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the
child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight
of the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the
seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once
the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together
to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage
system to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages if
allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your booster
seat owner’s manual for more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the center position using the
inner LATCH lower anchorages from the outboard seating
positions?
Yes – Fixed 2nd Row Only
N/A – Sliding 2nd Row Seat
Fixed 2nd Row Seating: You can install child restraints with
flexible lower anchors in the center position. The inner
anchorages are 18 inches (460 mm) apart. Do not install
child restraints with rigid lower anchors in the center position.
Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower
LATCH anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child
restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated
LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child
seat in the center position next to a child seat using the
LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front
passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger
seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
See your child restraint owner’s manual for more information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes
The head restraints can be removed in every seating position
if they interfere with the installation of the child restraint
Ú page 36.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 214
SAFETY 215
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
Sliding 2nd Row Seat:
The lower anchorages are round bars
that are found at the rear of the seat
cushion where it meets the seatback.
They are just visible when you lean into
the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will
easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap
between the seatback and seat cushion.
LATCH Anchorages — Sliding 2nd Row Seat
Fixed 2nd Row Seat:
The lower anchorages are round bars
that are found at the rear of the seat
cushion where it meets the seatback,
below the anchorage symbols on the
seatback. They are just visible when you lean into
the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will
easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap
between the seatback and seat cushion.
LATCH Anchorages — Fixed 2nd Row Seat
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages
behind each rear seating position
located on the back of the seat.
Tether Anchorage Locations
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each
side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach
to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the
connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child
restraints and some rear-facing child restraints will
also be equipped with a tether strap. The tether
strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the
top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
Sliding 2nd Row Seat:
This vehicle has 5 lower LATCH anchorages in the
rear seat. Anchorages A and B are used for the right
outboard position behind the front passenger (1).
Anchorages D and E are used for the left outboard
position behind the driver (3). Anchorages C and D
are used for the center seating position (2). Do not
install a LATCH- compatible child restraint using
anchorages B and C. This is not a LATCH–compatible
position in your vehicle.
You can install up to two child seats using the
LATCH system at the same time. If you can fit three
child restraints in your vehicle, you must use the
seat belt to install the center child restraint and
you must use the LATCH anchors for position (3)
behind the driver. You can use either the LATCH
anchors or the vehicle’s seat belt for installing the
third child seat in position (1) behind the front
passenger.
6
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 215
216 SAFETY
Sliding Second Row Seat Lower Anchors
Options for installing two child seats using the
LATCH anchorages in this vehicle:
1. Right and left outboard seating positions
(1 and 3): Install the child seats in the right
and left outboard seating positions using
lower anchorages A and B, and D and E. Do
not use the center seat anchorage, C. If the
child seats do not block the center seat belt
webbing and buckle, the center seat belt can
be used to restraint an occupant or child
restraint in the center seating position.
2. Right outboard and center seating positions
(1 and 2): Install the first child seat in the right
outboard seating position using lower
anchorages A and B. Install the second child
seat using the center anchorages, C and D. Do
not use the outer anchorage closest to the
opposite door, E. Do not use the remaining left
outboard seating position (3) for any occupant.
The center child restraint will block the seat
belt buckle for this position.
Fixed 2nd Row Seat:
Do not install child restraints with rigid lower
attachments in the center seating position. Only
install this type of child restraint in the outboard
seating positions. Child restraints with flexible,
webbing mounted lower attachments can be
installed in any rear seating position.
Fixed Second Row Seat LATCH Positions
WARNING!
Use anchorages C and D to install a
LATCH-compatible child restraint in the center
seating position (2). Do not
install a
LATCH-compatible child restraint using
anchorages B and C. This is not a
LATCH-compatible position in your vehicle.
A child restraint installed in the center position
(2) will block the seat belt buckle for the empty
left outboard seat behind the driver (3). Do not
use this seat for another occupant.
Never use the same lower anchorage to
attach more than one child restraint.
If you are installing three child restraints next
to each other, you must use the seat belt and
the center tether anchor for the center posi-
tion. You must use the LATCH anchors to
install the child seat in position (3), behind the
driver. You may use either the LATCH anchors
or the vehicle’s seat belt for installing the child
seat in position (1), behind the front
passenger. For typical installation instruc-
tions, see Ú page 217.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach
more than one child restraint. If you are
installing LATCH-compatible child restraints next
to each other, you must use the seat belt for the
center position. You can then use either the
LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat belt for
installing child seats in the outboard positions.
For typical installation instructions, see
Ú page 217.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 216
SAFETY 217
Always follow the directions of the child restraint
manufacturer when installing your child restraint.
Not all child restraint systems will be installed as
described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow
the seat belt, following the instructions below. See
Ú page 218 to check what type of seat belt each
seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and
on the tether strap of the child seat so that
you can more easily attach the hooks or
connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower
anchorages for that seating position. If the
second row seat can be reclined, you may
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint
(if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat
can be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the child
seat. You may also move the front seat forward
to allow more room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the
child restraint to the lower anchorages in the
selected seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect
it to the top tether anchorage. See
Ú page 220 for directions to attach a tether
anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child
restraint rearward and downward into the
seat. Remove slack in the straps according to
the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly
by pulling back and forth on the child seat at
the belt path. It should not move more than
1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install
a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not
being used by other occupants or being used to
secure child restraints. An unused belt could injure
a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the
seat belt retractor. Before installing a child
restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat
belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the
child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt
through the child restraint belt path and then
buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all
children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not
toys and that they should not play with them.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the
restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufac-
turer’s directions exactly when installing an
infant or child restraint.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used for adult
seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other
items or equipment to the vehicle.
6
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 217
218 SAFETY
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion
of a lap/shoulder belt.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions
are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap
portion of the seat belt tight around the child
restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking
clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched” into a
locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the
retractor and then letting the webbing retract back
into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make
a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. See the “Automatic Locking
Mode” description Ú page 196 for additional
information on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following
sections for more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
(Sliding Seat)
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations (Fixed Seat)
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly injured
or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
ALR — Switchable Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
ALR — Switchable Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 218
SAFETY 219
(Continued)
Installing A Child Restraint With A
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion
of a lap/shoulder belt.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the
seating position. If the second row seat can
be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or
raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may
wish to move it to its rear-most position to
make room for the child seat. You may also
move the front seat forward to allow more
room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the
child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in
the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion
tight against the child seat.
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child
restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to
attach a forward facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to
install a forward facing child restraint, up to the
recommended weight limit of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the
front passenger seat?
Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat and the child
restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also
allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes
The head restraints can be removed in every seating
position if they interfere with the installation of the child
restraint Ú page 36.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt
against the belt path of the child restraint?
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an
ALR retractor.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly injured
or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
WARNING!
6
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 219
220 SAFETY
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder
part of the belt until you have pulled all the
seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then,
allow the webbing to retract back into the
retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear
a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it
is locked, you should not be able to pull out any
webbing. If the retractor is not
locked, repeat
step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint while you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and
the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See
Ú page 220 for directions to attach a tether
anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly
by pulling back and forth on the child seat at
the belt path. It should not move more than
1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check
the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage
1. Look behind the seating position where you
plan to install the child restraint to find the
tether anchorage. If the seat can be moved,
you may need to move the seat forward to
provide better access to the tether
anchorage. If there is no top tether anchorage
for that seating position, move the child
restraint to another position in the vehicle if
one is available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most
direct path for the strap between the anchor
and the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped
with adjustable rear head restraints, raise the
head restraint, and where possible, route the
tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower
the head restraint and pass the tether strap
around the outboard side of the head restraint.
Tether Anchorage Locations
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
restraint to the top tether anchorage as shown
in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to
the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car
seat to any location in front of the car seat,
including the seat frame or a tether anchorage.
Only attach the tether strap of a rear-facing car
seat to the tether anchorage that is approved for
that seating position, located behind the top of
the vehicle seat. See Ú page 213for the
location of approved tether anchorages in your
vehicle.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 220
SAFETY 221
(Continued)
SAFETY TIPS
TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
TRANSPORTING PETS
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm
your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about
and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during
panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if
equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are
secured by seat belts.
SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE
I
NSIDE THE VEHICLE
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking
for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts
must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you
have questions regarding seat belt or retractor
conditions, take your vehicle to an authorized FCA
dealer or authorized FCA Certified Collision Care
Program facility for inspection.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check
when the ignition switch is first placed in
the ON/RUN position. If the light is either
not on during starting, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at an
authorized dealer as soon as possible. After the
bulb check, this light will illuminate with a single
chime when a fault with the Air Bag System has
been detected. It will stay on until the fault is
removed. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have an authorized
dealer service the vehicle immediately.
See Ú page 188 for further information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and
place the blower control on high speed. You should
be able to feel the air directed against the
windshield. See an authorized dealer for service if
your defroster is inoperable.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could
lead to increased head motion and possible
injury to the child. Use only the anchorage
position directly behind the child seat to
secure a child restraint top tether strap.
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear
seat, make sure the tether strap does not slip
into the opening between the seatbacks as
you remove slack in the strap.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up
may cause serious injury or death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a colli-
sion, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
6
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 221
222 SAFETY
(Continued)
(Continued)
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
Only use a floor mat that does not interfere with the
operation of the accelerator, brake or clutch
pedals. Only use a floor mat that is securely
attached using the floor mat fasteners so it cannot
slip out of position and interfere with the
accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or impair safe
operation of your vehicle in other ways.
PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD
M
AKE OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven
wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or
other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall.
Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect
sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges. Check the
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or
stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat
fasteners may cause your floor mat to interfere
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and
cause a loss of vehicle control. To prevent
SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
ALWAYS securely attach your floor
mat using the floor mat fasteners. DO
NOT install your floor mat upside down
or turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull
to confirm mat is secured using the floor mat
fasteners on a regular basis.
ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING
FLOOR MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before
installing any other floor mat. NEVER
install or stack an additional floor mat
on top of an existing floor mat.
ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that cannot
be properly attached and secured to your
vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be replaced,
only use a FCA approved floor mat for the
specific make, model, and year of your
vehicle.
ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the
driver’s side floor area. To check for interfer-
ence, with the vehicle properly parked with the
engine off, fully depress the accelerator, the
brake, and the clutch pedal (if present) to
check for interference. If your floor mat inter-
feres with the operation of any pedal, or is not
secure to the floor, remove the floor mat from
the vehicle and place the floor mat in your
trunk.
ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on
the passenger’s side floor area.
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide
into the driver’s side floor area when the
vehicle is moving. Objects can become
trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle
control.
WARNING!
NEVER place any objects under the floor mat
(e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects could
change the position of the floor mat and may
cause interference with the accelerator,
brake, or clutch pedals.
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet to
the floor and check the floor mat fasteners are
secure to the vehicle carpet. Fully depress
each pedal to check for interference with the
accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals then
re-install the floor mats.
It is recommended to only use mild soap and
water to clean your floor mats. After cleaning,
always check your floor mat has been properly
installed and is secured to your vehicle using
the floor mat fasteners by lightly pulling mat.
WARNING!
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 222
SAFETY 223
(Continued)
lug nut/bolt torque for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake
lights and exterior lights while you work the
controls. Check turn signal and high beam
indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check the area under the vehicle after overnight
parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks.
Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should
be located and corrected immediately.
EXHAUST GAS
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained
engine exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the
exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be
detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside
or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have an
authorized dealer inspect the complete exhaust
system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts.
Open seams or loose connections could permit
exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger
compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust
system each time the vehicle is raised for
lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
CARBON MONOXIDE WARNINGS
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you
unconscious and can eventually poison you. To
avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to
move your vehicle in or out of the area.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/lift-
gate/rear doors open, make sure that all
windows are closed and the climate control
BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT
use the recirculation mode.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with
the engine running, adjust your heating or
cooling controls to force outside air into the
vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is
deadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent
carbon monoxide poisoning:
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain
carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless
gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in a
closed area, such as a garage, and never sit in
a parked vehicle with the engine running for
an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in
an open area with the engine running for more
than a short period, adjust the ventilation
system to force fresh, outside air into the
vehicle.
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system
inspected every time the vehicle is raised.
Have any abnormal conditions repaired
promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
6
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 223
224
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning Flashers button is located in
the lower center area of the instrument panel.
Hazard Warning Flashers Button
Push the button to turn on the Hazard Warning
Flashers. When the button is activated, all
directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn
oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the button
a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning
Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should
not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it
only when your vehicle is disabled or signaling a
safety hazard warning for other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek
assistance, the Hazard Warning Flashers will
continue to operate even though the ignition is
placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use, the Hazard Warning Flashers
may wear down your battery.
ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED
Assist And SOS Mirror
If equipped, the Rearview Mirror contains a SOS
and a ASSIST button.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber Ú page 308.
The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only function if
you are connected to an operable LTE (voice/
data) 3G or 4G (data) network, which comes as
a built in function. Services will only be operable
if your SiriusXM Guardian™ service is active and
you are connected to an operable LTE (voice/
data), 3G or 4G (data) network.
1 — SOS Button
2 — Power Button
3 — ASSIST Button
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
features and applications in this vehicle. Only
use the features and applications when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 224
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 225
(Continued)
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the Rearview
Mirror.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a 10 second delay before the SOS Call
system initiates a call to a SOS operator, during
which the LED will blink green. To cancel the SOS
Call connection, push the SOS call button on the
Rearview Mirror or press the cancellation button
on the Device Screen. Termination of the SOS Call
will turn off the green LED light on the Rearview
Mirror.
2. The LED light located between the SOS and
ASSIST buttons on the Rearview Mirror will
turn green once a connection to a SOS
operator has been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a
SOS operator is made, the SOS Call system
may transmit the following important vehicle
information to a SOS operator:
Indication that the occupant placed a SOS
Call.
The vehicle brand.
The last known GPS coordinates of the
vehicle.
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS
operator through the vehicle audio system to
determine if additional help is needed.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
Once a connection is made between the
vehicle’s SOS Call system and the SOS oper-
ator, the SOS operator may be able to open
a voice connection with the vehicle to deter-
mine if additional help is needed. Once the
SOS operator opens a voice connection with
the vehicle’s SOS Call system, the operator
should be able to speak with you or other
vehicle occupants and hear sounds occur-
ring in the vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call
system will attempt to remain connected
with the SOS operator until the SOS oper-
ator terminates the connection.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact
appropriate emergency responders and
provide them with important vehicle
information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
features and applications in this vehicle. Only
use the features and applications when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
WARNING!
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger
(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road
conditions or location), do not wait for voice
contact from an Emergency Services Agent. All
occupants should exit the vehicle immediately
and move to a safe location.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
operable network and GPS antennas. You
could prevent operable network and GPS
signal reception, which can prevent your
vehicle from placing an emergency call. An
operable network and GPS signal reception is
required for the SOS Call system to function
properly.
7
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 225
226 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico
DO NOT have SOS Call
system capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico
may not answer or respond to SOS system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any
of the following may occur at the time the
malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of
each ignition cycle:
The Rearview Mirror light located between the
SOS and ASSIST buttons will continuously illumi-
nate red.
The Device Screen will display the following
message “Vehicle device requires service.
Please contact an authorized dealer.”
An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle
device requires service. Please contact an
authorized dealer.”
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional,
factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent
or stop the SOS Call system operation. These
include, but are not limited to, the following
factors:
The ignition is in the OFF position
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact
The SOS Call system software and/or hardware
are damaged during a crash
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes
disconnected during a vehicle crash
LTE (voice/data), 3G or 4G (data) network and/
or Global Positioning Satellite signals are
unavailable or obstructed
Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator
facility
Operator error by the SOS operator
LTE (voice/data), 3G or 4G (data) network
congestion
Weather
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or
tunnels
The SOS Call system is embedded into the
vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add after-
market electrical equipment to the vehicle’s
electrical system. This may prevent your
vehicle from sending a signal to initiate an
emergency call. To avoid interference that can
cause the SOS Call system to fail, never add
aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile
radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your
vehicle’s electrical system or modify the
antennas on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE
LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY REASON
(INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCI-
DENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND
SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT
OPERATE.
Modifications to any part of the SOS Call
system could cause the air bag system to fail
when you need it. You could be injured if the
air bag system is not there to help protect you.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean
you will not have SOS Call services. If the Rear-
view Mirror light is illuminated, have an autho-
rized dealer service the SOS Call system
immediately.
The Occupant Restraint Control module turns
on the air bag Warning Light on the instrument
panel if a malfunction in any part of the
system is detected. If the Air Bag Warning
Light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer
service the Occupant Restraint Control system
immediately.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 226
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 227
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
LTE (voice/data), 3G or 4G (data) and GPS
antennas. You could prevent LTE (voice/data),
3G or 4G (data) and GPS signal reception, which
can prevent your vehicle from placing an emer-
gency call. An operable LTE (voice/data), 3G or
4G (data) network connection and a GPS signal
is required for the SOS Call system to function
properly.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Automatic SOS — If Equipped
Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service that
can immediately connect you with help in the event
that your vehicle’s airbags deploy. Please refer to
your provided radio supplement for complete
information.
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically
connect you to any one of the following support
centers:
Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or
need a tow, just push the ASSIST button and
you’ll be connected to someone who can help.
Roadside Assistance will know what vehicle
you’re driving and its location. Additional fees
may apply for roadside assistance.
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care – In-vehicle
support for SiriusXM Guardian™.
Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all
other vehicle issues.
Uconnect Customer Care - Total support for
Radio, Phone and NAV issues.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
features and applications in this vehicle. Only
use the features and applications when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning,
never spray any cleaning solution directly onto
the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth
and wipe the mirror clean.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid the danger of
being hit when operating the jack or changing
the wheel.
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on
you. You could be crushed. Never put any part
of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack.
If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take
it to a service center where it can be raised on
a lift.
Never start or run the engine while the vehicle
is on a jack.
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be
used to lift the vehicle for service purposes.
The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level
surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
7
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 227
228 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
PREPARATIONS FOR JACKING
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far
from the edge of the roadway as possible.
Avoid icy or slippery areas.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK (P)
(automatic transmission) or REVERSE (manual
transmission).
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite of the jacking position. For
example, if changing the driver’s front tire,
chock the passenger’s rear wheel.
Wheel Blocked
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when
the vehicle is being lifted or raised.
JACK LOCATION/SPARE TIRE STOWAGE
The jack, tools, wheel chocks and spare tire
Ú page 290 are stowed under the load floor
behind the rear seat.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Lift the load floor handle, then lift access cover
to locate jack and tools.
Load Floor Handle
3. Remove the hook from the stowed position on
the back side of the load floor and place the
hook over the top body flange and weather
seal. This will hold the load floor up while
obtaining the jack and spare tire.
4. Remove the fastener securing the jack and
spare tire.
Removing Jack And Spare Tire Fastener
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 228
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 229
(Continued)
5. Remove the chocks.
6. Remove the scissors jack and wheel bolt
wrench from the spare wheel as an assembly.
Turn the jack screw to the left to loosen the
wheel bolt wrench, and remove the wrench
from the jack assembly.
Jack And Tool Assembly
NOTE:
The jack handle attaches to the side of the jack
with two attachment points. When the jack is
partially expanded, the tension between the two
attachment points holds the jack handle in place.
7. Remove the spare tire.
JACKING INSTRUCTIONS
Jack Warning Label
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of
the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the
spare tire in the places provided. Have the
deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced
immediately.
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before
raising the vehicle.
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
Apply the parking brake firmly and set an auto-
matic transmission in PARK.
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel
to be raised.
Never start or run the engine with the vehicle
on a jack.
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is
on a jack.
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a
jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle,
take it to a service center where it can be
raised on a lift.
Only use the jack in the positions indicated
and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
To ensure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with
the valve stem facing the ground.
WARNING!
7
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 229
230 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, wheel chocks,
and wheel bolt wrench.
2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where the
center cap covers the wheel bolts, use the
wheel bolt wrench to pry the center cap off
carefully before raising the vehicle.
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel bolt
wrench to loosen, but not remove, the wheel
bolts on the wheel with the flat tire. Turn the
wheel bolts counterclockwise one turn while
the wheel is still on the ground.
NOTE:
Placement for the front and rear jacking locations
are critical. See below images for proper jacking
locations.
Jacking Locations
4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is
closest to the flat tire. Turn the jack screw
clockwise to firmly engage the jack saddle with
the lift area of the sill flange, centering the jack
saddle inside the cutout in the sill cladding.
Front Lifting Point
NOTE:
The jack must be placed straight on with handle
facing outwards. Keep the jack and tools aligned
while raising the vehicle.
Front Jacking Location
Rear Lifting Point
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the
Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 230
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 231
Rear Jacking Location
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the
flat tire.
6. Remove the wheel bolts and tire.
7. Remove the alignment pin from the jack
assembly and thread the pin into the wheel
hub to assist in mounting the spare tire.
Installing Alignment Pin
8. Mount the spare tire.
Mounting Spare Tire
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped, do not attempt to install a
center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare
Ú page 290.
9. Install the wheel bolts with the threaded end of
the wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly tighten
the wheel bolts.
Installing Wheel Bolts
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can
make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the
jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle
only enough to remove the tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve
stem facing outward. The vehicle could be
damaged if the spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the
vehicle has been lowered to the ground. Failure
to follow this warning may result in serious
injury.
7
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 231
232 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
10. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the
jack handle counterclockwise.
11. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down
on the wrench while at the end of the handle
for increased leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts
in a star pattern until each wheel bolt has been
tightened twice. If in doubt about the correct
tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by an authorized dealer or at a service
station Ú page 299.
12. After 25 miles (40 km), check the wheel bolt
torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all
wheel bolts are properly seated against the
wheel.
13. Securely stow the jack, tools, chocks, and flat
tire.
Reinstalling Jack and Tire Fastener
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the tire
tread can be sealed with a Tire Service Kit. Foreign
objects (e.g., screws or nails) should not be
removed from the tire. Tire Service Kit can be used
in outside temperatures down to approximately
-4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing
you to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km)
with a maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
TIRE SERVICE KIT STORAGE
The Tire Service Kit is stowed under the load floor
behind the rear seat.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Lift the access cover using the load floor
handle.
Load Floor Handle
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of
the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the
spare tire in the places provided. Have the
deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced
immediately.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 232
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 233
TIRE SERVICE KIT COMPONENTS AND
O
PERATION
NOTE:
Tire service kit may vary, depending on trim level.
Tire Service Kit Components
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following
symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob and
turn to this position for air pump oper-
ation only. Use the Black Air Pump
Hose when selecting this mode.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob and
turn to this position to inject the Tire
Service Kit Sealant and to inflate the
tire. Use the Sealant Hose (clear hose)
when selecting this mode.
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button
once to turn on the Tire Service Kit.
Push and release the Power Button
again to turn Off the Tire Service Kit.
Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button to reduce
the air pressure in the tire if it
becomes overinflated.
TIRE SERVICE KIT USAGE PRECAUTIONS
Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle and
Sealant Hose prior to the expiration date
(printed at the upper left hand corner on the
bottle label) to assure optimum operation of the
system Ú page 237.
Tire Service Kit Sealant Expiration Date Location
The Sealant Bottle and Sealant Hose are a one
tire application use and need to be replaced
after each use. Always replace these compo-
nents immediately at your original equipment
vehicle dealer.
When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid
form, clean water and a damp cloth will remove
the material from the vehicle or tire and wheel
1 — Sealant Bottle
2 — Deflation Button
3 — Power Button
4 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
5 — Pressure Gauge
6 — Mode Select Knob
7 — Power Plug (located on the bottom side of the
Tire Service Kit)
8 — Air Pump Hose (Black)
7
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 233
234 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
(Continued)
components. Once the sealant dries, it can
easily be peeled off and properly discarded.
For optimum performance, make sure the valve
stem on the wheel is free of debris before
connecting the Tire Service Kit.
You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to
inflate bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two
needles, located in the Accessory Storage
Compartment (on the bottom of the air pump)
for inflating sport balls, rafts, or similar inflat-
able items. However, use only the Air Pump
Hose and make sure the Mode Select Knob is in
the Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid
injecting sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit
Sealant is only intended to seal punctures less
than 1/4 inch (6 mm) diameter in the tread of
your tire.
Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the
hoses.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
using the Tire Service Kit.
Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle
under the following circumstances:
If the puncture in the tire tread is approxi-
mately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
If the tire has any sidewall damage.
If the tire has any damage from driving
with extremely low tire pressure.
If the tire has any damage from driving on
a flat tire.
If the wheel has any damage.
If you are unsure of the condition of the
tire or the wheel.
Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames
or heat source.
A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire
Service Kit in the place provided. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in injuries
that are serious or fatal to you, your passen-
gers, and others around you.
WARNING!
Take care not to allow the contents of Tire
Service Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes,
or clothing. Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful
if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed through the
skin. It causes skin, eye, and respiratory irrita-
tion. Flush immediately with plenty of water if
there is any contact with eyes or skin. Change
clothing as soon as possible, if there is any
contact with clothing.
Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains
latex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash,
consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire
Service Kit out of reach of children. If swal-
lowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of
water and drink plenty of water. Do not induce
vomiting! Consult a physician immediately.
WARNING!
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 234
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 235
SEALING A TIRE WITH TIRE SERVICE KIT
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service
Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the
vehicle’s Hazard Warning Flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with
the deflated tire) is in a position that is near to
the ground. This will allow the Tire Service Kit
Hoses and to reach the valve stem and keep
the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground. This will
provide the best positioning of the kit when
injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and
running the air pump. Move the vehicle as
necessary to place the valve stem in this
position before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (P) (auto
transmission) or in Gear (manual
transmission) and place the ignition in the OFF
position.
4. Apply the parking brake.
(B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob and turn to the
Sealant Mode position.
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose and then remove the
cap from the fitting at the end of the hose.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground
next to the deflated tire.
4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then
screw the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose
onto the valve stem.
5. Uncoil the Power Plug and insert the plug into
the vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
NOTE:
Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) from the tire.
(C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into
The Deflated Tire:
Always start the engine before turning ON the
Tire Service Kit.
NOTE:
Manual transmission vehicles must have the
parking brake engaged and the gear selector in
NEUTRAL.
After pushing the Power Button, the sealant
(white fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle
through the Sealant Hose and into the tire.
NOTE:
Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the
tire.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within
0 – 10 seconds through the Sealant Hose:
1. Push the Power Button to turn Off the Tire
Service Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose
from the valve stem. Make sure the valve
stem is free of debris. Reconnect the Sealant
Hose to the valve stem. Check that the Mode
Select Knob is in the Sealant Mode position
and not Air Mode. Push the Power Button to
turn On the Tire Service Kit.
2. Connect the Power Plug to a different 12 Volt
power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle,
if available. Make sure the engine is running
before turning ON the Tire Service Kit.
3. The Sealant Bottle may be empty due to
previous use. Call for assistance.
NOTE:
If the Mode Select Knob is on Air Mode and the
pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air
Pump Hose only, not the Sealant Hose.
7
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 235
236 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the
Sealant Hose:
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is
no longer flowing through the hose (typically
takes 30 - 70 seconds). As the sealant flows
through the Sealant Hose, the Pressure
Gauge can read as high as 70 psi (4.8 Bar).
The Pressure Gauge will decrease quickly
from approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the
actual tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle
is empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire
immediately after the Sealant Bottle is empty.
Continue to operate the pump and inflate the
tire to the pressure indicated on the tire
pressure label on the driver-side latch pillar
(recommended pressure). Check the tire
pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge.
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi
(1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
NOTE:
Never operate the compressor for longer than
20 minutes. Risk of Overheating.
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to
drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
NOTE:
If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Deflation
Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or
is at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within
15 minutes:
1. Push the Power Button to turn off the Tire
Service Kit.
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of
the Sealant Bottle and place the sticker on the
instrument panel.
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose
from the valve stem, reinstall the cap on the
fitting at the end of the hose, and place the Tire
Service Kit in the vehicle storage location.
(D) Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating
the tire, drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or
10 minutes to ensure distribution of the Tire
Service Kit Sealant within the tire. Do not exceed
50 mph (80 km/h).
(E) After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location Ú page 235.
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob and turn to the
Air Mode position.
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into
the vehicle's 12 Volt power outlet.
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (black in color) and
screw the fitting at the end of hose onto the
valve stem.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the
Pressure Gauge.
CAUTION!
The metal end fitting from Power Plug may get
hot after use, so it should be handled care-
fully.
Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the
end of the Sealant Hose can result in sealant
contacting your skin, clothing, and the
vehicle’s interior. It can also result in sealant
contacting internal Tire Service Kit compo-
nents which may cause permanent damage to
the kit.
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire
repair. Have the tire inspected and repaired or
replaced after using Tire Service Kit. Do not
exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) until the tire is
repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this
warning can result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around
you.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 236
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 237
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to
drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
1. Push the Power Button to turn on Tire Service
Kit and inflate the tire to the pressure
indicated on the tire and loading information
label on the driver-side door opening.
NOTE:
If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Deflation
Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve
stem, reinstall the cap on the valve stem and
unplug from 12 Volt outlet.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage
area in the vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or
replaced at the earliest opportunity at an
authorized dealer or tire service center.
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the
instrument panel after the tire has been
repaired.
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle and Sealant Hose
assembly at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible Ú page 237.
NOTE:
When having the tire serviced, advise the autho-
rized dealer or service center that the tire has been
sealed using the Tire Service Kit.
(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (clear in color).
2. Locate the red colored round Sealant Bottle
release button at the lower right hand corner
of the kit.
3. Push and hold the Sealant Bottle release
button, then pull out the bottle holding the
button.
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire
Service Kit housing.
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle in the housing
so that the Sealant Hose aligns with the hose
slot in the front of the housing. Push and hold
the Sealant Bottle release button, then push
the bottle into the housing by holding the
button. An audible click will be heard indicating
the bottle is locked into place. Release the
button.
6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at
the end of the Sealant Hose and return the
hose to its storage area (located on top of the
housing).
7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage
location in the vehicle.
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be
jump started using a set of jumper cables and a
battery in another vehicle or by using a portable
battery booster pack. Jump starting can be
dangerous if done improperly, so please follow the
procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack, follow
the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is
frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause
personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or
any other booster source with a system voltage
greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery,
starter motor, alternator or electrical system may
occur.
7
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 237
238 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP START
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of
the engine compartment, behind the left headlight
assembly.
Positive (+) Battery Post
See below steps to prepare for jump starting:
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic
transmission into PARK (P) and turn the
ignition OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump start the
battery, park the vehicle within the jumper
cable’s reach, apply the parking brake and
make sure the ignition is OFF.
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive
(+) end of the jumper
cable to the positive
(+)
post of the discharged
vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable to the positive
(+) post of the
booster battery.
3. Connect the negative
(-) end of the jumper
cable to the negative
(-) post of the booster
battery.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and
personal injury could result.
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. It can start
anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be
injured by moving fan blades.
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could make
an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be
seriously injured.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn
your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas
which is flammable and explosive. Keep open
flames or sparks away from the battery.
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure
could result in personal injury or property
damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster
vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 238
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 239
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable to a good engine ground. A
“ground” is an exposed metallic/unpainted
part of the engine, frame or chassis, such as
an accessory bracket or large bolt. The ground
must be away from the battery and the fuel
injection system.
Jump Starting Label
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the
booster battery, let the engine idle for a few
minutes, and then start the engine in the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, follow the discon-
necting procedure below.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative
(-)
end of the jumper
cable from the engine ground of the vehicle
with the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable from the negative
(-) post of the
booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive
(+) end of the jumper
cable from the positive
(+) post of the booster
battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive
(+)
jumper cable from the positive
(+) post of the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your
vehicle, you should have the battery and charging
system inspected at an authorized dealer.
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY – IF EQUIPPED
The vehicle is equipped with a refueling funnel for
a Cap-Less Fuel System, which can be found under
the load floor in the rear cargo area. If refueling is
necessary, while using an approved gas can, insert
the refueling funnel into the filler neck opening.
Take care to open both flappers with the funnel to
avoid spills.
Fuel Funnel Location
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative
(-) post of the discharged battery. The resulting
electrical spark could cause the battery to
explode and could result in personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not run the booster vehicle engine above
2,000 RPM since it provides no charging benefit,
wastes fuel, and can damage booster vehicle
engine.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power
outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough without
engine operation, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
7
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 239
240 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel
door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on
the fuel door to break the ice buildup and
re-release the fuel door. Do not pry on the door.
Emergency Gas Can Refueling
Most gas cans will not open the flapper doors. A
funnel is provided to allow emergency refueling
with a gas can.
See below steps for refueling:
1. Retrieve funnel from the spare tire storage
area.
2. Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as
the fuel nozzle.
Inserting Funnel
3. Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper
doors open.
4. Pour fuel into funnel opening.
5. Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior
to putting back in the spare tire storage area.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be
serviced by an authorized dealer.
In any of the following situations, you can reduce
the potential for overheating your engine by taking
the appropriate action.
On the highways — slow down.
In city traffic — while stopped, place the trans-
mission in NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase
engine idle speed.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open or
the tank is being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light to turn on.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle.
You could be burned. Always place fuel
containers on the ground while filling.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H”, pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the
vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range. If
the pointer remains on the “H” and you hear
continuous chimes, turn the engine off
immediately and call for service.
WARNING!
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 240
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 241
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow down an
impending overheat condition:
If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The
A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling
system and turning the A/C off can help remove
this heat.
You can also turn the temperature control to
maximum heat, the mode control to floor and
the blower control to high. This allows the heater
core to act as a supplement to the radiator and
aids in removing heat from the engine cooling
system.
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector
cannot be moved out of the PARK (P) position, you
can use the following procedure to temporarily
move the gear selector:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, carefully
separate the shifter bezel and boot assembly
from the center console, and raise it up to
access the gear selector mechanism.
Shifter Bezel/Boot
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake
pedal.
5. Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool down
into the gear selector override access hole (at
the right front corner of the gear selector
assembly), and push and hold the override
release lever down.
Override Access Hole
6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL (N)
position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL
(N).
8. Reinstall the gear selector boot.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator.
If you see or hear steam coming from under the
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator
has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling
system pressure cap when the radiator or
coolant bottle is hot.
7
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 241
242 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow,
it can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn
the steering wheel right and left to clear the area
around the front wheels. Push and hold the lock
button on the gear selector. Then shift back and
forth between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R), while
gently pressing the accelerator.
NOTE:
Shifts between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R) can only
be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or
less. Whenever the transmission remains in
NEUTRAL (N) for more than two seconds, you must
press the brake pedal to engage DRIVE (D) or
REVERSE (R).
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal
pressure that will maintain the rocking motion
without spinning the wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE:
Push the ESC OFF button (if necessary), to place
the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in
“Partial Off” mode, before rocking the vehicle
Ú page 171. Once the vehicle has been freed,
push the ESC OFF button again to restore “ESC On”
mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause
damage, or even failure, of the axle and tires. A
tire could explode and injure someone. Do not
spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds
continuously without stopping when you are
stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning
wheel, no matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may
lead to transmission overheating and failure.
Allow the engine to idle with the transmission
in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every
five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize
overheating and reduce the risk of clutch or
transmission failure during prolonged efforts
to free a stuck vehicle.
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or
drivetrain damage may result.
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too
fast may lead to transmission overheating and
failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not
spin the wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h)
while in gear (no transmission shifting occur-
ring).
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 242
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 243
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, disabled 4x4 vehicles may also be towed Ú page 142.
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for this purpose, following
equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle,
not to fascia/bumper or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed.
NOTE:
You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is disabled before towing this vehicle, to avoid inadvertent Electric Park Brake engagement. The Auto Park
Brake feature is enabled or disabled via the customer programmable features in the Uconnect Settings.
Vehicles with a discharged battery or total electrical failure when the Electric Park Brake (EPB) is engaged, will need a wheel dolly or jack to raise the rear
wheels off the ground when moving the vehicle onto a flatbed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode, not the ACC mode.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground FWD MODELS
4X4 MODELS
1–SPEED
POWER TRANSFER UNIT
2–SPEED
POWER TRANSFER UNIT
Flat Tow NONE
NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Detailed instructions Ú page 142
Transmission in
PARK
Power Transfer Unit in NEUTRAL
Tow in
forward direction
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Rear
NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Front OK NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD OK BEST METHOD
7
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 243
244 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE:
The Safehold feature will engage the Electric Park
Brake whenever the driver's door is opened (if the
ignition is ON, transmission is not in PARK, and
brake pedal is released). If you are towing this
vehicle with the ignition in the ON/RUN mode, you
must manually disable the Electric Park Brake
each time the driver's door is opened, by pressing
the brake pedal and then releasing the EPB.
If the ignition key is unavailable, or the vehicle's
battery is discharged, for instructions on shifting
the transmission out of PARK (P) for towing
Ú page 241.
FRONT-WHEEL DRIVE (FWD) MODELS
The FCA US LLC recommends towing your vehicle
with all four wheels
OFF of the ground using a
flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, this vehicle
must be towed with the front wheels
OFF of the
ground (using a towing dolly, or wheel lift
equipment with the front wheels raised).
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released,
and remains released, while being towed. The
Electric Park Brake does not need to be released,
if all four wheels are
OFF the ground.
4X4 MODELS WITH 1–SPEED POWER
T
RANSFER UNIT
The FCA US LLC requires towing with all four
wheels
OFF the ground.
Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a
flatbed, or with one end of vehicle raised and the
opposite end on a towing dolly.
4X4 MODELS WITH 2–SPEED POWER
T
RANSFER UNIT
The FCA US LLC recommends towing with all four
wheels
OFF the ground.
Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a
flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised and
the opposite end on a towing dolly.
CAUTION!
Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck,
do not attach to front or rear suspension
components. Damage to your vehicle may
result from improper towing.
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is
released, and remains released, while being
towed.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
CAUTION!
DO NOT tow this vehicle with ANY of its wheels
on the ground. Damage to the drivetrain will
result.
Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if
the remaining wheels are on the ground).
Internal damage to the transmission or power
transfer unit will occur if a front or rear wheel
lift is used when towing.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
and/or power transfer unit damage. Damage
from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 244
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 245
If flatbed equipment is not available and the Power
Transfer Unit is operable, vehicles
with a 2–speed
Power Transfer Unit may be towed (in the forward
direction, with
ALL wheels on the ground), under
the following conditions:
The Power Transfer Unit must be in NEUTRAL
(N).
The transmission must be in
PARK (P).
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released,
and remains released, while being towed
Ú page 142.
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS —
I
F EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, there
will be two mounted in the front fascia/bumper
and one in the rear fascia/bumper. The rear tow
hook will be located on the driver's side of the
vehicle.
Front Tow Hooks
NOTE:
For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of
damage to the vehicle.
Rear Tow Hook
CAUTION!
Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if
the remaining wheels are on the ground).
Internal damage to the transmission or power
transfer unit will occur if a front or rear wheel
lift is used when towing.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
and/or power transfer unit damage. Damage
from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle.
Chains may break, causing serious injury or
death.
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
hooks. Tow straps may become disengaged,
causing serious injury.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue
a vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow
hooks for tow truck hookup or highway towing.
You could damage your vehicle.
7
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 245
246 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
RECOVERY STRAP — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be included with a recovery strap.
Recovery straps do not act like traditional tow
straps, chains, or winch cables.
Using Recovery Strap
1. Review all warnings and instructions first.
2. Position the recovery vehicle.
3. Connect the recovery strap.
4. Add a recovery damper or blanket.
5. Clear the danger zone.
6. Safely and slowly start pulling.
7. Disconnect the recovery strap after both
vehicles are secure and parked.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced
Accident Response System.
This feature is a communication network that
takes effect in the event of an impact. Detailed
information can be found on Ú page 208.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to
record data that will assist in understanding how a
vehicle’s systems performed under certain crash
or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle. Detailed
information can be found on Ú page 209.
WARNING!
Recovery straps should only be used in
emergencies to rescue stranded vehicles. Only
use Recovery straps on vehicles that fit within
the recommended Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
of your recovery strap. Only attach recovery
straps to OE recommended anchor points or
emergency towing anchor points. Never attach
to tow ball or vehicle tie down point, these are
not designed for this purpose. Never attach to
vehicle steering, drive train, or any other
suspension components. NEVER pull a strap
over sharp edges or abrasive surfaces that can
damage the recovery strap. NEVER use a
damaged strap, it has reduced strength. DO NOT
attempt to repair straps. ONLY persons involved
in the recovery should be in either vehicle. No
passengers. Anyone inside the vehicles can be
struck by strap recoil, causing serious injury.
MOVE bystanders at least 40 ft (12.2 m) from
the recovery area when using the recovery strap.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 246
247
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil
change indicator system. The oil change indicator
system will remind you that it is time to take your
vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate. This
means that service is required for your vehicle.
Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips,
trailer tow, or extremely hot or cold ambient
temperatures will influence when the “Oil Change
Required” message is displayed. Have your vehicle
serviced as soon as possible, within the next
500 miles (805 km).
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the scheduled
oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed
by someone other than an authorized dealer, the
message can be reset by referring to the steps
described under Instrument Cluster Display
Ú page 75.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),
12 months or 350 hours of engine run time,
whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine
run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet
customers.
At Every Fuel Stop:
Check engine oil level.
Check windshield washer fluid level.
Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear
or damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irreg-
ular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indi-
cator system turns on.
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir
and brake master cylinder; fill as needed.
Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
8
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 247
248 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE PLAN
Refer to the following required maintenance intervals.
NOTE:
Using white lithium grease, lubricate the door hinge roller pivot joints twice a year to prevent premature wear.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter.
Rotate the tires at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 248
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 249
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, boot seals. tie rod ends,
and replace if necessary.
X X X X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function. X X X X X X X
Inspect front accessory drive belt, tensioner, idler
pulley, and replace if necessary.
X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Clean and lube sun roof tracks. X X X X X X X
Replace the cabin air filter. To be replaced every 12,000 mi (19,000 km).
Replace spark plugs — 2.0L Engine.
1
X X
Replace spark plugs — 2.4L & 3.2L Engine.
1
X
8
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 249
250 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes
first.
X X
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X
1. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have
any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and affect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause
an accident.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 250
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 251
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
2.0L ENGINE
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter 5 — Engine Oil Dipstick
2 — Oil Fill Cap 6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 7 — Battery
4 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
8
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 251
252 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
2.4L ENGINE
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter 5 — Engine Oil Dipstick
2 — Oil Fill Cap 6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 7 — Battery
4 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 252
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 253
3.2L ENGINE
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter 6 — Engine Oil Dipstick
2 — Oil Filter Access Cover 7 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 8 — Battery
4 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 9 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
5 — Engine Oil Fill
8
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 253
254 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
CHECKING OIL LEVEL
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil
must be maintained at the correct level. Check the
oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel
stop. The best time to check the engine oil level is
about five minutes after a fully warmed up engine
is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground
will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
There are four possible dipstick types:
Crosshatched zone.
Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low
end of the range and MAX at the high end of the
range.
Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at the
MIN and the MAX ends of the range.
NOTE:
Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch
markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 quart (1 liter) of oil when the reading is at
the low end of the dipstick range will raise the oil
level to the high end of the range marking.
ADDING WASHER FLUID
The windshield and rear window washers share the
same fluid reservoir. The fluid reservoir is located
in the front of the engine compartment. Be sure to
check the fluid level in the reservoir at regular
intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer
solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the
system for a few seconds to flush out the residual
water.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take
some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel
and wipe clean the wiper blades, this will help
blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer
system in cold weather, select a solution or mixture
that meets or exceeds the temperature range of
your climate. This rating information can be found
on most washer fluid containers.
MAINTENANCE-FREE BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free
battery. You will never have to add water, and
periodic maintenance is not required.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will
cause aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could
damage your engine.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer
solvents are flammable. They could ignite and
burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or
working around the washer solution.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and
can burn or even blind you. Do not allow
battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or
clothing. Do not lean over a battery when
attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or
on skin, flush the area immediately with large
amounts of water Ú page 237.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not
use a booster battery or any other booster
source with an output greater than 12 Volts.
Do not allow cable clamps to touch each
other.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 254
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 255
PRESSURE WASHING
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high
pressure washer is not recommended.
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service
personnel, special tools, and equipment to
perform all service operations in an expert
manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your
vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in
civil penalties being assessed against you.
ENGINE OIL
Engine Oil Selection
Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid
Ú page 303.
American Petroleum Institute (API)
Approved Engine Oil
These symbols mean that the oil has been certified
by the API. The manufacturer only recommends API
trademark oils.
The API Starburst trademark certifies
0W-20, 0W-30 and 5W-30 engine oils.
The API Donut trademark certifies 0W-40
and 5W-40 engine oil.
Battery posts, terminals, and related accesso-
ries contain lead and lead compounds. Wash
hands after handling.
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on
the battery that the positive cable is attached
to the positive post and the negative cable is
attached to the negative post. Battery posts
are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and
are identified on the battery case. Cable
clamps should be tight on the terminal posts
and free of corrosion.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is
in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery
cables before connecting the charger to the
battery. Do not use a “fast charger” to provide
starting voltage.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all
parts and connections however, the pressures
generated by these machines is such that
complete protection against water ingress
cannot be guaranteed.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which
you have the knowledge and the proper
equipment. If you have any doubt about your
ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle
to a competent mechanic.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as
the chemicals can damage your engine. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
8
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 255
256 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Synthetic Engine Oils
Your engine was designed for synthetic engine oils,
only use synthetic API approved engine oils.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the
correct API trademark and the correct SAE viscosity
grade numbers should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against
the addition of any additives (other than leak
detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an
engineered product and its performance may be
impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil
Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine
oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil
filters, indiscriminately discarded, can present a
problem to the environment. Contact an
authorized dealer, service station or governmental
agency for advice on how and where used oil and
oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
ENGINE OIL FILTER
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new
filter at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be used
for replacement. The quality of replacement filters
varies considerably. Only high quality Mopar®
certified filters should be used.
ENGINE AIR CLEANER FILTER
Refer to the Maintenance Plan in this section for
the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 248.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement filters varies
considerably. Only high quality Mopar® certified
filters should be used.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Replacement
Inspect engine air cleaner filter for dirt and or
debris. If you find evidence of either dirt or debris
you should change your air cleaner filter.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. Remove the screws from the engine air
cleaner filter cover.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) can provide a measure of protection in the
case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air
induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless
such removal is necessary for repair or
maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the
engine compartment before starting the vehicle
with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
1 — Clean Air Hose Clamp
2 — Screws
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 256
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 257
2. If equipped with a 2.0L, remove the screws
from the engine air cleaner filter cover and
disconnect the electrical sensor.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
3. Lift the engine air cleaner filter cover to access
the engine air cleaner filter.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Assembly
4. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from the
housing assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE:
Inspect and clean the housing assembly if dirt or
debris is present before replacing the engine air
cleaner filter.
1. Install the engine air cleaner filter into the
housing assembly with the engine air cleaner
filter inspection surface facing downward.
2. Install the engine air cleaner filter cover onto
the housing assembly locating tabs.
3. Install screws to secure the engine air cleaner
filter cover to the housing assembly and
reconnect the electrical connector (if
equipped).
ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT INSPECTION
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small
cracks that run across ribbed surface of belt from
rib to rib, are considered normal. These are not a
reason to replace belt. However, cracks running
along a rib (not across) are not normal. Any belt
with cracks running along a rib must be replaced.
Also have the belt replaced if it has excessive wear,
frayed cords or severe glazing.
1 — Screws
2 — Electrical Connector
3 — Clean Air Hose Clamp
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
WARNING!
Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive
belt with the vehicle running.
You can be badly injured working on or around
a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which
you have the knowledge and the proper equip-
ment. If you have any doubt about your ability
to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a
competent mechanic.
8
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 257
258 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
Conditions that would require replacement:
Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated
from belt body)
Rib or belt wear
Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two
ribs)
Belt slips
“Groove jumping" (belt does not maintain
correct position on pulley)
Belt broken
NOTE:
Identify and correct problem before new belt is
installed.
Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble
is heard or felt while drive belt is in operation)
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty
component such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys
should be carefully inspected for damage and
proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the
use of special tools; we recommend having your
vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer.
AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized
dealer at the start of each warm season. This
service should include cleaning of the condenser
fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension
should also be checked at this time.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a — If Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a Hydrofluo-
rocarbon (HFC) that is an ozone-friendly
substance. It is recommended that air conditioning
service be performed by an authorized dealer or
other service facilities using recovery and recycling
equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil and refrigerants.
WARNING!
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri-
cants approved by the manufacturer for your
air conditioning system. Some unapproved
refrigerants are flammable and can explode,
injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or
lubricants can cause the system to fail,
requiring costly repairs. Refer to Warranty
Information Book, located in your owner’s
information kit, for further warranty informa-
tion.
The air conditioning system contains refrig-
erant under high pressure. To avoid risk of
personal injury or damage to the system,
adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines
to be disconnected should be done by an
experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air
conditioning system as the chemicals can
damage your air conditioning components. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 258
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 259
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-1234yf — If Equipped
R-1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a Hydroflu-
oroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the
Environmental Protection Agency and is an
ozone-friendly substance with a low
global-warming potential. It is recommended that
air conditioning service be performed by an
authorized dealer using recovery and recycling
equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil, and refrigerants.
Cabin Air Filter
The cabin air filter is located in front of the
evaporator on the lower right of center console.
Perform the following procedure to replace the
filter:
1. Remove the passenger side console closeout
cover.
2. Pull the console closeout cover rearward to
disengage the front retaining tab and remove
the cover.
Console Closeout Panel
3. Pull down the passenger hush panel under the
dash panel.
Hush Panel
4. Remove the filter door by pushing down the
tab on the top of the door to release the cover
then rotate the door out and lift up.
Air Filter Cover Location
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the
vehicle is running, or while the ignition is in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. With the cabin air filter
removed and the blower operating, the blower
can contact hands and may propel dirt and
debris into your eyes, resulting in personal injury.
8
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 259
260 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
5. Remove the cabin air filter by pulling it straight
out of the housing. Take note of the air filter
position indicators.
Cabin Air Filter
6. Install the cabin air filter with the air filter
position indicators pointing in the same
direction as removal.
7. Install the passenger side hush panel under
the dash panel and console closeout.
Refer to the Maintenance Plan in this chapter for
the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 248.
BODY LUBRICATION
Locks and all body pivot points, including such
items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and
rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and
hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with
a lithium based grease, such as Mopar® Spray
White Lube to ensure quiet, easy operation and to
protect against rust and wear. Prior to the
application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit;
after lubricating, excess oil and grease should be
removed. Particular attention should also be given
to hood latching components to ensure proper
function. When performing other underhood
services, the hood latch, release mechanism and
safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated
twice a year, preferably in the Autumn and Spring.
Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant,
such as Mopar® Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly
into the lock cylinder.
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth
and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove
accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long
periods may cause deterioration of the wiper
blades. Always use washer fluid when using the
wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice
from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of
contact with petroleum products such as engine
oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. If chat-
tering, marks, water lines or wet spots are present,
clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be
inspected periodically, not just when wiper
performance problems are experienced. This
inspection should include the following points:
Wear or uneven edges
Foreign material
Hardening or cracking
Deformation or fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace
the affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do
not attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is
damaged.
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter.
Failure to properly install the filter will result in
the need to replace it more often.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 260
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 261
Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off
of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the full
up position.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper
arm, flip up the release tab on the wiper blade
and while holding the wiper arm with one
hand, slide the wiper blade down towards the
base of the wiper arm.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position
3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the
wiper blade from the wiper arm by holding the
wiper arm with one hand and separating the
wiper blade from the wiper arm with the other
hand (move the wiper blade toward the right
side of the vehicle to separate the wiper blade
from the wiper arm).
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back
against the glass without the wiper blade in
place or the glass may be damaged.
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
8
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 261
262 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the
wiper arm is in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on the
tip of the wiper arm with the wiper release tab
open and the blade side of the wiper facing up
and away from the windshield.
3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm through
the opening in the wiper blade under the
release tab.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the
wiper arm and rotate the wiper blade until it is
flush against the wiper arm. Fold down the
latch release tab and snap it into its locked
position. Latch engagement will be
accompanied by an audible click.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from
the glass to allow the rear wiper blade to be
raised off of the glass.
NOTE:
The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the
glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped
first. Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm
without unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may
damage the vehicle.
Wiper Pivot Cap In Unlocked Position
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
Wiper Blade In Folded Out Position
3. To remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm,
grab the bottom end of the wiper blade
nearest to wiper arm with one hand. With your
left hand hold the wiper arm as you pull the
wiper blade away from the wiper arm past its
stop far enough to unsnap the wiper blade
pivot pin from the receptacle on the end of the
wiper arm.
NOTE:
Resistance will be accompanied by an audible
snap.
1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2 — Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 262
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 263
(Continued)
4. Still grabbing the bottom end of the wiper
blade, move the wiper blade upward and away
from the wiper arm to disengage.
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
5. Gently lower the tip of the wiper arm onto the
glass.
Installing The Rear Wiper
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from
the glass to allow the rear wiper blade to be
raised off of the glass.
NOTE:
The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the
glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped
first. Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm
without unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may
damage the vehicle.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
3. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the
opening on the end of the wiper arm. Grab the
bottom end of the wiper arm with one hand,
and apply pressure on the wiper blade flush
with the wiper arm until it snaps into place.
4. Lower the wiper blade onto the glass and snap
the wiper arm pivot cap back into place.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained
engine exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust
system; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected
inside the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of
the vehicle is damaged; have an authorized
technician inspect the complete exhaust system
and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged,
deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, have the exhaust system inspected each
time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
change. Replace as required.
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Blade Pivot Pin
3 — Wiper Arm Receptacle
4 — Wiper Arm
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you uncon-
scious and can eventually poison you. To
avoid breathing CO see Ú page 221.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you
park over materials that can burn. Such mate-
rials might be grass or leaves coming into
contact with your exhaust system. Do not park
or operate your vehicle in areas where your
exhaust system can contact anything that can
burn.
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will
destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an
emissions control device and may seriously
reduce engine performance and cause
serious damage to the engine.
8
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 263
264 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic
converter will not require maintenance. However, it
is important to keep the engine properly tuned to
ensure proper catalyst operation and prevent
possible catalyst damage.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly
malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor
may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst
overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off
the engine and allow it to cool. Service, including a
tune-up to manufacturer's specifications, should
be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter
damage:
Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmis-
sion is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or
towing the vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any ignition compo-
nents disconnected or removed, such as when
diagnostic testing, or for prolonged periods
during very rough idle or malfunctioning oper-
ating conditions.
COOLING SYSTEM
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection
every 12 months (before the onset of freezing
weather, where applicable). If the engine coolant is
dirty, the system should be drained, flushed, and
refilled with fresh Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an
authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C
condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves,
etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a
garden hose vertically down the face of the
condenser.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle
rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the
connection at the coolant recovery bottle and
radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks. DO
NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP
WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if
your vehicle is not kept in proper operating
condition. In the event of engine malfunction,
particularly involving engine misfire or other
apparent loss of performance, have your
vehicle serviced promptly. Continued opera-
tion of your vehicle with a severe malfunction
could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter
and vehicle.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your
radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from
under the hood, do not open the hood until the
radiator has had time to cool. Never open a
cooling system pressure cap when the radi-
ator or coolant bottle is hot.
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away
from the radiator cooling fan when the hood is
raised. The fan starts automatically and may
start at any time, whether the engine is
running or not.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the igni-
tion to the OFF mode. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time the igni-
tion is in the ON mode.
WARNING!
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 264
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 265
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly
could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any
coolant is needed to be added to the system
please contact an authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
contains visible sediment, have an authorized
dealer clean and flush with Organic Additive
Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming to
MS.90032).
Refer to the Maintenance Plan in this section for
the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 248.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to Engine Fluids And Lubricants for further
information Ú page 303.
NOTE:
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT)
engine coolant, may result in engine damage
and may decrease corrosion protection. OAT
engine coolant is different and should not be
mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology
(HOAT) engine coolant or any “globally compat-
ible” coolant. If a non-OAT engine coolant is
introduced into the cooling system in an emer-
gency, the cooling system will need to be
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant products. Do not use additional rust
inhibitors or anti-rust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant
and may plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant. Use of
propylene glycol-based engine coolant is not
recommended.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to
the system please contact an authorized dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle is built with engine coolant (OAT
coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows
extended maintenance intervals. This engine
coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement.
To prevent reducing this extended maintenance
period, it is important that you use the same
engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using
OAT engine coolant that meets the requirements of
the manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
When adding engine coolant:
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
Formula OAT that meets the requirements of the
manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine
coolant that meets the requirements of the
manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032
and distilled water. Use higher concentrations
(not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
−34°F (−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact
an authorized dealer for assistance.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or
deionized water when mixing the water/engine
coolant solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection
in the engine cooling system.
NOTE:
It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the
proper level of protection against freezing
according to the temperatures occurring in the
area where the vehicle is operated.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
8
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 265
266 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to
the system, please contact a local authorized
dealer.
Mixing engine coolant types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system
damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in
an emergency, have an authorized dealer drain,
flush, and refill with OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) as soon as possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that
engine coolant will return to the radiator from the
coolant expansion bottle/recovery tank (if
equipped).
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there
is any accumulation of foreign material on the
sealing surfaces.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal.
Check with your local authorities to determine the
disposal rules for your community. To prevent
ingestion by animals or children, do not store
ethylene glycol-based coolant in open containers
or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground,
clean up any ground spills immediately. If ingested,
seek emergency assistance immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method
for determining that the coolant level is adequate.
With the engine off and cold, the level of the engine
coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be
between the ranges indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so
there is no need to remove the radiator/coolant
pressure cap unless checking for engine coolant
freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your
service attendant of this. As long as the engine
operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant
only needs to be checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant is needed to
maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that
meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS.90032 should be added to
the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Cooling System Notes
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/kilo-
meters of operation, you may observe vapor
coming from the front of the engine compartment.
This is normally a result of moisture from rain,
snow, or high humidity accumulating on the
radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat
opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to
enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment
shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the
vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will soon
dissipate.
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator
and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine
coolant needs to be added, the contents of the
coolant expansion bottle must also be protected
against freezing.
If frequent engine coolant additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure
tested for leaks.
WARNING!
Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never
add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the
engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated engine.
Heat causes pressure to build up in the
cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
do not remove the pressure cap while the
system is hot or under pressure.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or
engine damage may result.
WARNING!
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 266
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 267
(Continued)
Maintain engine coolant concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corro-
sion protection of your engine which contains
aluminum components.
Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle
overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your
vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep
the front of the condenser clean.
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or
Winter operation. If replacement is ever neces-
sary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat.
Other designs may result in unsatisfactory
engine cooling performance, poor gas mileage,
and increased emissions.
BRAKE SYSTEM
In order to ensure brake system performance, all
brake system components should be inspected
periodically. Refer to the Maintenance Plan for the
proper maintenance intervals Ú page 248.
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level of the brake master cylinder should
be checked whenever the vehicle is serviced, or
immediately if the brake system warning light is on.
If necessary, add fluid to bring level within the
designated marks on the side of the reservoir of
the brake master cylinder. Be sure to clean the top
of the master cylinder area before removing cap.
With disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall
as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level should be
checked when pads are replaced. If the brake fluid
is abnormally low, check the system for leaks. For
further information Ú page 303.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in
abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive
lining wear, and possible brake damage. You
would not have your full braking capacity in an
emergency.
WARNING!
Use only manufacturer's recommended brake
fluid. For further information Ú page 303.
Using the wrong type of brake fluid can
severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of
brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on
the original factory installed hydraulic master
cylinder reservoir.
To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep
the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at
all times. Brake fluid in a open container
absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a
lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil
unexpectedly during hard or prolonged
braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This
could result in a collision.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result
in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts,
causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake
fluid can also damage painted and vinyl
surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its
contact with these surfaces.
8
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 267
268 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Special Additives
It is strongly recommended against using any
special additives in the transmission. Automatic
Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product
and its performance may be impaired by
supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any
fluid additives to the transmission. Avoid using
transmission sealers as they may adversely affect
seals.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating
conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not
required; therefore the transmission has no
dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your
transmission fluid level using special service tools.
If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer
immediately to have the transmission fluid level
checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper
fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid
installed at the factory will provide satisfactory
lubrication for the life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required.
However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid
becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the
transmission is disassembled for any reason.
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid
to ensure optimum transmission performance and
life. Use only the manufacturer's specified
transmission fluid Ú page 303. It is important to
maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level
using the recommended fluid.
NOTE:
No chemical flushes should be used in any trans-
mission; only the approved lubricant should be
used.
Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to contam-
inate the brake fluid. Brake seal components
could be damaged, causing partial or
complete brake failure. This could result in a
collision.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your
transmission as the chemicals can damage your
transmission components. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an
authorized dealer immediately. Severe
transmission damage may occur. An authorized
dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid
level accurately.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause
deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or
torque converter shudder. For fluid
specifications Ú page 303.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 268
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 269
FUSES
General Information
The fuses protect electrical systems against
excessive current.
When a device does not work, you must check the
fuse element inside the blade fuse for a break/
melt.
Also, please be aware that when using power
outlets for extended periods of time with the
engine off may result in vehicle battery discharge.
Blade Fuses
Underhood Fuses
The Power Distribution Center is located in the
engine compartment near the battery. This center
contains cartridge fuses, mini-fuses and relays. A
label that identifies each component is printed on
the inside of the cover.
WARNING!
When replacing a blown fuse, always use an
appropriate replacement fuse with the same
amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace
a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating.
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indi-
cated may result in a dangerous electrical
system overload. If a properly rated fuse
continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the
circuit that must be corrected. Never replace a
blown fuse with metal wires or any other mate-
rial. Do not place a fuse inside a circuit
breaker cavity or vice versa. Failure to use
proper fuses may result in serious personal
injury, fire and/or property damage.
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
ignition is off and that all the other services
are switched off and/or disengaged.
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an
authorized dealer.
If a general protection fuse for safety systems
(air bag system, braking system), power unit
systems (engine system, transmission
system) or steering system blows, contact an
authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
If it is necessary to wash the engine
compartment, take care not to directly hit the
fuse box, and the windshield wiper motors with
water.
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse With A Good/Functional Fuse
Element
3 — Blade Fuse With A Bad / Not Functional Fuse
Element (Blown Fuse)
CAUTION!
When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is
properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to
do so may allow water to get into the power
distribution center and possibly result in an
electrical system failure.
8
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 269
270 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Power Distribution Location
Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F01 – 70 Amp Gray Electric Power Str
F02 – 150 Amp Gray Aux PDC *
F03 – 300 Amp Gray Alternator
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 270
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 271
F04 – – Battery
F05 – 100 Amp Gray Rad Fan
F06 – – Not Used
F07 15 Amp Blue – Powertrain Control Mod (PCM) * / Surge Solenoid Purge Valve *
F08 25 Amp Clear – Fuel Injectors / ECM / PCM/
F09 15 Amp Blue –
Coolant Pump *
UREA Coolant Pump/PCM *
F10 20 Amp Yellow – Power Transfer Unit (PTU) *
F11 – – Not Used
F12 10 Amp Red – Purging Pump *
F13 10 Amp Red –
Voltage Stability Mod (VSM)/Powertrain Control Mod (PCM)/Engine
Control Module (ECM)
F14 10 Amp Red –
Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM)*/Power Take-Off Unit (PTU)*/Electric
Park Brake (EPB) / RDM*/ Brake System Module (BSM) / Brake Pedal
Switch / Back Up Lamp Switch *
F15 – – Not Used
F16 20 Amp Yellow – Ign Coils / Additional Diesel Content
F17 30 Amp Pink – Brake Vacuum Pump *
F18 – – Not Used
F19 – 40 Amp Green Starter
Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description
* If Equipped
8
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 271
272 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F20 10 Amp Red – A/C Clutch
F21 – – Not Used
F22 5 Amp Tan – Radiator Fan (PWM) Enable
F23 50 Amp Red – Voltage Stability Module (VSM) #2
F24 20 Amp Yellow – Rear Wiper
F25B 20 Amp Yellow – FT/RR Washer
F26 – 30 Amp Pink Fuel Heater *
F27 – – Not Used
F28 15 Amp Blue – Transmission Control Module (TCM/Shifter)
F29 – – Not Used
F30 10 Amp Red –
Engine Control Module (ECM) / (EPS) / Fuel Pump Relay Feed / (PCM) /
Gas Particulate Filter (GPF)
F31 – – Not Used
F32 – – Not Used
F33 – – Not Used
F34 – – Not Used
F35 – – Not Used
F36 – – Not Used
F37 – – Not Used
Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description
* If Equipped
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 272
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 273
F38 – 60 Amp Yellow Glow Plug *
F39 – 40 Amp Green HVAC Blower Motor
F40 – 20 Amp Blue Trailer Tow Park Light *
F41 – 50 Amp Red Voltage Stability Module (VSM) #1
F42 – 30 Amp Pink Trailer Tow Module *
F43 20 Amp Yellow – Fuel Pump Motor
F44 – 30 Amp Pink Trailer Tow Receptacle *
F45 – 30 Amp Pink Passenger Door Module (PDM) *
F46 – 25 Amp Clear Sunroof Control Module *
F47 – – Not Used
F48 – 30 Amp Pink Driver Door Module *
F49 – 30 Amp Pink Power Inverter (115 Volt/220 Volt A/C) *
F50 – 30 Amp Pink Power Liftgate Module *
F51 – – Not Used
F52 – 30 Amp Pink Front Wipers
F53 – 30 Amp Pink Brake System Module (BSM) - ECU And Valves
F54 – 30 Amp Pink Body Control Module (BCM) Feed 3
F55 10 Amp Red – Blind Spot Sensors*/Rearview Camera*/ Rear Heated Seat Switch *
Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description
* If Equipped
8
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 273
274 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F56 15 Amp Blue –
Ignition Node Module (IGNM) / KIN / RF Hub / Electric Steering Column
Lock (ESCL) / USB Port
F57 20 Amp Yellow – Trailer Tow Left Stop/Turn Lights *
F58 10 Amp Red – Occupant Classification Module/VSM/TT Mod
F59 – 30 Amp Pink Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) *
F60 20 Amp Yellow – Power Outlet – Center Console
F61 20 Amp Yellow – Trailer Tow Right Stop/Turn Lights *
F62 20 Amp Yellow – Windshield De-Icer *
F63 20 Amp Yellow – Front Heated/Ventilated Seats *
F64 20 Amp Yellow – Rear Heated Seats *
F65 10 Amp Red –
In Vehicle Temperature Sensor*/Humidity Sensor*/Driver Assist System
Module (DASM)*/Park Assist (PAM) *
F66 15 Amp Blue – HVAC (ECC)/Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC)/Gateway Module
F67 – – Not Used
F68 – – Not Used
F69 10 Amp Red – Transfer Case Switch (TSBM)/Active Grill Shutter (AGS) *
F70 5 Amp Tan – Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS)
F71 – – Not Used
F72 10 Amp Red – Heated Mirrors * / PM Sensor *
F73 – 20 Amp Blue NOX Sensors*/ Trailer Tow Backup *
Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description
* If Equipped
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 274
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 275
F74 – 30 Amp Pink Rear Defroster (EBL)
F75 20 Amp Yellow – Cigar Lighter *
F76 20 Amp Yellow – Rear Differential Module (RDM) *
F77 10 Amp Red – Hands Free Release */ Brake Pedal Switch *
F78 10 Amp Red – DTV / TBM / OBD Port
F79 10 Amp Red –
Integrated Center Stack (ICS) / HVAC /Electric Park Brake (EPB) SW /
Steering Control Mod (SCCM) /HVAC /Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC)
F80 20 Amp Yellow – Radio
F81 – – Not Used
F82 5 Amp Tan – Gateway Module
F83 –
20 Amp Blue Engine Controller Module (ECM)*
30 Amp Pink SCU Module *
F84 – 30 Amp Pink Electric Park Brake (EPB) – Left
F85 15 Amp Blue – (CSWM) Heated Steering Wheel *
F86 20 Amp Yellow – Horn
F87 – – Not Used
F88 10 Amp Red – Seat Belt Reminder (SBR)*/Smart Camera *
F89 10 Amp Red – Auto/Manual Headlight Leveling*
F90 – – Not Used
Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description
* If Equipped
8
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 275
276 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
* 30 Amp mini fuse is substituted for 25 Amp Circuit Breaker.
F91 20 Amp Yellow – Power Outlet (Rear Seats Customer Selectable) *
F92 – – Not Used
F93 – 40 Amp Green Brake System Module (BSM) – Pump Motor
F94 – 30 Amp Pink Electric Park Brake (EPB) – Right
F95 10 Amp Red –
Sunroof Module */ Rain Sensor Module (LRSM) */ ECMM /Passenger
Window SW/ Power Outlet Console/ Illumination / DTV
F96 10 Amp Red – Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)/(Airbag)
F97 10 Amp Red – Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)/(Airbag)
F98 25 Amp Clear – Audio Amplifier/ANC *
F99 – – Not Used
F100 – – Not Used
Circuit Breakers
CB1 25 Amp Power Seat (Driver)
CB2 25 Amp Power Seat (Pass)
CB3 25 Amp Power Window
Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description
* If Equipped
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 276
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 277
Interior Fuses
The interior fuse panel is located on the Body Control Module (BCM) in the passenger compartment on the left side dash panel under the instrument panel.
Cavity Blade Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F32 10 Amp Red Interior Lightin
F36 10 Amp Red Intrusion Module/Siren *
F37 7.5 Amp Brown UCI Port (USB & AUX)
F38 20 Amp Yellow Deadbolt All Unlock
F42 7.5 Amp Brown Passenger Lumbar Support
F43 20 Amp Yellow Washer Pump Front
F48 25 Amp Clear Fog Lamp Rear Left/Right *
F49 7.5 Amp Brown Lumbar Support
F50 7.5 Amp Brown Wireless Charging Pad *
F51 7.5 Amp Brown Driver Window Switch/Power Mirrors *
8
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 277
278 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs, Names, And Part Numbers
In the instance a bulb needs to be replaced, this section includes bulb description and replacement part numbers.
NOTE:
See an Authorized Dealer for LED bulb replacement.
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Cargo Lamp TL212–2
Overhead Console Lamp PLW214–2A
Reading Lamp WL212–2
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Low Beam/High Beam Headlamps LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Front Park/Daytime Running Lamps LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Front Turn Signal Lamps LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Front Fog Lamps LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Rear Tail/Stop Lamps LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Rear Turn Signal Lamps LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Back-Up Lamps W21W
License Plate Lamp LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 278
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 279
Replacing Exterior Bulbs
BACK-UP LAMP
See below steps to replace:
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Use a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver at
the top of the bulb access cover to pry the
lower trim panel from the liftgate.
3. Once the access panel is loose, pull it back
exposing the insulation.
4. Move insulation towards center of vehicle to
expose the back of liftgate lamp.
5. Twist the socket counterclockwise and remove
from lamp.
6. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
7. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket.
8. Move insulation back to original position.
9. Close the liftgate.
TIRES
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the
following information: Tire Markings, Tire
Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and
Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
NOTE:
P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on US
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter
“P” molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
European — Metric tire sizing is based on Euro-
pean design standards. Tires designed to this
standard have the tire size molded into the side-
wall beginning with the section width. The letter
"P" is absent from this tire size designation.
Example: 215/65R15 96H.
LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on
US design standards. The size designation for
LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires
except for the letters “LT” that are molded into
the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: LT235/85R16.
Temporary spare tires are designed for tempo-
rary emergency use only. Temporary high pres-
sure compact spare tires have the letter “T” or
“S” molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
High flotation tire sizing is based on US design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter
molded into the sidewall.
Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
8
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 279
280 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TIRE SIZING CHART
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
"R" means radial construction, or
"D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading,
road conditions, and posted speed limits)
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 280
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 281
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including
the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is
not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
LL = Light load tire or
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
EXAMPLE:
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week
8
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 281
282 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Terminology And Definitions
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could
represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Term Definition
B-pillar The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum
of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa
(kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire
placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the
original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
EXAMPLE:
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 282
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 283
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the
driver's side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including
the spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and
inflate to the recommended pressure for your
vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about
the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the
vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear,
and spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not
exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your
vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load carrying
capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions,
tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified
on the Tire and Loading Information placard
Ú page 135.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, Gross
Axle Weight Ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading,
and trailer towing Ú page 135.
8
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 283
284 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
To determine the maximum loading conditions of
your vehicle, locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading
Information placard. The combined weight of
occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue
weight (if applicable) should never exceed the
weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load
Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lb passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and
there will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle,
the amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as
shown in step 4.
NOTE:
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
The following table shows examples on how to
calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing
capacities of your vehicle with varying seating
configurations and number and size of occu-
pants. This table is for illustration purposes only
and may not be accurate for the seating and
load carry capacity of your vehicle.
For the following example, the combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
865 lbs (392 kg).
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 284
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 285
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
8
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 285
286 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
Four primary areas are affected by improper tire
pressure:
Safety
Fuel Economy
Tread Wear
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Safety
Both underinflation and overinflation affect the
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
sluggish response or over responsiveness in the
steering.
NOTE:
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may
cause erratic and unpredictable steering
response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may
cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling
resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable
ride. Overinflation produces a jarring and
uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the driver's
side door.
At least once a month:
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good
quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
make a visual judgment when determining
proper inflation. Tires may look properly inflated
even when they are underinflated.
Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible
damage.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are
always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire
inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and
can cause collisions.
Underinflation increases tire flexing and can
result in overheating and tire failure.
Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes
can cause damage that result in tire failure.
Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly,
resulting in loss of vehicle control.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering
problems. You could lose control of your
vehicle.
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the
vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to
drift to the right or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the
recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 286
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 287
after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The cold
tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire
sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a
wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire
pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi
(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change.
Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure
inside a garage, especially in the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C)
and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then
the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased
by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for
every 12°F (7°C) for this outside temperature
condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to
40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this
normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will
be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe
speeds and within posted speed limits. Where
speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle
can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct
tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased
tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be
required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to
an authorized tire dealer or original equipment
vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating
speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
Radial Ply Tires
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if
it meets the following criteria:
The tire has not been driven on when flat.
The damage is only on the tread section of your
tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch
(6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs
and additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced
immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical
size and service description (Load Index and
Speed Symbol). Replace the tire pressure sensor
as well as it is not designed to be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive
50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a
rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of
inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run
Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is
of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire
reaches the Run Flat mode it has limited driving
capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately.
A Run Flat tire is not repairable. When a Run Flat
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under
maximum load is dangerous. The added strain
on your tires could cause them to fail. You could
have a serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle
loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous
speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of
tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to
handle poorly. The instability could cause a
collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of
four. Never combine them with other types of
tires.
8
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 287
288 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
tire is changed after driving with underinflated tire
condition, please replace the TPMS sensor as it is
not designed to be reused when driven under a
Run Flat mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition.
NOTE:
TPMS sensor must be replaced after driving the
vehicle on a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at
full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the
Run Flat mode.
See the Tire Pressure Monitoring System section
for more information Ú page 184.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions,
do not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph
(48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds
continuously without stopping.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment
tires to help you in determining when your tires
should be replaced.
Tire Tread
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the
tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the
tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm).
When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the tire should be replaced
Ú page 289.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
Driving style.
Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pres-
sures can cause uneven wear patterns to
develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in
the need for earlier tire replacement.
Distance driven.
Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V
or higher, and Summer tires typically have a
reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires per
the vehicle scheduled maintenance is highly
recommended.
NOTE:
Wheel Valve Stem must be replaced as well when
installing new tires due to wear and tear in existing
tires.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause tire damage or failure. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your
vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
for more than 30 seconds continuously when
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after
six years, regardless of the remaining tread.
Failure to follow this warning can result in
sudden tire failure. You could lose control and
have a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 288
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 289
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as
little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires
from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of
many characteristics. They should be inspected
regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation
pressures. The manufacturer strongly
recommends that you use tires equivalent to the
originals in size, quality and performance when
replacement is needed Ú page 288. Refer to the
Tire and Loading Information placard or the
Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation
of your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for
your tire will be found on the original equipment
tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire
Safety Information for more information relating to
the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire
Ú page 280.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or
two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can
seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever
replace a wheel, make sure that the wheel’s
specifications match those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any
questions you may have on tire specifications or
capability. Failure to use equivalent replacement
tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and
ride of your vehicle.
TIRE TYPES
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons
(Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction
levels may vary between different All Season tires.
All Season tires can be identified by the M+S, M&S,
M/S or MS designation on the tire sidewall. Use All
Season tires only in sets of four; failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and handling of
your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires —
If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in
snow or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with
Summer tires, be aware these tires are not
designed for Winter or cold driving conditions.
Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient
temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads
are covered with ice or snow. For more
information, contact an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or
speed rating other than that specified for your
vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved
tires and wheels may change suspension
dimensions and performance characteristics,
resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpre-
dictable handling and stress to steering and
suspension components. You could lose
control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death. Use only the tire and
wheel sizes with load ratings approved for
your vehicle.
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally
equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a
smaller load index could result in tire over-
loading and failure. You could lose control and
have a collision.
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in
sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different
size may result in false speedometer and
odometer readings.
8
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 289
290 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Summer tires do not contain the all season
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the
tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow
tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified
by a mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire
sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the original
equipment tires. Use snow tires only in
sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your
vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than
what was originally equipped with your vehicle and
should not be operated at sustained speeds over
75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph
(120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an
authorized tire dealer for recommended safe
operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice,
skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces
may be poorer than that of non-studded tires.
Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local
laws should be checked before using these tire
types.
SPARE TIRES — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead
of a spare tire, please refer to Tire Service Kit
Ú page 232.
Refer to Towing Requirements - Tires for
restrictions when towing with a spare tire
designated for temporary emergency use
Ú page 140.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the
original equipment tire and wheel found on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire
may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. If
your vehicle has this option, refer to an authorized
tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation
pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a compact spare by looking at the
spare tire description on the Tire and Loading
Information Placard located on the driver’s side
door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the
letter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation.
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel,
since the wheel is designed specifically for the
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions.
You could lose vehicle control, resulting in
severe injury or death. Driving too fast for
conditions also creates the possibility of loss of
vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do
not take your vehicle through an automatic car
wash with a compact or limited use temporary
spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
result.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 290
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 291
compact spare tire. Do not install more than one
compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any
given time.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The Full Size spare is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire may look like the originally equipped
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is
not. This spare tire may have limited tread life.
When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use Full Size spare tire
needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle
at the first opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary
emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label
located on the limited use spare wheel. This label
contains the driving limitations for this spare. This
tire may look like the original equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle
at the first opportunity.
WHEEL AND WHEEL TRIM CARE
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum
and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned
regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to
maintain their luster and to prevent corrosion.
Wash wheels with the same soap solution
recommended for the body of the vehicle and
remember to always wash when the surfaces are
not hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration
caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road
chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on dirt
roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap to
wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or
a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s
protective coating that helps keep them from
corroding and tarnishing.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not
drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary
use spares have limited tread life. When the tread
is worn to the tread wear indicators, the
temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be
sure to follow the warnings, which apply to your
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive
more than the speed listed on the limited use
spare wheel. Keep inflated to the cold tire
inflation pressures listed on your Tire and
Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and
reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
result in loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or
harsh brushes. Many aftermarket wheel
cleaners and automatic car washes may
damage the wheel's protective finish. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar®
Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
8
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 291
292 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including
excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the
selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and
equipment to prevent damage to the wheels.
Mopar® Wheel Treatment or Mopar® Chrome
Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended, or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for
aluminum or chrome wheels.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with
wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the
brakes to remove the water droplets from the
brake components. This activity will remove the
red rust on the brake rotors and prevent vehicle
vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low
Gloss Clear Coat Wheels
SNOW TRACTION DEVICES
Use of traction devices require sufficient
tire-to-body clearance. Due to limited clearance,
the following snow traction devices are
recommended. Follow these recommendations to
guard against damage.
Snow traction device must be of proper size for
the tire, as recommended by the snow traction
device manufacturer.
No other tire sizes are recommended for use
with the snow traction device.
Please follow the table below for the recom-
mended tire size, axle and snow traction device:
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle
brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel's protective
finish. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap,
Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or
polishing compounds. They will permanently
damage this finish and such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP AND WATER
WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this
is all that is required to maintain this finish.
FWD
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device (maximum
projection beyond tire profile or
equivalent)
Sport
Latitude
Latitude Plus
Limited
Overland
Front
215/60R17
17 x7.0 x 41 mm
7 mm Cable Chain
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 292
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 293
4X4 - Jeep® Active Drive I
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device (maximum
projection beyond tire profile or
equivalent)
Sport
Latitude
Latitude Plus
Trailhawk
Limited
Overland
Front
215/60R17
17 x7.0 x 41mm
9mm Cable Chain
4X4 - Jeep® Active Drive II
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device (maximum
projection beyond tire profile or
equivalent)
Latitude
Latitude Plus
Limited
Overland
Front
225/65R17
17 x 7.0 x 41mm
225/60R18
18 x 7.0 x 41mm
7mm Cable Chain
Trailhawk
225/65R17
17 x 7.5 x 31mm
9mm Cable Chain
8
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 293
294 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
(Continued)
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle
operate at different loads and perform different
steering, handling, and braking functions. For
these reasons, they wear at unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of
tires. The benefits of rotation are especially
worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as
those on On/Off Road type tires. Rotation will
increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow,
and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the Maintenance Plan for the proper
maintenance intervals Ú page 248. The reasons
for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected
prior to rotation being performed.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S,
Snow) between front and rear axles can cause
unpredictable handling. You could lose control
and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Use on front tires only.
Damage to Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Models
may result if tire chains or traction devices are
used with original equipment size tires.
Damage to Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Models
without a Two-Speed Power Transfer Unit may
result if tire chains or traction devices are
used with original equipment size tires.
Damage to Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Trailhawk
Models may result if tire chains or traction
devices are used with original equipment size
tires.
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe
the following precautions:
Because of restricted traction device clear-
ance between tires and other suspension
components, it is important that only traction
devices in good condition are used. Broken
devices can cause serious damage. Stop the
vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could
indicate device breakage. Remove the
damaged parts of the device before further
use.
Install device as tightly as possible and then
retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
Autosock traction devices do not require
retightening.
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and
large bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement.
CAUTION!
Observe the traction device manufacturer’s
instructions on the method of installation,
operating speed, and conditions for use.
Always use the suggested operating speed of
the device manufacturer’s if it is less than
30 mph (48 km/h).
Do not use traction devices on a compact
spare tire.
CAUTION!
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 294
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 295
The suggested rotation method is the “forward
cross” shown in the following diagram. This
rotation pattern does not apply to some directional
tires that must not be reversed.
Tire Rotation (Forward Cross)
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform
to Federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
TREADWEAR
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half times as well on
the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
TRACTION GRADES
The Traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades
represent the tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement, as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
TEMPERATURE GRADES
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
CAUTION!
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles
depends on tires of equal size, type and
circumference on each wheel. Any difference in
tire size can cause damage to the power transfer
unit. Tire rotation schedule should be followed to
balance tire wear.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based
on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and
does not include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
8
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 295
296 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel, than the
minimum required by law.
STORING THE VEHICLE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than three
weeks, we recommend that you take the following
steps to minimize the drain on your vehicle's
battery:
Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more,
run the air conditioning system at idle for about
five minutes in the fresh air and high blower
setting. This will ensure adequate system lubri-
cation to minimize the possibility of compressor
damage when the system is started again.
BODYWORK
PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC
A
GENTS
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to
geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that
make roads passable in snow and ice and those
that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during
other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in
your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your
vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on
which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold
weather and other extreme conditions will have an
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody
protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will
enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the
corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal
of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
Stone and gravel impact.
Insects, tree sap and tar.
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
BODY AND UNDERBODY MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights
and fog lights that are lighter and less susceptible
to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and
therefore different lens cleaning procedures must
be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses
and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry
cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap
solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
solvents, steel wool or other aggressive material to
clean the lenses.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation,
or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and
possible tire failure.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 296
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 297
PRESERVING THE BODYWORK
Washing
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your
vehicle in the shade using Mopar® Car Wash, or
a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels
completely with water.
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have
accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar®
Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove.
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar®
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to
protect your paint finish. Use precautions to not
scratch the paint.
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power
buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out
the paint finish.
Special Care
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you
drive near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage
at least once a month.
It is important that the drain holes in the lower
edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be
kept clear and open.
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the
paint, touch them up immediately.
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or
similar cause that destroys the paint and protec-
tive coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon
as possible.
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals,
fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such
materials are well packaged and sealed.
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads,
consider mud or stone shields behind each
wheel.
Use Mopar® Touch Up Paint on scratches as
soon as possible. An authorized dealer has
touch up paint to match the color of your
vehicle.
INTERIORS
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery
and carpeting.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the
fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution
or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from
the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. Replace
the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning mate-
rials such as steel wool or scouring powder
that will scratch metal and painted surfaces.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or removal
of paint and decals.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning
purposes. Many are potentially flammable, and
if used in closed areas they may cause
respiratory harm.
8
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 297
298 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
PLASTIC AND COATED PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster
Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this
vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When cleaning
the lenses, care must be taken to avoid scratching
the plastic.
Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution
may be used, but do not use high alcohol content
or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean
with a clean damp cloth. Dry with a soft cloth.
LEATHER SURFACES
Mopar® Total Clean is specifically recommended
for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by
regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small
particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage
the leather upholstery and should be removed
promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be
removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar® Total
Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not
use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents,
detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
your leather upholstery.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye
transfer more so than darker colors. The leather is
designed for easy cleaning, and the manufacturer
recommends Mopar® Total Clean leather cleaner
applied on a cloth to clean the leather seats as
needed.
GLASS SURFACES
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular
basis with Mopar® Glass Cleaner, or any
commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never
use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when
cleaning the inside rear window equipped with
electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio
antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp
instruments that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner
on the towel or cloth that you are using. Do not
spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
system. If your vehicle is involved in a collision,
or if you have questions regarding seat belt or
retractor conditions, take your vehicle to an
authorized FCA dealer or authorized FCA
Certified Collision Care Program facility for
inspection.
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repel-
lents, suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the
plastic, painted, or decorated surfaces of the
interior may cause permanent damage. Wipe
away immediately.
Damage caused by these type of products
may not be covered by your New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or
Ketone based cleaning products to clean leather
upholstery, as damage to the upholstery may
result.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 298
299
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
The VIN is found on the left front corner of the
instrument panel. The VIN is visible from outside of
the vehicle through the windshield.
Vehicle Identification Number
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake
systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems lose
normal capability, the remaining system will still
function. However, there will be some loss of
overall braking effectiveness. You may notice
increased pedal travel during application, greater
pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential
activation of the Brake Warning Light.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine OFF)
the brakes will still function. However, the effort
required to brake the vehicle will be much greater
than that required with the power system
operating.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to
ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the
vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed and
reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/bolts
should be torqued using a properly calibrated
torque wrench using a six-sided (hex) deep wall
socket.
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to
mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or
loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until
each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure
that the socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt
(do not insert it halfway).
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
100 Ft-Lb
(135 N·m)
M12 x 1.25 19 mm
9
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 299
300 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Torque Patterns
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt
torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are
properly tightened.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
While operating on gasoline with the required
octane number, hearing a light knocking sound from
the engine is not a cause for concern. However, if
the engine is heard making a heavy knocking sound,
see a dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with a
lower than recommended octane number can
cause engine failure and may void or not be covered
by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as
hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you
experience these symptoms, try another brand of
gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
2.0L ENGINE
This engine is designed to meet all
emission requirements, and provide
satisfactory fuel economy and
performance, when using unleaded
regular gasoline having an octane rating of 87, as
specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of 91 or
higher octane premium gasoline will allow these
engines to operate to optimal performance. This
increase in performance is most noticeable in hot
weather or other heavier load conditions, such as
while towing.
2.4L AND 3.2L ENGINES
These engines are designed to meet all
emission regulations and provide
optimum fuel economy and performance
when using unleaded regular gasoline
having a posted octane number of 87 as specified
by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of higher octane
premium gasoline is not required, as it will not
provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these
engines.
REFORMULATED GASOLINE
Many areas of the country require the use of
cleaner-burning gasoline referred to as
“reformulated gasoline”. Reformulated gasoline
contains oxygenates and are specifically blended
to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air
quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended.
Properly blended reformulated gasoline will
provide improved performance and durability of
engine and fuel system components.
GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with
oxygenates such as ethanol.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow
this warning may result in personal injury.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol,
or gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol
(E-15). Use of these blends may result in starting
and drivability problems, damage critical fuel
system components, cause emissions to exceed
the applicable standard, and/or cause the
Malfunction Indicator Light to illuminate. Please
observe pump labels as they should clearly
communicate if a fuel contains greater than
15% ethanol (E-15).
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 300
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 301
Problems that result from using gasoline
containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or
gasoline containing methanol are not the
responsibility of the manufacturer and may void
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
DO NOT USE E-85 IN NON-FLEX FUEL
V
EHICLES
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with
gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use
of gasoline with higher ethanol content may void
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with
E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of these
symptoms:
Operate in a lean mode.
OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on.
Poor engine performance.
Poor cold start and cold drivability.
Increased risk for fuel system component corro-
sion.
CNG AND LP FUEL SYSTEM
M
ODIFICATIONS
Modifications that allow the engine to run on
Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid Propane
(LP) may result in damage to the engine,
emissions, and fuel system components. Problems
that result from running CNG or LP are not the
responsibility of the manufacturer and may void
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
METHYLCYCLOPENTADIENYL
M
ANGANESE TRICARBONYL (MMT) IN
G
ASOLINE
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive
that is blended into some gasoline to increase
octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no
performance advantage beyond gasoline of the
same octane number without MMT. Gasoline
blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and
reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that
gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle. The
MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on
the gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask the
gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains
MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California
reformulated gasoline.
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper
octane rating, gasolines that contain detergents,
corrosion and stability additives are
recommended. Using gasolines that have these
additives will help improve fuel economy, reduce
emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline
contains a higher level of detergents to
further aide in minimizing engine and
fuel system deposits. When available,
the usage of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is
recommended. Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list
of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents
should be avoided. Many of these materials
intended for gum and varnish removal may contain
active solvents or similar ingredients. These can
harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials.
9
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 301
302 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FUEL SYSTEM CAUTIONS
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
FLUID CAPACITIES
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s performance:
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or some
light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact an authorized dealer for service assistance.
The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of these products contain high concentrations of meth-
anol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer
and may void or not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
All Engines 15.8 Gallons 60 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
2.0L Engine 5 Quarts 4.7 Liters
2.4L Engine 5.5 Quarts 5.2 Liters
3.2L Engine 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
Cooling System*
2.0L Engine 9 Quarts 8.6 Liters
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 302
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 303
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
2.4L Engine 7.2 Quarts 6.8 Liters
3.2L Engine 10 Quarts 9.5 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
(240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent
meeting the requirements of the manufacturer Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil – 2.0L Engine
We recommend using Mopar® API SP/GF-6A Certified SAE 5W-30 Full
Synthetic Engine Oil which meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS-13340. Equivalent full synthetic 5W-30 API SP engine
oil can be used but must have the API Donut trademark Ú page 255.
CAUTION!
Failure to use the recommended API SP/GF-6A or equivalent oil can cause
engine damage not covered by the vehicle warranty.
Engine Oil – 2.4L Engine
We recommend using Mopar® SAE 0W-20 Full Synthetic Engine Oil which
meets the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS-6395.
Equivalent full synthetic SAE 0W-20 engine oil can be used but must have the
API Starburst trademark Ú page 255.
Engine Oil – 3.2L Engine
We recommend using Mopar® SAE 5W-20 Full Synthetic Engine Oil which
meets the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS-6395.
Equivalent full synthetic SAE 5W-20 engine oil can be used but must have the
API Starburst trademark Ú page 255.
US Metric
9
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 303
304 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Engine Oil Filter
We recommend using a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter. If a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter
is unavailable only use filters that meet or exceed SAE/USCAR-36 Filter
Performance Requirements.
Fuel Selection – 2.0L, 2.4L and 3.2L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol.
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission
Use only Mopar® ZF 8 & 9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or
equivalent.
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your
transmission.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend using Mopar® DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be used.
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 304
305
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
PREPARE FOR THE APPOINTMENT
All work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the
service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your
vehicle's service history. This can often provide a
clue to the current problem.
PREPARE A LIST
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the
specific work you want done. If you've had an
accident or work done that is not on your
maintenance log, let the service advisor know.
BE REASONABLE WITH REQUESTS
If you list a number of items and you must have
your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the
situation with the service advisor and list the items
in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you
may obtain a rental vehicle (additional charges
may apply). If you need a rental, it is advisable to
make these arrangements when you call for an
appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be
happy with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized
dealer. We strongly recommend that you take the
vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know your
vehicle the best, and are most concerned that you
get prompt and high quality service. FCA US LLC’s
authorized dealers have the facilities,
factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the
latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer’s service manager first. If for some reason
you are still not satisfied, talk to the general
manager or owner of the authorized dealer. They
want to know if you need assistance. If an authorized
dealer is unable to resolve the concern, you may
contact FCA US LLC Customer Assistance center.
Any communication to FCA US LLC’s customer
center should include the following information:
Owner's name and address
Owner's telephone number (mobile, home and
office)
Authorized dealer name
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (877) 426-5337
FCA CANADA INC. CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English /
(800) 387-9983 French
MEXICO
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52) 55 50817568
10
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 305
306 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
PUERTO RICO AND US VIRGIN ISLANDS
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (877) 426-5337
Fax: (787) 782-3345
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE
H
EARING OR SPEECH IMPAIRED
(TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties,
FCA US LLC has installed special TDD (Telecommu-
nication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its
customer center. Any hearing or speech impaired
customer, who has access to a TDD or a
conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United
States, can communicate with FCA US LLC by
dialing 1-800-380-2479.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that
require assistance can use the special needs relay
service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY
teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers,
dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay
Service operator.
SERVICE CONTRACT
You may have purchased a service contract for a
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of
unexpected repairs after FCA US LLC's New Vehicle
Limited Warranty expires. The Mopar® Vehicle
Protection plans are the ONLY vehicle extended
protection plans authorized, endorsed and backed
by FCA US LLC to provide additional protection
beyond your vehicle’s warranty. If you purchased a
Mopar® Vehicle Protection Plan, you will receive
Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in
the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery
date. If you have any questions about the service
contract, call FCA US LLC's Service Contract
National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922
(Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 English /
(800) 387-9983 French).
FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service
contract you may have purchased from another
manufacturer. If you require service after the FCA
US LLC New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires,
please refer to the contract documents, and
contact the person listed in those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major
investment when you purchased the vehicle. An
authorized dealer has also made a major
investment in facilities, tools, and training to
ensure that you are absolutely delighted with the
ownership experience.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to
this vehicle and market. Refer to www.mopar.com/
om for further information.
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA Canada Inc. warranties
applicable to this vehicle and market. Refer to
www.owners.mopar.ca/en for further information.
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines
only), some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In
addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain, or
emit, chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 306
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 307
MOPAR® PARTS
Mopar® original equipment parts & accessories
and factory filled fluids are available from an
authorized dealer. They are recommended for your
vehicle to keep it operating at its best and maintain
its original condition.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
IN THE 50 UNITED STATES AND
W
ASHINGTON, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, an authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); or go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington,
D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov.
IN CANADA
If you believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department
immediately. Canadian customers who
wish to report a safety defect to the
Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect
Investigations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to
wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/
PCDB-BDPP.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either
the website or the phone numbers listed below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide a
complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components and is written in
straightforward language with illustrations,
diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with
diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These
manuals make it easy to find and fix problems on
computer-controlled vehicle systems and features.
They show exactly how to find and correct
problems, using step-by-step troubleshooting and
drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and
a complete list of all tools and equipment.
To order a hard copy of your Service or Diagnostic
Procedure manuals, visit:
www.techauthority.com (US and Canada).
10
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 307
308 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with
the assistance of service and engineering
specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA
vehicles.
To access your Owner's Information online, visit
www.mopar.com/om (US) or
www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada).
Or
Call Tech Authority toll free at:
1-800-890-4038 (US)
Owner's Manuals, Radio Manuals and Warranty
Information Books can be ordered through
Archway at:
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
and with Innovation, Science and Economic
Development Canada license-exempt RSS
standard(s). Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development
applicables aux appareils radio exempts de
licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage,
et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre
le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 308
309
INDEX
A
About Your Brakes.........................................299
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise
Control)................................................ 107, 109
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............265
Adding Fuel....................................................134
Additives, Fuel ...............................................301
Air Bag ...........................................................198
Air Bag Operation ......................................200
Air Bag Warning Light...................... 197, 200
Driver Knee Air Bag ...................................204
Enhanced Accident Response......... 208, 246
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .......................246
Front Air Bag ................................... 198, 200
If Deployment Occurs................................207
Knee Impact Bolsters................................204
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ..............208
Maintenance .............................................208
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light .............198
Transporting Pets......................................221
Air Bag Light ..................................80, 197, 221
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner
Filter) .............................................................256
Air Conditioner Maintenance .........................258
Air Conditioner Refrigerant .................. 258, 259
Air Conditioner System ..................................258
Air Conditioning Filter..............................57, 259
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips.......................57
Air Filter ........................................................ 256
Air Pressure
Tires ......................................................... 286
Alarm
Arm The System ..........................................22
Disarm The System .....................................22
Security Alarm ......................................22, 83
All Wheel Drive (AWD) ................................... 100
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................. 265, 302
Disposal ................................................... 266
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...................... 169
Anti-Lock Warning Light ...................................83
Assist, Hill Start............................................. 175
Audio Systems (Radio).................................. 149
Auto Down Power Windows .............................63
Auto Up Power Windows ..................................63
Automatic Climate Controls .............................51
Automatic Dimming Mirror...............................38
Automatic Door Locks......................................26
Automatic Headlights.......................................45
Automatic High Beams ....................................45
Automatic Tailgate Release .............................68
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) .............56
Automatic Transaxle ........................................95
Automatic Transmission...................................96
Adding Fluid.............................................. 268
Fluid And Filter Change............................. 268
Fluid Change............................................. 268
Fluid Level Check...................................... 268
Fluid Type ................................................. 268
Special Additives ...................................... 268
Torque Converter...................................... 100
Autostick ..........................................................99
AUX Cord ..........................................................60
Auxiliary (Power Outlet) ....................................60
B
Battery ................................................... 81, 254
Keyless Key Fob Replacement ....................15
Battery Saver Feature ......................................47
Belts, Seat .................................................... 221
Blind Spot Monitoring ................................... 178
Body Mechanism Lubrication........................ 260
Bodywork ...................................................... 296
B-Pillar Location ............................................ 283
Brake Assist System ............................ 170, 182
Brake Control System ................................... 170
Brake Fluid.................................................... 267
Brake System.......................................267, 299
Anti-Lock (ABS) ......................................... 299
11
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 309
310
Fluid Check ...............................................267
Master Cylinder .........................................267
Parking........................................................92
Warning Light .............................................. 80
Brake/Transmission Interlock ......................... 96
Brightness, Interior Lights................................ 48
Bulb Replacement.........................................278
Bulbs, Light....................................................223
C
Camera, Rear ................................................133
Capacities, Fluid ............................................302
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine)............................. 251, 252, 253
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ......................266
Car Washes ...................................................297
Carbon Monoxide Warning ............................223
Care And Maintenance ..................................296
Cargo Area Cover............................................. 70
Cargo Compartment ........................................ 70
Cargo Load Floor ............................................. 70
Cargo Tie-Downs.............................................. 70
Cellular Phone ...............................................166
Center Seat Storage Compartment ................. 59
Certification Label .........................................135
Changing A Flat Tire.......................................227
Chart, Tire Sizing............................................280
Chassis Fluids And Lubricants.......................304
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator
Light) ............................................................... 89
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ................. 221
Checks, Safety .............................................. 221
Child Restraint .............................................. 209
Child Restraints
Booster Seats........................................... 212
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt .... 217
Infant And Child Restraints....................... 211
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children.. 213
Older Children And Child Restraints ......... 211
Seating Positions...................................... 212
Clean Air Gasoline......................................... 300
Cleaning
Wheels ..................................................... 291
Climate Control ................................................51
Cold Weather Operation ..................................91
Compact Spare Tire ...................................... 290
Console
Storage........................................................59
Contract, Service .......................................... 306
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap)............ 266
Cooling System ............................................. 264
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................... 265
Coolant Level............................................ 266
Cooling Capacity....................................... 302
Disposal Of Used Coolant......................... 266
Drain, Flush, And Refill ............................. 265
Inspection........................................ 264, 266
Points To Remember................................ 266
Pressure Cap............................................ 266
Radiator Cap............................................. 266
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze)..... 265, 302
Corrosion Protection ..................................... 296
Cruise Control (Speed Control).............107, 109
Cruise Light...............................................87, 88
Customer Assistance .................................... 305
Cybersecurity ................................................ 149
D
Daytime Running Lights ...................................44
Defroster, Windshield ................................... 221
De-Icer, Remote Start ......................................21
Diagnostic System, Onboard............................88
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) ............................................... 254
Disable Vehicle Towing ................................. 243
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...................... 266
Door Ajar ...................................................81, 82
Door Ajar Light .................................................82
Door Locks
Automatic ....................................................26
Doors ...............................................................23
Driver Memory Settings....................................29
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt......................................30
Driving........................................................... 146
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 310
311
E
Easy Entry Seats.............................................. 34
Electric Brake Control System .......................170
Anti-Lock Brake System.............................169
Electronic Roll Mitigation................. 171, 178
Electric Parking Brake ..................................... 92
Electrical Power Outlets................................... 60
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control)......109
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ...................171
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light ........ 82
Emergency
SOS Emergency Call..................................224
Emergency Gas Can Refueling ......................239
Emergency, In Case Of
Gear Selector Override..............................241
Hazard Warning Flasher............................224
Jacking ......................................................227
Jump Starting............................................237
Tow Hooks.................................................245
Emission Control System Maintenance ........... 89
Engine ........................................ 251, 252, 253
Air Cleaner.................................................256
Block Heater ............................................... 91
Break-In Recommendations........................ 92
Checking Oil Level.....................................254
Cooling ......................................................264
Exhaust Gas Caution.................................223
Fails To Start ............................................... 91
Flooded, Starting......................................... 91
Fuel Requirements....................................300
Jump Starting ........................................... 237
Oil .................................................... 255, 302
Oil Filler Cap ...........................251, 252, 253
Oil Filter .................................................... 256
Oil Reset......................................................75
Oil Selection .................................... 255, 302
Oil Synthetic ............................................. 256
Overheating.............................................. 240
Engine Fluids And Lubricants........................ 303
Enhanced Accident Response
Feature ................................................ 208, 246
Ethanol ......................................................... 300
Exhaust Gas Cautions................................... 223
Exhaust System ............................................ 263
Exterior Lights.........................................43, 223
F
Filters
Air Cleaner................................................ 256
Air Conditioning ..................................57, 259
Engine Oil ................................................. 256
Engine Oil Disposal................................... 256
Flashers
Hazard Warning........................................ 224
Turn Signals .......................................87, 223
Flash-To-Pass...................................................45
Flat Tire Changing................................ 279, 290
Flat Tire Stowage ................................. 279, 290
Flooded Engine Starting...................................91
Fluid Capacities ............................................ 302
Fluid Leaks.................................................... 223
Fluid Level Checks
Brake........................................................ 267
Engine Oil ................................................. 254
Fob, Key ...........................................................14
Fog Lights ........................................................46
Fold-Flat Seats .................................................30
Folding Rear Seats...........................................32
Forward Collision Warning ............................ 182
Four Wheel Drive........................................... 100
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle................................. 242
Fuel
Additives................................................... 301
Clean Air ................................................... 300
Ethanol ..................................................... 300
Light.............................................................84
Materials Added ....................................... 301
Methanol .................................................. 300
Tank Capacity ........................................... 302
Fueling .......................................................... 134
Fuses ............................................................ 269
G
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) .....................39
Gasoline, Clean Air........................................ 300
Gasoline, Reformulated ................................ 300
Gear Ranges ....................................................97
Gear Selector Override.................................. 241
Glass Cleaning .............................................. 298
Gross Axle Weight Rating .............................. 137
11
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 311
312
Gross Combination Weight Rating .................137
Gross Trailer Weight ......................................136
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating..........................136
GVWR ............................................................135
H
Hazard Warning Flashers ..............................224
Head Restraint Removal.................................. 36
Head Restraints............................................... 36
Head Rests...................................................... 36
Headlights ....................................................... 44
Automatic.................................................... 45
Automatic High Beam.................................. 45
Cleaning ....................................................296
High Beam ........................................... 43, 45
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch.......... 45
On With Wipers............................................46
Passing................................................. 43, 45
Switch ......................................................... 44
Time Delay .................................................. 46
Heated Mirrors ................................................ 39
Heated Seats................................................... 35
Heated Steering Wheel.................................... 27
Heater, Engine Block ....................................... 91
Hill Descent Control.......................................174
Hill Descent Control Indicator ........................174
Hill Start Assist ..............................................175
Hitches
Trailer Towing............................................138
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) .................... 39
Hood Prop........................................................66
Hood Release ..................................................66
I
Ignition.............................................................17
Switch..........................................................17
Ignition Pak Interlock .......................................96
Illuminated Entry..............................................49
Indicator light
Blue.............................................................88
Green ..........................................................87
White ...........................................................87
Yellow ..........................................................86
Inside Rearview Mirror............................38, 224
Instrument Cluster
Descriptions .................................. 72, 74, 87
Display.........................................................74
Display Controls...........................................74
Engine Oil Reset ..........................................75
Menu Items ..........................................76, 78
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning................... 298
Interior Appearance Care.............................. 297
Interior Lights...................................................47
Inverter
Power ..........................................................62
J
Jack Location................................................ 227
Jack Operation.............................................. 227
Jacking And Tire Changing............................ 227
Jump Starting................................................ 237
K
Key Fob
Arm The System...........................................22
Disarm The System......................................22
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless
Entry) ...............................................................15
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless
Entry) ...............................................................16
Keyless Enter-N-Go ..........................................24
Passive Entry ...............................................24
Keys .................................................................14
Replacement ...............................................16
L
Lane Change Assist..........................................47
LaneSense.................................................... 129
Lap/Shoulder Belts....................................... 190
Latches ......................................................... 223
Hood............................................................66
Leaks, Fluid................................................... 223
Life Of Tires................................................... 288
Liftgate.............................................................67
Closing.........................................................68
Hands-Free ..................................................68
Opening .......................................................67
Light Bulbs .................................................... 223
Lights ............................................................ 223
Air Bag ...................................... 80, 197, 221
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 312
313
Automatic Headlights.................................. 45
Automatic High Beam.................................. 45
Brake Assist Warning ................................173
Brake Warning ............................................80
Bulb Replacement.....................................278
Cruise................................................... 87, 88
Daytime Running......................................... 44
Engine Temperature Warning...................... 82
Exterior...............................................43, 223
Fog ....................................................... 46, 87
High Beam .................................... 43, 45, 88
High Beam/Low Beam Select .....................45
Hill Descent Control Indicator....................174
Illuminated Entry ......................................... 49
Intensity Control .......................................... 48
Interior ........................................................ 47
LaneSense .................................... 84, 87, 88
Lights On Reminder..................................... 46
Low Fuel...................................................... 84
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ......... 84
Park............................................................. 87
Passing........................................................45
Seat Belt Reminder..................................... 80
Security Alarm ............................................. 83
Service ......................................................278
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS)........85, 184
Traction Control.........................................173
Turn Signals ................................47, 87, 223
Vanity Mirror......................................... 38, 59
Load Shed Battery Saver Mode ....................... 79
Load Shed Battery Saver On............................79
Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction ..............79
Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor...............79
Loading Vehicle ............................................ 135
Tires ......................................................... 283
Locks
Automatic Door............................................26
Child Protection...........................................26
Power Door..................................................23
Low Tire Pressure System............................. 184
Lubrication, Body.......................................... 260
Lug Nuts/Bolts.............................................. 299
Luggage Carrier ...............................................71
M
Maintenance....................................................66
Maintenance Free Battery ............................ 254
Maintenance Schedule................................. 247
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check
Engine) ..................................................... 84, 89
Manual
Service ..................................................... 307
Manual Climate Controls .................................54
Media Hub .......................................................60
Memory Feature (Memory Seats) ....................29
Methanol ...................................................... 300
Mirrors .............................................................38
Heated.........................................................39
Outside........................................................39
Power ..........................................................39
Rearview............................................ 38, 224
Vanity....................................................38, 59
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle.........................................................10
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ...................... 184
Mopar Parts .................................................. 307
MP3 Control.....................................................60
Multi-Function Control Lever ............................43
N
New Vehicle Break-In Period............................92
O
Occupant Restraints ..................................... 188
Off Road Pages ............................................. 166
Accessory Gauges..................................... 168
Drivetrain.................................................. 167
Pitch And Roll ........................................... 167
Status Bar................................................. 167
Off-Road Pages
Selec-Terrain............................................. 168
Oil Filter, Change........................................... 256
Oil Filter, Selection ........................................ 256
Oil Pressure Light.............................................82
Oil Reset ..........................................................75
Oil, Engine..................................................... 255
Capacity.................................................... 302
Checking................................................... 254
Dipstick..................................................... 254
Disposal.................................................... 256
11
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 313
314
Filter..........................................................256
Filter Disposal ...........................................256
Identification Logo.....................................255
Materials Added To ...................................256
Pressure Warning Light ............................... 82
Recommendation............................ 255, 302
Synthetic ...................................................256
Viscosity ....................................................302
Onboard Diagnostic System ............................ 88
Operating Precautions ..................................... 88
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual ........................................307
Outside Rearview Mirrors ................................ 39
Overheating, Engine ......................................240
P
Paddle Shifters ................................................ 99
Paint Care......................................................296
Parking Brake.................................................. 92
ParkSense
Front And Rear ..........................................117
ParkSense Active Park Assist ........................124
ParkSense System, Rear ...............................117
Passive Entry ................................................... 24
Pets ...............................................................221
Pinch Protection .............................................. 66
Placard, Tire And Loading Information...........283
Power
Brakes.......................................................299
Door Locks ..................................................23
Inverter........................................................62
Mirrors.........................................................39
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ................60
Windows......................................................62
Power Seats
Down ...........................................................34
Forward .......................................................34
Rearward.....................................................34
Up................................................................34
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts.................. 195
Preparation For Jacking ................................ 227
Pressure Washing......................................... 255
Pretensioners
Seat Belts................................................. 196
R
Radial Ply Tires ............................................. 287
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ........... 266
Radio
Off-Road Pages......................................... 166
Radio Operation............................................ 166
Rain Sensitive Wiper System ...........................50
Rear Camera................................................. 133
Rear Cross Path............................................ 181
Rear ParkSense System ............................... 117
Rear Seats, Folding..........................................32
Rear Wiper/Washer .........................................50
Recreational Towing ..................................... 142
Shifting Into Power Transfer Unit
Neutral (N) ........................................... 144
Shifting Into Transfer Case Neutral (N)..... 144
Shifting Out Of Power Transfer Unit
Neutral (N)............................................ 145
Shifting Out Of Transfer Case
Neutral (N)............................................ 145
Reformulated Gasoline ................................. 300
Refrigerant........................................... 258, 259
Release, Hood..................................................66
Reminder, Lights On ........................................46
Reminder, Seat Belt...................................... 189
Remote Control
Starting System ...........................................19
Remote Keyless Entry ......................................15
Arm The Alarm .............................................22
Disarm The Alarm ........................................22
Programming Additional Key Fobs...............16
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode...............................20
Uconnect Customer Programmable
Features ..................................................21
Uconnect Settings .......................................21
Remote Starting System ..................................19
Replacement Keys...........................................16
Replacement Tires........................................ 289
Reporting Safety Defects .............................. 307
Restraints, Child............................................ 209
Restraints, Head ..............................................36
Roll Over Warning ..............................................9
Roof Type Carrier .............................................71
Rotation, Tires............................................... 294
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 314
315
S
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle.........................221
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ......................222
Safety Defects, Reporting..............................307
Safety Information, Tire .................................279
Safety Tips.....................................................221
Schedule, Maintenance.................................247
Seat Belt Reminder ......................................... 80
Seat Belts ............................................ 189, 221
Adjustable Shoulder Belt...........................193
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage......193
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Anchorage.............................................193
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)............196
Child Restraints.........................................209
Energy Management Feature....................196
Extender....................................................195
Front Seat .............................. 189, 190, 192
Inspection .................................................221
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ....................192
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ...................192
Lap/Shoulder Belts ...................................190
Operating Instructions...............................192
Pregnant Women ......................................195
Pretensioners............................................196
Rear Seat ..................................................190
Reminder ..................................................189
Seat Belt Extender ....................................195
Seat Belt Pretensioner ..............................196
Untwisting Procedure ................................192
Seat Belts Maintenance ............................... 297
Seats ...............................................................30
Adjustment ...........................................30, 34
Easy Entry....................................................34
Head Restraints...........................................36
Heated.........................................................35
Memory .......................................................29
Rear Folding ................................................30
Tilting...........................................................30
Vented.........................................................35
Ventilated ....................................................35
Security Alarm...........................................22, 83
Arm The System ..........................................22
Disarm The System .....................................22
Selec-Terrain................................................. 103
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ..................................17
Sentry Key Replacement .................................16
Service Assistance........................................ 305
Service Contract ........................................... 306
Service Manuals ........................................... 307
Settings ........................................................ 150
Shift Lever Override ...................................... 241
Shifting
Automatic Transmission ..............................96
Power Transfer Unit, Shifting Into Power
Transfer Unit Neutral (N) ............. 144, 145
Transfer Case, Shifting Into Transfer
Case Neutral (N)................................... 144
Transfer Case, Shifting Out Of Transfer
Case Neutral (N)................................... 145
Shoulder Belts .............................................. 190
Side Distance Warning System ..................... 123
Side View Mirror Adjustment............................39
Signals, Turn .......................................... 87, 223
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ............................ 292
Snow Tires .................................................... 290
Spare Tires........................................... 290, 291
Speed Control
Cancel....................................................... 108
Resume .................................................... 108
Starting ............................................................90
Button..........................................................17
Cold Weather...............................................91
Engine Fails To Start....................................91
Remote........................................................19
Starting Procedures .........................................90
Steering
Tilt Column...................................................27
Wheel, Heated .............................................27
Stop/Start.............................................. 87, 104
Storage .....................................................58, 59
Console........................................................59
Storage Compartment, Center Seat .................59
Storage, Vehicle ..................................... 57, 296
Storing Your Vehicle ...................................... 296
Stuck, Freeing............................................... 242
Sun Roof ...................................................64, 66
Closing.........................................................64
Opening .......................................................64
Sun Visor..........................................................59
11
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 315
316
Sun Visor Extension......................................... 39
Sunshade Operation........................................ 64
Supplemental Restraint System – Air Bag.....198
Sway Control, Trailer......................................178
Symbol Glossary .............................................. 10
Synthetic Engine Oil.......................................256
System, Remote Starting................................. 19
T
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ............56
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo.................................... 70
Time Delay
Headlight..................................................... 46
Tire And Loading Information Placard ...........283
Tire Markings.................................................279
Tire Safety Information ..................................279
Tire Service Kit ..................232, 233, 236, 237
Tires...................................222, 286, 290, 295
Aging (Life Of Tires) ...................................288
Air Pressure...............................................286
Chains .......................................................292
Changing ...................................................227
Compact Spare .........................................290
General Information ........................ 286, 290
High Speed................................................287
Inflation Pressure......................................286
Jacking ......................................................227
Life Of Tires ...............................................288
Load Capacity............................................283
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)..85, 184
Quality Grading......................................... 295
Radial ....................................................... 287
Replacement ............................................ 289
Rotation.................................................... 294
Safety .............................................. 279, 286
Sizes......................................................... 280
Snow Tires................................................ 290
Spare Tires ...................................... 290, 291
Spinning ................................................... 288
Trailer Towing ........................................... 140
Tread Wear Indicators .............................. 288
Wheel Nut Torque..................................... 299
To Open Hood ..................................................66
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ............. 137, 139
Torque Converter Clutch ............................... 100
Tow Hooks
Emergency................................................ 245
Towing ........................................136, 138, 243
Disabled Vehicle....................................... 243
Recreational ............................................. 142
Towing Behind A Motorhome........................ 142
Traction Control ............................................ 178
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)............................. 178
Trailer Towing ............................................... 136
Frontal Area.............................................. 137
Hitches ..................................................... 138
Minimum Requirements........................... 139
Tips........................................................... 141
Trailer And Tongue Weight............... 138, 139
Weight Carrying Hitch ............................... 137
Weight Distributing Hitch.......................... 137
Wiring ....................................................... 140
Trailer Towing Guide ..................................... 138
Trailer Weight................................................ 138
Transaxle
Automatic ....................................................95
Operation.....................................................95
Transmission....................................................96
Automatic .......................................... 96, 268
Maintenance ............................................ 268
Transporting Pets.......................................... 221
Tread Wear Indicators................................... 288
Turn Signals .......................................43, 47, 87
U
Uconnect
Uconnect Settings ............................. 21, 150
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable Features.......21, 24
Passive Entry Programming.........................24
Uniform Tire Quality Grades .......................... 295
Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) .....39
Universal Garage Door Opener
(HomeLink®) — If Equipped
b
.......................39
Universal Transmitter.......................................39
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt.................... 192
USB..................................................................60
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 316
317
V
Vanity Mirrors ..................................................38
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)...............299
Vehicle Loading ................................... 135, 283
Vehicle Maintenance.....................................255
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations.................... 10
Vehicle Settings.............................................150
Vehicle Storage ......................................57, 296
Voice Command .............................................. 28
Voice Recognition System (VR)........................ 28
W
Warning light
Red..............................................................80
Yellow ..........................................................83
Warning Lights And Messages.........................80
Warnings, Roll Over ........................................... 9
Warranty Information.................................... 306
Washers, Windshield .................................... 254
Washing Vehicle ........................................... 297
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care .......................... 291
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ........................... 291
Wind Buffeting .................................................64
Window Fogging...............................................57
Windows ..........................................................62
Power...........................................................62
Windshield Defroster .................................... 221
Windshield Washers ........................................49
Fluid.......................................................... 254
Windshield Wiper Blades .............................. 260
Windshield Wipers ................................. 49, 254
Wipers Blade Replacement........................... 260
Wipers, Intermittent .........................................49
Wipers, Rain Sensitive .....................................50
11
22_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 317
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
resulting in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device
or feature that may take their attention o the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios,
vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting
while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full
attention to vehicle operation, pull o the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of
cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Jeep
®
brand vehicle and to provide a convenient
reference source for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit mopar.com/om (U.S.), owners.mopar.ca
(Canada) or your local Jeep
®
brand dealer.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels
far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a rideshare, a friend
or use public transportation.
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired
when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
First Edition
22_KL_OM_EN_USC
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what
steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of
your Jeep
brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly
to the App Store® or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “JEEP” (U.S. residents only).
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
owners.mopar.ca
CanadaU. S.
mopar.com/om
©2021 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Jeep est une
marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
